tekla handbook lt

eSe TEKLA

Tekia StructuresConnection map

Tekia Structures 10.1

June 09, 2004

Copyright © 2004 Tekla Corporation

Copyright © 2004 by Tekla Corporation

All rights reserved. No part of the contents of this manual may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means without the writtenpermission of Tekla Corporation.

Limitation of warranty and liability

NOTICE: THE FOLLOWING LIMITED WARRANTIES APPLY ONLY TO THE CIRCUMSTANCES SET FORTH HEREIN.THERE ARE NO OTHER WARRANTIES, WHETHER ORAL OR WRITTEN, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOTLIMITED TO ANY WARRANTY OF MERCHANTABILITY OR OF FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND ANY WAR.RANTY AGAINST INFRINGEMENT OF ANY PATENT TRADEMARK OR COPYRIGHT EXCEFF AS OTHERWISE HEREINPROVIDED.

Tekla Corporation (Tekla”) warrants that its software products will perform on computer configurations approved by Tekla as described in thismanual and other Tekla’s documentation accompanying the relevant software so long as they are installed, implemented and operated in accordance therewith.

Furthermore Tekia warrants that the instructions and information contained in this manual will, when applied by adequately qualified operators(or developers as the case may be), or where appropriate, qualified civil/structural engineers, result in the software performing substantially asdescribed in the documentation accompanying the software.

This warranty sets out Tekla’s entire liability to the customer, its employees, servants, agents and sub-contractors, including but not limited to,its liability in contractor tort and including any liability for the actions and omissions of Tekla’s employees, servants, agents and sub-contractors.

Tekla does not exclude or limit the application of any warranty or condition implied by the relevant legislation which may not be excluded,restricted or modified by agreement.

Tekla does not give any warranty in respect of third party software except that Tekla’s software is, to the extent referred to in this manual andother documentation accompanying the software product, compatible with third party software products. Neither does this warranty extend toany modifications or enhancements of Tekla’s software products made by other than Tekla. The results and performance of the software products due to modifications or enhancements including direct interfacing with Tekla’s software shall be the sole responsibility of the person making such modifications or enhancements. The customer is not entitled to make any modification or alteration in or to the software without theprior written consent of Tekla.

Tekla’s sole responsibility under this warranty shall be limited to correcting errors in or replacing Tekla’s software so that it performs substantially as specified in the documentation for such software products or correcting such errors in this manual that prevent the use of software.

The contents of this warranty are supplemented by the terms and conditions that are defined in the TAC2000 agreement document that has been

reviewed by and agreed to comply by the customer’s primary officer who signed the COSLA for the Tekla software at the time of purchase.

Tekla does not warrant that the software products will:

I. Be suitable for use as intended by the customer.

2. Operate uninterrupted or error-flee.

3. tnteract with application packages other than those specified in the accompanying documentation and/or this manual.4. Operate with hardware or hardware configurations other than those approved by Tekla.

Except as expressly set out in this manual Tekla shall not be liable for:

t. Misuse or negligent use and/or use by unqualified persons of the software products including ilure to use the software products in accordance with accompanying manuals.

2. Loss or damage arising from any errors that may be contained in the text of this manual or other documentation accompanying the relevantsoftware product, or of the operation of the software.

3. Indirect special or consequential damages (including loss of profits revenue or contracts) whether based on contract tort or any other legaltheory. The foregoing limitation of liability shall not apply in the event that the software product is determined by a court of competentjurisdiction to be defective and to have directly caused bodily injury, death, or property damage provided that, to the extent permitted bylaw, Tekla’s liability shall in no event and for any damage exceed the license fee for the specific software that caused such damage.

This warranty shall be null and void and of no effect unless and until the customer shall advise Tekla in writing of any and all claims based inwhole or in part on warranty within ten days of the customer becoming aware of such claims.

This warranty shall be interpreted pursuant to the laws of Finland.

Trademarks

tttWindows XP, Internet Explorer, FrontPage, Visual C++, COM and VBScript are trademarks of Microsoft Corporation.

Unix is a trademark of UNIX System Laboratories Inc.

JavaScript is a trademark of Sun Microsystems Inc.

Xsteel is a trademark of Tekla Corporation.***

Tekia Structures Connection MapTable of Contents

Connections are listed by the connection number. There are some duplicate numbers. For an alphabetical list of theconnections see the Index.

Connections

Windbracing (1) page 13

Cold rolled overlap (I) page 22

Seating cap plate (2) page 16

Eave Beams-Stanchion (3) page 22

Cross (4) page 16

Cold rolled sleeved (2) page 22

Rubber window gasket (4) page 22

Cold rolled sleeved (4) page 23

Wind column (5) page 21

Tube splice (6) page 17

Bearing plate (7) page II

Gutter (7) page 22

Shaped Valley Cleat (8) page 22

Shear plate to hip (8) page 22

Notched seating (9) page I 6

Welded gusset (10) page 13

Stay (10) page 22

Bolted gusset (11) page 13

Purlin connections (11) page 22

Stiffener seating (12) page 11

Diag brace conn (12) page 22

Fitting (13) page 12

Joining plates (14) page 17

Simple hip (14) page 23

Stiffened shearplate(l7) page II

Bracing cross (19) page 13

Cold rolled overlap (19) page 23

Tube gusset (20) page 13

Tube crossing (22) page 13

Round tube (23) page 12

Two sided end plate (24) page 1 I

LS Brace Col End P1(24) page 25

TS Brace Col End P1(25) page 25

Muffe (26) page 17

Wind Col 1 (26) page 26

Stiffened end plate (27) page II

Bolted Cap Plate (27) page 26

Stub (28) page 21

Brace Clamp (28) page 25

End plate (29) page Ii

H/V Sloped Shear P1(29) page 24

Seating (30) page 16

H/v Shallow Framing (30) page 24

Welded column (31) page 12

Simple Clip Angle (31) page 24

Welded Tee (32) page Il

Simple Endplate (32) page 24

Tab plate (33) page]?

Tekia Stuctures Reterenco3

Two Side Clip Angle (33) page 24

Two Side Endplate (34) page 24

Shear P1 Simple (35) page 24

Seating with nail (36) page 16

Shear P1 Welded Top (36) page 24

Seating cap (37) page 16

Shear P1 Full Depth Special (37) page 24

Shear P1 to Top Special (38) page 24

Seating (39) page 16

Haunch (40) page 16

Shear P1 Parallel (40) page 24

Cranked beam (41) page 16

Shear P1 Col with Stiff (41) page 24

Column splice (42) page 17

Shear P1 Col with Stiff Special (42) page 24

Line/Plane INTERSECTION (42) page 26

Welded shear plate (43) page II

Shear and Flange Plates (43) page 24

Line/Part INTERSECTION (43) page 26

Weld preparation (44) page 12

Brace Corner Tubes and P1(44) page 25

Clip Angles (44) page 26

Box girder splice (45) page 17

Bracing Cross Under Beam (45) page 25

HQL (46) page 11

Bracing Wrap Around (46) page 25

Plate with nail (47) page II

Shear P1 to Tube Column (47) page 24

Spacer plate (48) page Il

Bent Shear Plate (48) page 24

New notch (49) page 12

Brace Corner Simple (49) page 25

Double plate (50) page 16

Central Brace Tube/Conn P1(50) page 25

Fit haunch (51) page 16

Central Bracing Simple (51) page 25

Traction bar (52) page 16

Seat Conn Type 1(52) page 26

Diagonal splice (53) page 13

Bracing Wrap Around w/Attachments (53) page 25

Seat Conn Type 2 (54) page 26

Corner tube gusset (56) page 13

Splice Type 1(56) page 25

Corner bolted gusset (57) page 13


Boomerang wrapped diagonal (58) page 13

Joist Seat (58) page 26

Boomerang tube diagonal (59) page 13


Boomerang bracing cross (60) page 13

Seat Type 5 (60) page 26

Wrapped cross(61) page 13

Purlin 1(61) page 25

Splice Plate 2 (62) page 25

Gusset wrapped diacro (62) page 13

2L Splice Connection (63) page 25

fLV Shear P1(64) page 24

Partial stiff end plate (65) page II

Tube Column Splice (65) page 25

Hss Brace Special (66) page 25

Standard bracing connection (67) page 13

Hss Brace Special (67) page 25

Column Splice 3 (68) page 25

Shear P1 Built-up T (69) page 24

Rail Joint (70) page 21

Brace w/L’s (70) page 25

US base plate connection (71) page 14

Brace w/L’s (71) page 25

US seat joint (72) page 21

US seat joint 2(73) page 21

Seat type 9 (73) page 26

US seat joint 3 (74) page 21

US seat joint 4 (75) page 21

Notch (76) page 12

US Splice joint (77) page 17

Simple Clip Angle 2 (82) page 26

r

p

4 Tekla Structures Reference

Purlin connections (93) page 16

HQ end plate (97) page II

Column tube seating (100) page 16

End plate (101) page 12

Eaves haunch (102) page 16

Shear plate(103) page 12

Tube seat (104) page 16

Eaves beam to stanchion (104) page 23

Portal bracing (105) page 13

Gable Post Fin Plate (105) page 23

Apexhaunch(106) page 16

Non-Continuous Rail (106) page 23

Windbrace connection (110) page 13

End plate - Comp flange (111) page 12

Two sided end plate - Comp flange (112) page 12

Tube rail (113) page 16

Panel stabilizer (114) page 16

Two sided end plate (115) page 12

Two sided shearplate (118) page 12

Joining stub (119) page II

Welded beam to beam (123) page 12

Circularjoining plates (124) page 17

Moose splice (125) page 17

Turnbuckle connection (126) page 17

Welded column with stiffener (128) page 12

Beam with stiffener (129) paQe 10

Moment connection (130) page 12

Column with shear plate (131) page 10

Column splice (132) page 17

Stub (133) page II

Bolted moment connection (134) page 10

Beam to beam stub (135) page II

Tapered column (136) page 17

Column site weld splice (137) page 17

Double bent gusset (140) page 13

Clip angle (141) page 10

Two sided end plate (142) pa2e 10

Two sided clip angle (143) page 10

End plate (144) page 10

Brace Middle Tubes and PL (144) page 25

Shear plate simple (146) page 10

Welded to top flange (147) page 10

Welded to top flange special (149) page 10

Brace Middle Simple (149) page 25

Tapered column-beam stub (150) page 11

Joist to beam typel (160) page 21

Joist to column type 1(161) page 21

2-sided joist to column (162) page 21

Joist to column type 2(163) page 21

Joist to beam and column (164) page 21

Heavy brace (165) page 13

Angle profile box (170) page 21

Gusset stiffener (171 page 14)

L splice (175) page 17

Parallel L profiles (176) page 17

Leg -2 or 3 diagonals (177) page 13

Leg-i diagonal (178) page 13

Moment connection (181) page 10

Column with stiffeners W (182) page 10

Beam prep (183) page 12

Full depth (184) page 10

Full depth special (185) page 10

Column with stiffeners (186) page 10

Column with stiffeners special (187) page 10

Column with stiffener (188) page 10

Shear plate tube column (189) page 10

Bent plate (190) page 10

Offshore Z(192) page 17

Offshore U (193) page 17

Offshore (194) page 12

Offshore 4(195) page 17

Tekia Stuctures Reference 5

DetailsSimple Base Plate (55) page 26

End plate detail (1002) page 14

Stiffeners (1003) page 14

Base plate (1004) page 4

Stiffened notch (1006) page 14

Shear stud (1010) page 15

Stub (1011) page 15

Stub plate (1013) page 21

Stiffened base plate (1014) page 14

Wood girder bearing(l015) page 16

Web stiffened base plate (1016) page !4

Horizontal stiffener (1017) page 14

LProf base detail (1020) page 22

Doubler plate (1022) page 15

Connection plate (1026) page 20

Duct hole sleeve (1029) page 15


Lifting/alignment pieces (1031) page 15

Simple Base Plate 2(1031) page 26

Manlock column (1032) page 15

Seat Det Type 2(1032) page 26

Manlock beam (1033) page 15

Seat Del Type 1(1033) page 26


Pum #1(1035) page 15

Pum #2 (1036) page 15

Pum #3(1037) page 15

Stair base detail (1038) page 20


Stairs and handrailLadder (35) page 19

Helicoida] stairs (S59) page 19

Cage ladder (S60) page 19

Zinc coating hole (S61) page 15

Spiral stairs (S68) page 19

Angle profile box (1040) page 21


Base plate (1042) page 14


US bearing plate (1044) page 16

Twin profile connection plate (1046)

US base plate (1047) page 14

US seat detail (1048) page 21

US seat detail 2(1049) page 21

Standard Tee(L050) page 14

Standard L0051) page 14

Circular base plate (1052) page 14

Base plate(l053) page 14

Dividing part (1054) page 17

Folded plate (1055) page 17

Ladder pieces (1056) page 20

Angle cut (1057) page 15

Penetrating diaphragm (1058) page 14

Inner diaphragm (1059) page 14

Web stiffeners (1060) page 14

Nethooks (1061) page 15

Safety rope hooks (1062) page 15

Staging paris (1063) page 15

Multiple stiffeners (1064) page 14

Standard gusset (1065) page 14

Box column base (1066) page 14

Joist bearing plate (1067) page 21

U-pan stairs (S71) page 19

Wooden step stairs (S72) page 19

Polybeam pan stairs (S73) page 19

Z.pan stairs (S74) page 19

Kickplate (S75) page 19

page 15

r

C

aS Tepda Structures Reterence

Stanchions (S76) page 19

Railings (S77) page 19

Stairs (582) page 19

Multiple beam railing (S84) page 19

Handrailing (1024) page 19

Connection plate (1026) page 20

Stringer stanchion Lprof(68) page 20

Stringer stanchion stiff (69) page 20

Handrail 1 (74) page 26

Stanchion side plate (83) page 20

Stanchion curved (84) page 20

MacrosPortal span (S2) page I 8

Turnbuckle bracing (S3) page 18

Built up box(S6) page 18

DWG profile to library (6) page 22

Panel in database (8) page 22

Generation of profiles (9) page 22

Profile cross-section from plate (10) page 22

Box girder (S13) page 18

Rolled cans (S2l) page 17

Tubular NC data (S22) page 17

Cross profile (S32) page 18

Cross plate (533) page 18

Dowco Bolt Macro (41) page 26

Tower generation (S43) page 18

Tapered column (S44) page 18

Tapered beam (S45) page 18

Crushed tube in points (S46) page 15

Gusset tube in points (547) page 15

Crushed tube in bolts (548) page 15

Gusset tube in bolts (549) page 15

Cross angles between points (550) page 15

Double angle between bolts (S51) page 15

Concrete var beam (S52) page 18

Tapered frame comonor (S53) page 18

Stanchion weld (85) page 20

Stanchion side profile (86) page 20

Stanchion double plate (87) page 20

Railing beam to beam (88) page 19

Railing beam to plane (89) page 19

Railing plane to plane (90) page 19

Railing plane to beam (94) page 19

Railing double curve (95) page 19

Grating penetration (92) page 20

Stringer cut (1023) page 20

Sagrods (S54) page 18

Windbracing (555) page 18

Vertical bracing (S56) page 18

Shed (S57) page 18

Building (S58) page 18

Tower member (S63) page 18

Footipak anchoring (564) page 14

Cross arms (S65) page 18

Tower diagonal (S66) page 18

Auto position (567) page 8

Hollow column stubs (569) page 17

Set Clearance (S70) page 17

Truss (578) page 8

Composite brace (S79) page 18

Bridging Macro (S80) page 22

Batten plates (585) page 15

Tapered beam (598) page 18

Tapered column (S99) page 18

Tekia Structures Reterence 7

0

U8 Tekra Structures Reference

I Tekia StructuresConnection Map

Introduction

This connection map is intended you help familiarize you with the location of the connections contained on each pageof the Tekia Structures connection menu. This map is current through Tekia Snuctures version 101

The connections shown in this map are those found on the Allcomponents toolbar. (Found on the menu:

______

Window> Toolbars> All components.) There are some minor differences found between the All components toolbar and theComponents toolbar. (U.S. connections)

TaMe Structures Reference 9Tekra Structures Connecton Map

Create current connection

Find a component

Next page arrow

End plate (144)

Clip angle (141)

Bent pLate (190)

Welded to top flange (147)

Display AutoConnectiondialog

Previous page arrow

Tekla StructuresConnections Page 1

Two-sided end plate (142)

Two-sided clip angle (143)

Shear plate simple (146)

Welded to top flange S (149)

Full depth (184)

I)I

Full depth S(185)

10 Tekja Structures Reference

‘3

I4

Beam with stiffener (129)

Column with stiffeners (186)

Column with stiffeners S (187)

Moment connection (181)

Shear plate tube column (189) FJ1

Column with shear plate (131)

Column with stiffeners (188)

Column with stiffeners W (182)

Bolted moment connection (134)

Bent plate (151)

Tekia SucIures Connection Map

2 Tekla StructuresConnections Page 2

End plate (29) 1fr: Two-sided end plate (24)

Welded shear plate (43) ]: ]J Stiffened shear plate (17)

Stiffened end plate (27) ]j[ Partial stiff end plate (65)

Stiffener seating (12) II V II Welded tee (32)

Spacer plate (48) jff Bearing plate (7)

Hql (46) [ J[ fl HQ End plate (97)

Plate with nail (47) fl E I______ Stub (133)

Beam to beam stub connection (135)

Joining Stub (119)

Tapered column-beam stub (150)

Tekia Structures Reference 11Tekia Structures connectton Map

Fitting (13)

Notch (76)

Round tube (23)

Beam prep (183)

Offshore (194)


New notch (49)

Weld preparation (44)

Welded column (31)

Welded column with stiffeners (128)

Welded beam to beam (123)

0)

0-I

End plate (101) Two-sided end plate (115)

End plate - Comp flange (111) Two-sided end plate - Cfl (112)

Clip angle (116)

Moment connection (130)

]fl Two-side clip angle (117)

Shear plate (103)

Two side shear plate (118)

‘S

3rr

or:It

ElF

n

H

1 2 Tekla Structures ReterenceTekia Structures Connection Map

4 Tekla StmcturesConnections Page 4

Boomerang bracing cross (60) H Corner bolted gusset (57)

Boomerang tube diagonal (59) fl Corner tube gusset (56)

Boomerang wrapped diagonal (58) fl Corner wrapped gusset (63)

Bolted gusset (11) J II L{ Bracing cross (19)

Tube gusset (20) Tube crossing (22)

Gusset wrapped diacro (62)

_____

Wrapped cross (61)

Welded gusset (10) fl Portal bracing (105)

Diagonal splice (53) fj44 Std bracing connection(67)

Windbracing (1) fl Leg -2 3 Diagonals (177)

Windbrace connecLeg - 1 Diagonal (178)tion (110)

Double Bent Gussets (140) Heavy brace (165)

Heavy brace gusset (166)

Tekia Structures Reference 13Tekta Sthjctures Connection Map

r


Stiffeners (1003) DC ULAII Multiple Stiffeners (1064)

Web stiffeners (1060) Stiffeners (1041)

End plate detail (1002)

______ _______

Stiffened notch (1006)

Horizontal stiffener (1017)

_____

Stiffeners (1030)

Penetrating diaphragm (1058) I I C mni Diaphragm (1059)

Standard gusset (1065) -S Standard Tee (1050)

Standard L (1051)

______

fl Gusset stiffeners (171)

U.S. Base plate ‘h1 11F11 U.S. Base plate (1047)

connection (71)

Base plate (1004) •40• i11 Içi Stiffened base plate (1014)

Base plate (1042) 1F1F •.II., Web stiffened base plate (1016)‘I I’ in

Circular base plates (1052) a

_____

Base plate (1053)

liiiBox column base plate (1066) Footipak anchoring (S64)

Caste-in plate (1069)

014 Teka Structures Reference

Teka Svuctures Connection Map


StubilOll) She&Stud(l0l0)

Lifting/alignment pieces (1031) Pum3 (1037)

Puml (1035) LI[1E I51j3L Pum2 (1036)

Manlock column (1032)u0011 g Manlock beam (1033)

Duct hole sleeve (1029) 4 Zinc coating hole (561)

Crushed tube in points (S46) Gusset tube in points (S47)

Crushed tube in bolts (548) []j Gusset cube in hefts (549)

Doubler plate (1022) Twin profile connection plate (1046)

InBatten plates (S85) Cross angles between points (S50)

Double angle between bolts (S51) a Angle cut (1057)

Net Hooks (1061)

1 [‘Safety rope books (1062)

Staging Parts (1063)

Tekia Structures Reference 15Tekta Stuctures connection Map

n

7Seating (30)

Seating with nail (36)

Notched seating (9)

Seating cap (37)

U.S. Bearing plate (1044)

Tube seat (104)

Cranked beam (41)

Haunch (40)

Eaves haunch (102)

Wood girder bearing (1015)

Panel stabilizer (114)

4

IF$

2

Tekia StructuresConnections Page 7

Cross (4)

Purlin connections (93)

Seating (39)

Seating cap plate (2)

Column Tube Seating (100)

Tube rail (113)

Fit haunch (51)

Double plate (50)

Apex haunch (106)

Traction bar (52)

Lø

fl4

I $ Tekia Stnjctures ReferenceTekia Structures connection Map

Tekla Structures Con-8 nections Page 8

Joining plates (14) X Tab plate (33)

Column splice (132) r’ i Column splice (42),, ,,

Tube splice (6)

______

t- -4

Box girder splice (45)

Muffe (26) Turnbuckle connection (126)

U.S. splice joint (77) L splice (175)

_____

‘I

Parallel L profiles (176) 0 o[ Etz Offshore 4(195)

Dividing part (1054) Offshore Z (192)

PL IT

Offshore U (193) t1; Folded plate (1055)

Tubular NC data (522) Tube Rolled Rolled cans (S21)NC Cans

Set Clearance (S70) J Penetrating diaphragm (1058)

Inner diaphragm

Q(1059) : tapered Column (136)

Moose splice (125)I I Column Site Weld Splice (137)

Circularjoining plates (124) Hollow column stubs (S69)

2L Splice (152)

_____

Tekia Structures Reference 17Tekia Structures Connection Map

e

Tekia StructuresConnections Page 9

Cross profile (S32)i$ Cross plate (533)

Box girder (S 13) o o’ Tapered beam (598)

I I

Tapered column (S99) if Tapered column 2 (S44)

Concrete var beam (S52)Tapered beam 2 (545)

Tapered frame comonor (S53) Composite brace (S79)

Tumbuckle bracing (S3) Truss (S78)

Sag rods (S54) Jf]9 r’t” Windbracing (S55)

Vertical bracing PS (556) j5f’ rf1i Shed (557)

Building (S58) Tower Generation (S43)

Cross anns (565)Tower member macro (563)

Tower diagonal (566) ,._JI Auto Position (S67)

Portal span (52) Built up box (S6)

N’18 TelcIa Structures Relerence

Tekia Structures Connection teap

Tekla Structures

Railing beam to plane (89)

Railing plane to beam (94)

Spiral stair (S68)

Railing plane to plane (90)

Railing beam to beam (88)

10

4Stairs (S82)

Wooden steps pan (S72)

Z pan (574)

Ladder (535)

Handrailing (1024)

Stanchions (576)

Kickplate (S75)

4:

UOKAII

6lEt011111

Connections Page 10

U pan (571)

Polybeam pan (S73)

Helicoidal stairs (559)

Cage Ladder (560)

Multiple beam railing (S84)

Railings (577)

Railing double curve (95)

! ‘I

iiiI ‘I

I

Tekia Structures Reference 19Tekia Sfructures Connectbn Map

Tekia Structures

II Connections Page 11

Connection plate (1026) Stanchion weld (85)

Stanchion side plate (83) JkJ fl>j Stanchion side profile (86)

Stanchion double plate (87) .f[] Stanchion curved (84)

Stringer cut (1023) Grating penetration (92)

Stringer stanchion Lprof(68) Stringer stanchion stiff (69)

Stairs detail (1038) Stairs detail (1039)

Stairs detail (1043) 4’5 4.-J Ladder pieces (1056)

20 Tek[a Structures ReferenceTekia Shuctures Connection Map

I2 Tekla StructuresConnections Page 12

Rail joint (70) llhI II Stub (28)

Stub plate (1013) II Ifr 111ki Angle profile box (1040)

Angle profile box (170) flj US. Seat joint (72)

U.S. Seat detail (1048) H 111= [ II U.S. Seat joint 2(73)

U.S. Seat detail 2(1049)

_______

U.S. Seat joint 3 (74)‘awl

U.S. Seatjoint 4(75)

______

Wind column (5)

Joist to Beam, type 1(160) ]j Joist to Column, type 1(161)

2-Sided Joist to Col. (162) ] [J Joist to Column, type 2(163)

Joist to Beam and Col. (164) jj Joist bearing plate (1067)

Telda Struclures Reference 21Telda Stuctures Connection Map

f

Cold rolled overlap

Eave Beams-Stanchion

Shaped Valley Cleat (8)

Stay (10)

Diag brace conn. (12)

DWG profile to library (6)

Panel in database (8)

Generation of profiles (9)


Cold Rolled Sleeved (2)

Shear plate to hip

LProf base detail (1020)

Purlin connections (11)

Gutter (7)

Profile cross-sectionfrom plate (10)

Rubber window gasket (4)

Bridging Macro (S80)

to

13

22 Tekla Structures ReterenceTeka Sfruclures Connection Map

Tekia Structures

Cold rolled sleeved (4)

Eaves beam to stanchion (104)

Non-Continuous Rail (106)

SimpTe Hip (14)

Connections Page 14

Cold rolled overlap (19)

Gable Post Shear Plate (105)

Shearplate to hip (8)

Tekia Structures Reference 23Tekia Sbuctures Connectron Map

V1

Tekla StructuresConnections Page 1X

Simple Clip Angle (31) ] ][ Two Side Clip Angle (33)

Simple Endplate (32) Two Side Endplate (34)

Shear Pt Simple (35) Shear P1 Welded Top (36)

Shear P1 Full Depth (37) Shear P1 to Top Special (38)

Shear P1 Full Depth Special (39) Shear P1 Parallel (40)

Shear P1 Built-up T (69) JtL Bent Shear Plate (48)

H/V Shear P1(64) WV Sloped Shear P1(29)

Shear P1 to Tube Column (47) IjJ H/V Shallow Framing (30)

Shear P1 Col with StiffShear P1 Col with Stiff (41)Special (42)

Shear and Flange Plates (43)

tl24 Tek[a Structures Reterence

Tekia Stuctures Connecflon Map

Tekla Structures Con-

ll1

t

Brace Corner Simple (49)

Brace Middle Simple (149)

Central Bracing Simple (51)

Bracing Wrap Around (46)

LS Brace Col End P1(24)

Bracing Cross Under Beam (45)

Hss Brace Special (66)

Brace w!L’s (70)

Splice Type 1(56)

Purlin 1(61)

nections Page 2X

Brace Corner Tubesand PL (44)

Brace Middle TubesandPL (144)

Cenfll Brace Tube!Conn P1(50)

Bracing Wrap Aroundw! Attachments (53)

TS Brace Col End P1(25)

Brace Clamp (28)

Hss Brace Special (67)

Brace wit’s (71)

Splice Plate 2 (62)

Column Splice 3 (68)

Tube Column Splice (65)DC

:‘

Iuu

II II

2L Splice Connection (63)

Tekia Structures Reference 25Tekia Structures Connecton Map

TSimple Clip Angle 2(82)

Seat Conn Type 2 (54)

Seat Det Type 2(1032)


Joist Seat (58)

Seat Type 9 (73)

Simple Base Plate 2(1031)

Handrail 1 (74)

Stiffeners (1034)

ru’I

A

DC

Tekla StructuresConnections Page 3X


Seat Det Type 1(1033)


Seat Type 5 (60)

Wind Col 1(26)

Simple Base Plate (55)

Bolted Cap Plate (27)

Dowco Bolt Macro (41)

Clip Angles (44)

Line/Part INTERSECTION (43)

n

1’)

1

Line/Plane INTERSECTION (42) 31F

26 Tekla Structures ReterenceTekia Structures Connection Map

Index

NUMERICAL C2L Splice (152) 172-Sided Joist to Col. (162) 21

AAnglecut(1057) 15Angle profile box (1040) 21Angle profile box (170) 21Apex haunch (106) 16Auto Position (S67) 18

BBase plate (1004) 14Base plate (1042) 14Base plate (1053) 14Batten plates (585) 15Beam prep (183) 12Beam to beam stub connection (135) 11Beam with stiffener (129) 10Bearing plate (7) 11Bentplate(151) 10Bent Shear Plate (48) 24Bolted Cap Plate (27) 26Bolted gusset (11) 13Bolted moment connection (134) 10Boomerang bracing cross (60) 13Boomerang tube diagonal (59) 13Boomerang wrapped diagonal (58) 13Box column base plate (1066) 14Box girder (S13) 17Box girder splice (45) 15Brace Clamp (28) 25Brace Corner Simple (49) 25Brace Corner Tubes and PL (44) 25Brace Middle Simple (149) 25Brace Middle Tubes and PL (144) 25Brace wIL’s (70) 25Brace w/L’s (71) 25Bracing cross (19) 13Bracing Cross Under Beam (45) 25Bracing Wrap Around (46) 25Bracing Wrap Around w/ Attachments (53) . .25Bridging Macro (S80) 22Building ($58) 18Built up box (56) 18

Cage Ladder (S60) 19Caste-in plate (1069) 14Central Brace Tube/Conn P1(50) 25Central Bracing Simple (51) 25Circular base plates (1052) 14Circularjoiningplates(124) 17Clip angle (116) 12Clip Angles (44) 26Cold rolled overlap 22Cold rolled overlap (19) 23Cold Rolled Sleeved (2) 22Cold rolled sleeved (4) 23Column Site Weld Splice (137) 17Column splice (132) 17Column splice (42) 17Column Tube Seating (100) 16Column with shear plate (131) 10Column with stiffeners (186) 10Column with stiffeners (188) 10Column with stiffeners 5 (187) 10Column with stiffeners W (182) 10Composite brace (579) 18Connection plate (1026) 20Corner bolted gusset (57) 13Corner tube gusset (56) 13Corner wrapped gusset (63) 13Crankedbeam(41) 16Create current connection 10Cross (4) 16Cross angles between points (S50) 15Cross arms (565) 18Cross plate (S33) 18Cross profile (S32) 18Crushed tube in bolts (S48) 15Crushed tube in points ($46) 15

DDiag brace conn. (12) 22Diagonal splice (53) 13Display AutoConnecfion dialog 10Dividing part (1054) 17Double angle between bolts (S51) 15Double Bent Gussets (140) 13Double plate (50) 16Doubler plate (1022) 15Dowco Bolt Macro (41) 26

Tekia Structures Reterence 27Index

JDuct hole sleeve (1029) .15DWG profile to library (6) 22

EEave Beams-Stanchion 22Eaves beam to stanchion (104) 23Eaves haunch (102) 16End plate - Comp flange (111) 12End plate (101) 12End plate(144) 10End plate(29) 11End oate detail (1002) 14

Joining plates (14) 17Joining Stub (119) 11Joist bearing plate (1067) 21Joist Seat (58) 26Joist to Beam and Col. (164) 21Joist to Beam, type 1(160) 21Joist to Column, type 1(161) 21Joist to Column, type 2(163) 21

K

FFind a component 10Fithaunch(51) 16Fitting (13) 12Folded plate (1055) 17Footipak anchoring (564) 14Fulldepm(164) 10Full depth S (185) 10

GGable Post Shear Plate (105) 23Generation of profiles (9) 22Grating penetration (92) 20Gusset stiffeners (171) 14Gusset tube in bolts (649) 15Gusset tube in points (547) 15Gusset wrapped diacro (62) 13Gutter (7) 22

HHN Shallow Framing (30) 24HNShearPl(64) 24Handrail 1 (74) 26Handrailing (1024) 19Haunch (40) 16Heavy brace (165) 13Heavy bracegusset(166) 13Helicoidal stairs (S59) 19Hollow column stubs (S69) 17Horizontal stiffener (1017) 14Hql(46) 11Hss Brace Special (66) 25Hss Brace Special (67) 25

IInner Diaphragm (1059) 17

Kickplate (S75) 19

LL splice (175) 17Ladder (535) 19Ladder pieces (1056) 20Leg - 1 Diagonal (178) 13Leg -23 Diagonals (177) 13Lifting/alignment pieces (1031) 15Line/Part INTERSECTION (43) 26Line/Plane INTERSECTION (42) 26LProf base detail (1020) 22LS Brace Col End P1(24) 25

MManlocic beam (1033) 15Manlock column (1032) 15Moment connection (130) 12Moment connection (181) 10Moose splice (125) 17Muffe (26) 17Multiple beam railing (S84) 19Multiple Stiffeners (1064) 14

NNetHooks(1061) 15New notch (49) 12Next page arrow 10Non-Continuous Rail (106) 23Notch (76) 12Notched seating (9) 16

0Offshore (194) 12Offshore4(195) 17Offshcre U (193) 17OffthoreZ(192) 17

c’

‘4

r

28 Tekla Strucwres Referencendex

pPanel in database (8) .22Panel stabilizer (114) 16Parallel L profiles (176) 17Partial stiff end plate (65) 11Penetrating diaphragm (1058) 14Plate with nail (47) 11Polybeam pan (573) 19Portal bracing (105) 13Portal span (S2) 18Previous page arrow 10Profile cross-section from plate (10) 22Pumi (1035) 15Pum2(1036) 15PumS (1037) 15Purlin 1(61) 25Purlin connections (11) 22Purlin connections (93) 16

RRail joint (70) 21Railing beam to beam (88) 19Railing beam to plane (89) 19Railing double curve (95) 19Railing plane to beam (94) 19Railing plane to plane (90) 19Railings (S77) 19Rolledcans(S21) 17Round tube (23) 12Rubber window gasket (4) 22

SSafety rope hooks (1062) 15Sag rods (S54) 18Seat Conn Type 1 (52) 26Seat Conn Type 2 (54) 26Seat Conn Type 3 (59) 26Seat Conn Type 4 (57) 26Seat Det Type 1 (1033) 26SeatDetType2(1032) 26Seat Type 5 (60) 26SeatType9(73) 26Seating (30) 16Seating (39) 16Seating cap (37) 16Seating cap plate (2) 16Seating with nail (36) 16Set Clearance (570) 17Shaped Valley Cleat (8) 22Shear and Flange Plates (43) 24Shear P1 Built-up T (69) 24Shear P1 Col with Stiff (41) 24Shear P1 Col with Stiff Special (42) 24Shear P1 FuW Depth (37) 24Shear P1 Full Depth Soecial (39) 24

Shear P1 Parallel (40) 24Shear P1 Simple (35) 24Shear P1 to Top Special (38) 24Shear P1 to Tube Column (47) 24Shear P1 Welded Top (36) 24Shear plate (103) 12Shear plate simple (146) 10Shear plate to hip 23Shear plate tube column (189) 10ShearStud (1010) 15Shed (557) 18Simple Base Plate (55) 26Simple Base Plate 2 (1031) 26Simple Clip Angle (31) 24Simple Clip Angle 2 (82 26Simple Endplate (32) 24Simple Hip (14) 23Spacer plate (48) 11Spiral stair (S68) 19Splice Plate 2 (62) 25Splice Type 1 (56) 25Staging Parts (1063) 15Stairs (S82 19Stairs detail (1038) 20Stairs detail (1039) 20Stairs detail (1043) 20Stanchion curved (84) 20Stanchion double plate (87) 20Stanchion side plate (83) 20Stanchion side profile (86) 20Stanchion weld (85) 20Stanchions (S76) 19Standard gusset (1065) 14Standard L (1051) 14Standard Tee (1050) 14Stay (10) 22Std bracing connection (67) 13Stiffened base plate (1014) 14Stiffened end plate (27) 11Stiffened notch (1006) 14Stiffened shear plate (17) 11Stiffener seating (12) 11Stiffeners (1003) 14Stiffeners (1030) 14Stiffeners (1034) 26Stiffeners (1041) 14Stinger cut (1023) 20Stringer stanchion Lprof (68) 20Stringer stanchion stiff (69) 20Stub (lOll) 15Stub (133) 11Stub (28) 21Stub plate (1013) 21

TTab plate (33) 17Tapered beam (S98) 18Tapered beam 2(S45) 18

Tekia Stwolures Reference 29Index

Tapered Column (136) .17Tapered column (599) 18Tapered column 2(S44) 18Tapered column-beam stub (150) 11Tapered frame comonor (S53) 18Tekia Structures Connections Page 1 10Tekla Structures Connections Page 10 19Tekla Structures Connections Page 12 21Tekia Structures Connections Page 13 22Tekta Structures Connections Page 14 23Tekla Structures Connections Page 1X 24Tekla Structures Connections Page 2 11Tekla Structures Connections Page 2X 25Tekla Structures Connections Page 3 12Tekla Structures Connections Page 3X 26Tekla Structures Connections Page 4 13Tekla Structures Connections Page 5 14Tekia Structures Connections Page 6 15Tekla Structures Connections Page 7 16Tekia Structures Connections Page 8 17Tekla Structures Connections Page 9 18Tower diagonal (S66) 18Tower Generation (843) 18Tower member macro (S63) 18Traction bar(52) 16Truss (S78) 18TS Brace Col End Pt (25) 25Tube Column Splice (65) 25Tube crossing (22) 13Tube gusset (20) 13Tube rail (113) 16Tube seat (104) 16Tube splice (6) 17Tubular NC data (S22) 17Turnbuckle bracing (S3) 18Turnbuckle connection (126) 17Twin profile connection plate (1046) 15Two Side Clip Angle (33) 24Two Side Endplate (34) 24Two side shear plate (118) 12Two-side clip angle (117) 12Two-sided clip angle (143) 10Two-sided end plate - Cfl (112) 12Two-sided end plate (115) 12Two-sided end plate (142) 10Two-sided end plate (24) 11

U

U.S. splice joint (77) 17

VVertical bracing PS (856) 18

wWeb stiffened base plate (1016) 14Web stiffeners (1060) 14Weld preparation (44) 12Welded beam to beam (123) 12Welded column (31) 12Welded column with stiffeners (126) 12Welded gusset (10) 13Welded shear plate (43) 11Welded tee (32) iiWelded to top flange (147) 10Welded to top flange S(149) 10Windbracing (1) 13Wind Col 1(26) 26Wind column (5) 21Windbrace connection (110) 13Windbracing ($55) 18Wood girder bearing (1015) 16Wooden steps pan (572) 19Wrapped cross (61) 13

zZpan(S74) 19 (Zinc coating hole (561) 15

Upan (S71) 19U.S. Base plate (1047) 14U.S. Base plate connection (71) 14U.S. Bearing plate (1044) 16U.S. Seat detail (1048) 21U.S. Seat detail 2(1049) 21U.S. Seat joint (72) 21U.S. Seat joint 2 (73) 21U.S. Seat joint 3(74) 21U.S. Seat joint4 (75) 21

t

a30 Tekla Sbuclures Reference

index

* 1EKLA

Tekia StructuresBasic Training

Steel

Teka Structures 13.0 Basic Training9 November 2007


F’

TEKLA STRUCTURES 13.0 BASIC TRAINING Copyright © 2007 Tekla CorporationIntroduction

Contents

Introduction to Tekia Structures Basic Trainhig .1

Overview 1Basic Modeling 1 2System Components 2Basic Modeling 2 3Interactive Detailing 3Numbering and Reports 3Principles of Drawings 4Assembly and Single Part Drawings 4General Arrangement Drawings 4Multi-Drawings and Multi-Numbering 5Drawing Management 5How to use the training material 6

Copyright@ 2007 Tekla Corporation TEKLASTRUCTURES 130 BASIC TRAININS iiiIntroduction

C

0

IU

iv TEKLA STRUCTURES 13.0 BASt TRAINING CopflbtCO7TaCcqwdmIntroduction

Introduction to TekiaStructures Basic Training

OverviewThis training course will demonstrate how to create a 3D model of a building, andproduce drawings and reports from the model with Tekia Structures. The training isdivided into lessons, each of which covers a certain particular task of the design processand introduces the commands and functions required to complete that particular task.The training workflow is designed to resemble a real design project, and the trainingmodel is taken from a real building project. The model is a paper industry building. a deinking plant, which is comprised of two blocks — mode] I and model 2. The substructuresare made of reinforced concrete, and the superstructures are modeled with both steel andconcrete structures.

Copydghl © 2007 Tekla corporaton IESLA STRUCTURES 13M BASIC TRAININGIntroduction

eBasic Modeling IThis lesson introduces the basic modeling thnctions of Tekla Structures.You will learn how to:• start a new structural 3D model

• create rids

• create views

• create concrete and steel parts.

• use CAD principles like absolute and relative reference points

• use polar tracking

• manipulate memtrs within the model (copy, move, mirror)

System ComponentsThis lesson introduces the basics of creating connections in Tekla Structures.You will learn how to:• create connections

• work with connection parameters

• save the parameters for later use

• clash check the model

2 IEKLASTRuCTIJRES 130 BASIC TRAiNING Copyrightt 2007 Tetla CorporationIntroduction

Basic Modeling 2In this lesson we will recap the basic functions introduced in lesson 1, and you will learnsome more about the basic functions.You will learn how to:• adjust member attributes

• use coordinate locks

• input construction points

• work in true planes (sloped, skewed)

• combine separate models.

• create a backup model

• import a previously created model

• define select filters

• work with phases

• setup job specific information

Interactive DetailingThis lesson introduces how to interactively create unique or customized connectionsbetween parisYou will learn how to:• explode system connections and modi connection objects (parts, welds, bolts, cuts)

• add system components to previously exploded connections

• create unique connection objects interactively.

• define and apply custom components

Numbering and ReportsHow to handle part marking within Tekla Structures is covered in this chapter.You will learn:• numbering basics

• how to customize the numbering system

• numbering in phases

• how- to create reports

CopyiigfiI ® 2007 Tekla Corpoiation TLKLA STRUCtURES 13.0 BASIC TRAJNINS 3Introduction

Principles of Drawings F’This lesson introduces the basics of how to create and handle drawings in TekiaStructures.You will learn:• the integration between the drawings and the model

• the drawing types available in Tekla Structures

• the basics of the drawing list

• the various levels of editing drawings

Assembly and Single Part DrawingsThe next step is to learn how to create fabrication drawings for the items that were createdin the model.You will learn:• how to create individual drawings

• how to use selection filters to create groups of drawings of members with similarattributes

• how to create drawings automatically using wizards

• editing drawings manually

• handling drawing after changes are made to the model.

General Arrangement DrawingsThis lesson covers how to create erection plans, details and section views.You will learn how to:• create anchor bolt plans

• create erection plans of individual views

• create general arrangements of multiple views on one sheet

• modi& drawings properties

• modi view properties

• modi& object properties

• create drawing objects

4 TEKLA STRUCTURES 13t BASIC TINlNG Copyright® 2007 Tekla corporatonIntroduction

Multi-Drawings and Multi-NumberingThis lesson introduces multi-drawings and explains the principles of multi-numbering.You wilt learn how to• create multi-drawings

• collect multiple assembly or single-part drawings to one multi-drawing sheet

• apply multi-numbering to multi-drawings

• update and modib’ multi-drawings.

Drawing ManagementThis lesson covers more advanced aspects of handling drawingsYou will learn how to• control revisions

• edit drawings more effectively using classifiers and cloning

• customize drawing borders by adding logos

• make and use basic drawing templates

• plot drawings

• export drawings in other file formats

• share your model eleconically

CopyrfhI ti 2007 Tekla Corparafion TEKLA STRUCTURES 13.0 BASIC TRAINING 5Introduction

rHow to use the training materialAl] the lessons in this training material deal with the same project (except the Analysis &Design lesson). Therefore you should go through the lessons in numerical order.Each lesson starts with a short introduction to its contents. All lessons are comprisedmainly of step-by-step instructions, which are complemented by background andadditional information. The label titles in the left side margin are an indication that youwill be asked to do something. Pictures of the dialog boxes and of the mode] help you tovisualize the instructions and show the desired result.

The necessary background data is given either by the teacher (in training courses) orthrough links to the Tekla Structures online help. If you cannot attend a training course,the links provide you with the information you need to complete the course by yourself.These links give you the related information quickly and easily, and enable the usage ofthis training material also for self-learning. The online help will assist you in getting themost from this course. Note that with the assistance of online help you will learn to useTekla Structures as efficiently as possible from the very beginning.

See the figure below for an example of the step-by-step instructions and an online helplink.

We wilt tios create Etevetjou and Plan t-iews alone the ecidluies created in the previousit cc jot,

A V]C’A is a ‘epresenranion oft model from a specik oeation. Each view is displayed In itsown window inside the TekIa Sr.’ucrures window. Each view has a view plane on which thenith al-c visible and points are i epiesented as yellow crosset Points outside die view planeappear asoed dots. Help link

LabelFor mote infonna lion see j1Zling>ftthgsta,iedTeii

views (rRieate views aIon5 idhnes.

I Select one widtineStep—by—ste2 Riahi-click and select Create view> Grid views from die pop-tip menu to open the

instruction Creation of views along grid lines dialog box.

& lekia Structures Online Help . 1]Hide Back Print Qptions

çoreerts Irdex - Starch Fevctaes

[21 Telda Slrtfl.res orfrie he

[2) ustig crhne ne4o

I? TekStrflresrodciesRe,easa lisa

U Mcdeg

j Prelece* 1 Introduction

EVJ 2 Getting SlattedBasics

-t • 2.2 GridsLia

2)View plane[j View properties

Defining grid View ProF

[2) creating end modifyng

) ocerw, ctstg,

-

2)Dispeyt,gw’dh’±o

- ) Retresh. the sc-eel,

6 TEKLASTRuCTSJRES 13_a SASIC TRAININGIntroduction

- TEJCLA

2.3 Views

Intro d u cti on

There are severaJ ways to create views in TekiaStructures. For example, you can createviews:

• of the entire structure• of selected part(s) and component(s)

• along the grid lines

Each view has properties whch define itsaFpeaance You tar c1ane the appearanceof a -new afta you create t so choose therrpatinn mpthnri that q,,it en’’ This cpr,inn

Copyright (5 2137 Tukla Corporation

A

Certain styles of text will be used throughout in order to help the reader differentiatebetween different instructions:

Normal text is wTitten in Times New Roman 10 Pt

Filenames are written in Mat Qpt

Terms that arefirst introduced are written in Times New Roman Italics lOpt

Items that are shown on screen are written in Aria! Bold Spt

Help File Paths are written in Times New Roman Bold. Blue. lOpt

Program text is written in Courier New lOpt

Icons are also used to highlight certain information:

A warning triangle highlights a note that is worth remembering. Or it mayserve to point out a potential problem to be avoided.

Stop Signs are severe warnings. lgnonng the text accompanying these may• • cause something to fail or cause a process to produce unexpected results.

‘... Tips are shown with a light bulb icon. They provide additional informationthat may help speed up your learning or help you produce better or quickerresults.

Technical Information is denoted by gear wheels. You can choose to ignorethis info until you are more confident with the system or you can payattention to it if you are curious.

The aim of this training material is to teach you best practices, the most efficient way touse Tekla Structures. However, the aim is also to introduce alternative methods to carryout tasks. This means that repeated tasks are occasionally calTied out with using differentprocedures than those presented earlier in the lessons.

Copyri9ht © 2007 Tekla CoiparaCon TEKLA STRUCTURES 13.0 BASIC TRAINING 7Introduction

1)

‘Ii

8 TEKLA STRUCTURES 13.0 BAS[C TRAINING Copyright© 2007 Tokla CorporationIntroduction

e*e TEKLA

Basic Modeling I

Tekia Structures 13.0 Basic Training

29 October 2007


)

0

1—li TEKL STRUCTURES 13.0 BASIC TRAINING Copyght © 2007 Tekla CorporationBasic Modeling I

Contents

Basic Modeling I

1.1 Start Tekia Structures 21.2 Create a New Model — BasicModell 31.3 Create Grids 61.4 Create Plane Views along Gridlines 101.5 Create Foundations 171.6 Create Columns 241.7 Silos 271,8 Create Beams 301.9 Create Bradng 451.1 Add lnfill Beams 521.11 Add Horizontal Bracing 55

Copyright © 2007 TekIa Corporation TEKI.A STRUCTURES 13.0 BASIC TRAINING 1-uiBasic Modeling I

C

I -iv TEKLA STRUCTURES 13.0 BASIC TRAINiNG Copyrighl© 2007 Tekla CorporationBasic Modeling I

F, -

Basic Modeling

In this lesson In this lesson we will go through the basic fUnctions of Tekla Structures: How to create anewstructural 3D model, grids, grid views and structural members in the model. When you havecompleted this lesson the model will look as shown below.

7

p

TEKLA STRUCTURES 13.0 BASIC TRAININGBasic Modeling I

1—1

,çr

Copyhght © 2007 Tekia Corporation

r.1.1 Start Tekia StructuresTo start Tekla Structures, dick the Windows Start button. Navigate through Programs>Tekia Structures> Single user> Tekia Structures enu US Imperial. This Will start TeklaStructures in an imperial measure environment using the English language.

The modeling interface is now opened as shown below. At first, most of the menu options andicons are gray indicating that they are inactive. When you open an existing model or create anew model, the icons and available menu options will become active.

Copytght © 2007 TekIa corporation4’)

Start TekiaStructures

Documentation

Tco[s

1’ felda Sfructajres enu US Irnperi k—

T&da S :tit-es enu US ‘etrc

— -—. ,. —- — — fl—I — — — — —j. niAWC IAI -*tij

a’,MMa ala Ic.- A4

iPAPflaiØdI tniai—’-*. •Ø1’’.

1-2 TEKLA STRUCTURES 13.0 BASIC TMININGBasic Modeling I

1.2 Create a New Model — BasicModellTo stan a new model, you first need to create an empty model database with a unique name.In this lesson use the name BasicModel 1 followed by your name.

1. Select File> New... from the pull-down menu or click the New model icon in theStandard toolbar to open the New model dialog box.

J 2. At the lower center of the New Model dialog box, Tekla Structures suggests the nameNew ModeL for the model (see below). The fill path of the model folder is shown in thetop field.

3. Name the model BasicModell-yournarne. (Adding your own name to the model namehelps to identii your model on a netwurk, especially during the training class)

Save in C:\TeklaStnjcturesModels\Vi 3.fl\SteeN

Model nate: Basic iodeI1-FirstNaneLas1ame

Model type: Single-user

[ OK

The Multi-User facility in Tekla allows a multiple amount of users in onemodel. This is particularly usefUl when a number of detailers are working onone contract.

r: TekLa Structures - C:\TektaStructuresModels\BasicModetlzIe Eda View Points Parts Loads Detailing Drawing Prcperties Setup Tools

J 1hil €1 c4d-¾-d CQC! L LLL1iaIj 1t )I,

Every model must have a unique name. Tekia Structures does not allow

duplicatemodel names. Do not use special marks ( / \; ) in model names.

TEKLA STRUCTURES 13.0 BASIC TRArNINIG 1-3Basic Modeling I

Start anew model

4. Select single user mode.

‘I,

5. Click the OK button to create the new model.

The menus and icons become activated and the model name appears in the title bar of theTekla Structures window.

V

Copyraht © 2007 lekla Corporation

Tekla Structures automatically created a grid and a 3D view according to the saved standardview properties. The default 3D view and grid are shown below.

Lines show the projections of the grids that are visible on the view plane. Tekla Structuresindicates the work area of a view using a green, dashed line cube.For more information, see:

Help: Modeling> Getting started> Basics.

To save the model:

Save the model Select File> Save from the pull-down menu or click the Save icon in the Standard toolbar.

Remember to save your model often, and always save when opening a newmodel or exiting Tekla Structures model.

‘I,

VYou can only have one model open at a time. If you already have a modelopen, Tekla Structures prompts you to save that model.

•Viewl - 3d

CD 1.

2

BA

3-. 4

‘I

4%

‘-4 ‘I,

Copytghl @2007 Tea Ccrpcraton1-4 TEKLA STRUCTURES 13.0 BASIC TRAININGBasic Modeling I

Tekla Structures also includes an auto save feature that backs up and saves your workautomatically at set intervals. These intervals are set in the Autosave properties dialog boxobtained from the Tools> Options.., pull-down menu.

IR Options

For more information on saving and auto saving, see:

[Save osJ standard

Help: Modeling> Getting started> Basics> Saving a model and exiting TeklaStructures

Most commands for Tekla Structures are found both in menus (main or pop-up) and intoolbars (icons). In this training manual we will mainly use the pop-up menu to activatecommands.

There are several ways to execute commands in Tekla Structures:

Icons

Commands in main pull-down menu

Commands in pop-up menu

By default all the commands are found in pull-down menu, and most of themin the icons. A pop-up menu appears when you click the right mouse button(right-click). If you have an object selected, the commands on the pop-upmenu relate to that object.

TEKLt SThUCTURES 13.D BASIC TRAINING 1-5Basic Modeling I

[jj standard

Cleats check Hidden linesNo dotted

C Olli pals ddled

CAt pails dcjted

So5ds s’

zceLzng

>cu5e settir4a

NtithexingCrientsticn zarksOmits and decl,r.aia

[Aavanced.. I

AutosaveAutosave inteival

Autosave after evely 20 modeling or editing commands

Autosave after creating every 10 drawings

LOK ir Apply flcanc& I

‘I,

V

For more information on Tekla Structures screen layout and toolbars, see:

Help: Modeling> Introduction> Screen layout

Help: Modeling> Introduction > Toolbars

Copyrtghl © 2007 Tekla Corporalion

1.3 Create GridsProperties dialog In order to create or modi& the grid you need a basic understanding of how to use a propertybox dialog box. All entities in Tekia Structures such as grids, views, beams, connections, even

points and welds have properties. You can see and modi& the properties of an object bydouble clicking on the object in the model.

Double click on the grid and the grid properties dialog box will open. Note the buttons alongthe bottom of the box. These are typical for most property dialog boxes in lekia Structures.

Ii Deate Mody Get / r I I Cbse

In this case you will have the option to Create a new grid, Modify an existing grid, or Get theproperties of an existing grid by highlighting the grid and clicking the Get button. You canalso Close the dialog box.

Note the buttons along the top of the dialog box. These are typical for most property dialogboxes in Tekla Structures.

Save j standaid

You have the option to Save the settings as they stand, select different saved settings from thepull down menu and Load them, or save changed settings with a new Save As name typed in #5to the field now named Standard.

To create the appropriate grid for Ba.sicModel as shown below, you can delete the existinggrid and create a new one from the Points > Grid.., pull-down menu, Or you can modiz theexisting grid.

an.

1-6 TEKLA STRUCTURES 13.0 BASIC TRAINING CopyTtght 2001 TekIa CorporalionBasic Modeling I

Elevation

•.

.

To modi’ the existing grid:

Modify the 1. Double-click on a gridline. This opens the Grid properties dialog box.existing grid

.2. Complete the Grid dialog box as shown below by fillmg In the X, V and Z coordinatesand the labels for the gridlines.

Copyñght © 2007 Tek]a Corporation TEKLA STRUCTURES 13,0 BASIC I RAINING 1—7Basic Modeling I

r

There are a number of ways you can type fractions in Tekia Structures includingfractional inches (75/8), Decimal inches (7.5 for 7’/z’), Feet and inches (755/8or 75.625) or even decimal feet (7.5’ for 7-6) The program will convertwhatever you type into a format that it can use. You don’t have to type the inchsymbol when you mean inches. It will always assume this by default.

3. Click Modify to apply the new grid values.

4. In the Save as field, enter the grid file name, GRID-BASICMODEL1, and click the Saveas button to save the grid values for later use.

Cooidinates

RN U’ 61 9-8’

v [Save as standard

0” 43-2’

Ez 012-79/2240 44-0”

Labels1234567

AB

________

Eiz 012-71/2 24’0’ 44W

Line extersions OrigiLeit/Below flight/Above

EXO 0” —]LJY 6’•O’ 6-0” Eva 0”

8-0’ 6,-a” a-’P1 agnetisrn

E Magnetic grid plane DEExensbIneticeree U’

C the, sett,’gs

E ‘Jser-de1ed attiRes..

Create H Hoddy jj Get Close

‘I,

I R1 GHID•BASICMQDEL1

p

0

5. Click Close to close the dialoQ box.

Iseveasi GRID-BASICPiIODEL1 I I

GopyTigni ( 2007 Tekia Corporal’on1-B WCA STR,CPJRES 13.0 SAS1CTRAINiNGBasic Modeling I

You can make grids and grid lines act magnetically so that the objects on thegrid lines follow if you move the grid line. To bind objects to grid lines, selectthe magnetic grid plane checkbox. In the Extension for magnetic area field,enter a distance from the grid line to extend the area within which the objectsare bound to the end lines.

When the grid was modified, the work area of the view, shownnot updated.

with the dashed line cube, was

To fit the work area according to the modified grid: qeerrun.

Fit work area I. Click in the view to activate it. The border will turn redwhen the view is active.

2. Right-click and select Fit work area from the pop-upmenu.

6

TEKL.A STRUCTURES 13.0 BASIC TRAININGBasic Modeling I

1-9

VFor more information on grids and dialog box buttons, see:

Help: Modeling> Introduction > Inputting information > Common buttons

/ — The numeric units used in the Grid dialog box (as well as in other modelingdialog boxes) can be controlled from the Units and decimals.., dialog boxobtained from the Tools>Options pull-down menu, Units and decimals topic.

-‘rIQerves

Ivlo,e

The view should now look as shown below:

Fit work area

Redrau window

Bl

A

AZ

Copyrighl © 2007 Tekla Corporalion

To hide the work area cube, Select the view then hold down the CTRL+SHIFTkeys and right click then select Redraw Window

1.4 Create Plane Views along GridlinesWe will now create Elevation and Plan views along the gridlines created in the previoussection.

A view is a representation of a model from a specific location. Each view is displayed in itsown window inside the main Tekla Structures window. Each view has a view plane on whichthe grids are visible.

Create Plan view

For more information, see: Help: Modeling> Getting started> Views.

To create a plan view

1. Open the view properties dialog box by double clicking anywhere in the 3d view. Theseare the properties of the 3d view.

1i::J E!i:i standard

ViewName:

An*:

Projection:

Pepierentatior,

3O

Orthogon

Rotation aroundZ:

Rotation around K

1

-30.0000

20. 0000

[Save a] standard

r

4U

View type: Rendered

Color ad transpaency in all views: staiard

Visibility

.-

View depth: E Up:

Down:

50-0”

3-0’

Visibility of object types: Display...

E Visible object group: r Object group..

[ OK jj Apply H Modify Get j[w/rlflCancel 1

2. Note the Name 3d, the Angle of view is 3d and the view will be looking lip 50’-O andDown 3’-O into virtual reality from the location where the view was cut at the 0-0” level

1-10 TEKLA STRUCTURES 13.0 BASIC T,ININGBasic Modeling I

Copyñght © 2007 TelcIe Corporation

3. From the pull down menu at the top of the view properties dialog box, select Plan Viewand click Load.

View

I 2 Name: PLAN AT EL OO

VisibilityView depth: Up: —1

[ Down:

Visibility ot oect types: Lpjspi...Visible object group: v object group,..

OK IL Apply jflModwy IL Get Cancel

4. In the name field after the text PLAN AT EL. type the elevation of the view you wish tocreate, in this case 0-0. Note the setting for the angle of view is now Plane instead of 3d,and the view is going to look Up and Down into virtual reality 3’-O” from the location ofthe cut in the model so you don’t see the steel in the floor above or below.

5. Click Apply so these settings, or attributes, will be used for the next view created. It isimportant to click the apply button or you will create a view with the “old” appliedsettings which in this case were 3d. The name, angle and up and down depth of the viewwould still be set as 3d, and the new view created would be considered a copy view.

Create BasicViews

6. Click on the Create basic view icon

7. The following dialog box Will open. The defaultelevation is 0”. Once a different elevation as beeninput, that elevation becomes the default. This istypical of most property dialog boxes in TekiaStructures.

8. Enter the elevation to cut the view you appliedsetting, in this case 0,-n,,

9. Click Create.

TEKL4 STRUCTURES 1O BASIC TRAiNINGBasic Modeling I

1-11

!Plan View IHa-i Plan View

2 Projection:

Representation

L0 Plane 2 Rotation around 2:

Orthogonal 2 Rotation aroundX:

[ View type:

-30.0000

20. 0000

-J1

2 Color and lransparency in all views:

fR erdeie.2 ‘I

standard V [epresentation]

Plane: v

Coordinate: 0”

Create j Cancel

Copy,ight @} 2007 Tekia Corporation

You should now have a p]an view cut at elevation O’O”. You can double click in the view andmodi’ the name of the view, the type of cut, (Plan or 3d) and the distance the view willdisplay up and down, but you can never modi& or change where the view was cut.

S

Create elevationview

To create an elevation view,

2. Open the view properties dia]og box if it isn’t already open.

3. Select Elevation View from the pull down menu at the top of the dialog box and clickLoad.

4. In the Name field, after the text ELEVATION ON GRID type the name of the grid line forwhich you wish to cut an elevation view.

Elevation View

E Angle: C Plane

Projection: Orthogonal

Repiesentation

Save asj ElevationView

Roion agoi.ndZ:

E Rotation around X:

•30. 0000

20. 0000

OK ][ Apply ][ Modily ] Get ]IP’/r]F Cancel J

View

Name: ELEVATION ON GRID A

View type: fLei!dered

Color and transparency in all views:

VisibilityView depth: Up:

JDown

Visibility ol object types: Display...

Visible thject group: standard

standard V [Representation]

[object group...]

5. Click Apply so these settings, or attributes, will be used for the next view created.

1-12 TEKLA STRUCTuRES 13.0 BASFC TRAiNINGBasic Modeling I

(aCoprnght © 2007 TekIa Corporalion

Create view Dy I Click on the Create view by two points icontwo points 2. In the plan view you created at elevation 0, click on the intersection of grid lines A and I.

As you move the cursor you win see arrows pointing the direction the cut will face.in

1 2 3 4 5 6 7B

A A

3. Click on the intersection of grid lines A and 7.

4. You have now created on elevation view for grid liie A. Click OK to close the Viewsdialog box.

Tekla Snctures offers a tool to quickly create views for each elevation and grid line asspecified in the grid properties, and name these views with the markers you specified. Notethat these views will always be cut looking north and west. To automatically create viewsalong gridlines and elevations,

Create grid views 1. Select a gridline to highlight the grid.

2. Right-click and select Create view> Grid views from the pop-up menu.

CopyTight© 2007 Teka Corporaton TEKLA STRUCTURES 13.0 BASIC TRAJNING 1-13Basic Modeling I

“tetuot nPropeies CInquire

-

CopyrAoeDelete

Exact lines—I Ce FC€

Create flew

Grid ewsEas.c

Bind to daneZoom

Update w1ndowNext window

3. This opens the Creation of views along grid lines dialog box shown here.

V j standaid

View plane Number oF views View name preFix View properkies IXY All v PLANATEL PlanView v] Showj 1 “I

All v ELEVATION ON GRID ElevatnView Show

YZ All ELEVATION CN GRID Elevati,View V Sh

OK Create [Canoe

4. Click Create in the Creation of views along grid lines dialog box and the views willautomatically be created.

5. Note the view properties. These are the same settings you selected from the pull downmenu at the top of the dialog box when you created each view. To view these setting youcan click on the Show button and the view properties dialog box will open.

6. Click OK to close the Creation of views along grid lines dialog box.

Note that if the grid properties were incorrect in some way, for example a labelwas missing, the views you create using this method could be named wrong orcut at the wrong elevations.

The Views dialog box appears presenting all the created views. All invisible (closed) namedviews are listed on the left, and all visible views on the right (see below).

‘41-14 TEK STRUCTURES 13.0 BASIC TINING pght © 27Tekla rratn LBasic Modeling I

Creation at views along grid lines

Seled and move ews between the hsls to co.td .4sit4yTo seled mt1jle views. h± dow,n oW -key v1* secIing

Named vws LVste vws

ELEVATION ON GRID 1 3d:LE7aIDtc OtT 2t0 2ILEVATEOR ON OAID 3ELEATIOE cc @2104:Ir;ATIOt: ON

1:172J1010 ON1015A1:Oc ON 2210ELr5:OI OR 2C0:Lt;c:or Ott SAID 3502-i’: AT 1L5L-N AT IL. 24—0

t.J4.

Delete

Display or hideviews

For more information on view properties. see:

Help: Modeling> Getting started> Views> View properties

To display or hide views:

1. Clicking the Open named view list icon will open the Views dialog box (which isalready open).

2. Select the view(s) you want to display or hide.

3. Use the arrows to move view(s) from left to right (visible) or vice versa (invisible).

-n4

2

1;

0• IB.

Select and move views between the lists to contiol visibility.To select multiple views, hold down ctil key while selecting.

Named ews. Visible views:

ELEVATIOR C-N GAIl i 1-

- -

ELZ’JMICU 041 GAID 2 IL-i3JlO-NOU SAID- AELEVAIIDN ON SAID 3

__________

PLAN AT EL. 0ELEVATICI-I ON SAID 4ELEVATION ON @210 S

ELEVATION ON c-aiD 3 [ •ILrYATIC•N 3fl c-AID 7

_________

CelelePLAN A! EL. 12—7112PLAN Ii EL. 24—C’PLAN AT EL, 44—0

OK J

ELEVATION ON GRID B

copyflght © 2007 Tetra Corpcralion TEKLA STRUCTURES 13.0 BASIC T4INING 1-15Basic Modeling I

/ — Do not keep too many views open at the me time. Nine is the mimum

Q number of open views. You can open or close named views by clicking theOpen named view list icon. Delete unnecessary views from the view list.To switch between views, press “Ctrl+Tab” on your keyboard.

Rotate the model You can rotate the model in a 3D view using the default center of rotation, or you can set anew center of rotation. The center of rotation is displayed with the symbol below.

/J.

I. To rotate the model, hold down the “Ctrl” key, then click and hold down the middlemouse button while moving the mouse to rotate the model.

2. To reset the center of rotation, press the V key on your keyboard.

3. In the view, click where you want the center of rotation to be.

Change between You can switch a view from3D I Plane plane (2D) to 3D by using the

keyboard. The keyboardshortcut CtrItP” is how you 7 Bdothis, which can bevery 6usefUl when working on your 5 ,K:model. 4 _.:‘•ç S..

A3 N.2 .)< H..,..:‘.ç•,

.4..

B12 3 4 56

AL 3) 41i

L4

1-16 TEKLA STRUCTURES 13.0 BASIC TRAlJlNG Copyright © 2007 Tekla CorporationBasic Modeting I

1.5 Create Foundations‘We ‘will now create foundations in the model.

.

To create footings for columns:

Create Pad 1. Close all open views but the 3d view and plan view at elevation 0, then click OK toFooting close the Views dialog box.

S2. From the Window pull down menu s&ect Tile vertically to make the views fill the work

area. You can also double click on the view border to make it fill the work area.

___________________________

3. Double-click on theCreate pad footing

_______________________________________________

icon. This opens the

______

Pad footing

_____

properties dialog box.

4. The dialog box forPad footingproperties shouldappear as shown

_______ ______

(Change any attributesthat may appeardifferently).

5. Click Apply.

6. In the plan view, pick

________________

the id intersectionA-I to create thefooting.

__________________________________________________

TEKLA STRUCTURES 13.0 BASIC TRAINING 1-17Basic Modeling I

Pad footing properties

standard

Attributes Position Cast unit

v [saveasi standard

2 Name

j1 Prolthe

PAO_FQCThNZ

77W

22 Finish

2 Class

X00

E6

[eiect.

2 L erde,’ned a2rrtes

LOK j[ APPbJj MceJty J[ s J[w/rI[ Caicel

CDpyrrght © 2007 Tekla Corration

Footings alonggrid line B

While Still in the Createpad footing command,

1. Completethe Padfooting propertiesdialog box for a106106 footing asshown

2. Click OK.

(p

if you dont click the OK button, the dialog box will remain open. You can alsoclose a dialog box by clicking the Cancel button or Kin the top right corner ofthat dialog box. Clicking Apply will apply the settings but keep the dialog boxopen. Only use Apply if you want to keep the box open. You don’t have toclick Apply and OK every time.

C

4 —- -r--4-— >/‘.A

I_____________/

7. Create the rest of the 70*70 footings at the other intersections of gridline A by pickingeach position.

Help: Modeling> Parts> Part location> Position on work plane

Help: Modeling> Pans> Part location> Position depth

Help: Modeling> Parts> Part properties> Profile

You can undo (and redo) previous commands one by one since the last save, byclicking the icons or typing “Ctrl + Z” (Undo) and ‘•Ctrt + Y” (Redo).

€ Pad footing properties

Attr,butes Position Cast unit

Name

0 ProFile

Material

El Finish

Class

Save as s1idard

iF_Select.

PAD_FOG TINS

105906”

3000

8

El LY! attr&*es..

I 7ppJ LModiIy ii [F/zn Cancel

A

Copyright® 2007 Tekia Corporaton

01-18 TEKLA STRUCTURES 13.0 BASIC TRAINING

Basic Modeling I

Help: Modeling> Introduction> Inputting information

3. Create the footings at intersections along gridline B by picking each position.

4. Right-click and select Interrupt to end the command.

nterrupt

Poirt or grid intersection

End

Center

Mid

Commands will stay active until you interrupt them.

To end commands, right-click and select Interrupt from the pop-up menu, orpress the “Esc’ key.

To restart the last command used, press “Enter’.

Foundations for We will create two identical circular foundations for the silos. At first, one foundation will besilos — parametric created at the coordinate (14’-9”. 14-9”) and the other foundation will be created as a copy ofprofiles the first one.

Tekla Structures contains standard (library), parametric, astd user- defined profiles. For thefoundation, we will use parametric profiles.

Kelp: Modeling> Parts> Part properties> Profile

Help: Modeling> Advanced modeling> Parametric Profiles

Create silo 1. Double-click on the Create pad footing icon.footing

2. Tn the Profile click the button th three dots as shown. This takes you to the sectionprofile catalog

3. Complete the Pad footing properties dialog box as shown below.

copyiDht© 2007 Tekia Corporaton TEKLA STRUCTURES 13.0 BASt TRAINiNG 1-19Basic Modeling I

4. Then find the Round Shapes profile category and then the Di parametric shape

t’ Seloe:t profile

8 Peril plate• 0 Floor plate• t Flat, and Bars

‘8 Gratng

23 Show al proliles

5. ClickOK

a

A You can select the profile for a part from the Select profile dialog box thatopens next to the Profile field in the part properties dialog box.

1-20 TEKLA STRUCTURES 13.0 BASIC TRAININGBasic Modeling I

You can also enter a profile name in the Profile field in the part propertiesdialog box.


PAD_FU UT INS

standard

Attributes PDsitionCast unit

Name

Profile

Material

E Finish

Class

Save as] standard

- I[.1Select...

106’ ‘l O6•’

000

rA

tJser-deined ath&jtes...

[ThJ[ Apply ][ ModJfJrs& JIW/rJçpcd

ProBe name. D275”112

Filter:

I I proNe,

L L proNe,

+ ] T protiles

[ Cproilcs

0 Circular hollow sections

* U lm,ta tdk.,

- S Dkcudae0

- •Ross.

H@RBRODrUD

‘8 r1&r Plies

Sr8 Zoe res Inn

Plate ptctfes0 Plate

23 deteiI,

General Analysis User atotbier

ProlietirpePsslile typo: • Citoilat sections

— Prclile subtype:

Ptctute

Qid

°roets S Val i •JriD-atrsm d 27J2

LCopyrght © 200T Telcia Corporation

IIEJ LL2J standard J Save as) standaid

Attñbutes Position Cast unit

jName PAD_FOOTING

ProIiIe D2751)2 1jMakend XOO 3j Finish

Class B

E I_tiser-deiiiedaItiAe,

OK IL JEIL sJIP/rjI Cancel

6. You should still be in the Create pad footing command. (You will see the prompt “PickPosition’ in the status bar located in the lower left corner of the main Tekia Structureswindow.)

Pick position

Locate the Silo 7. If you do not see the prompt “Pick Position’ in the status bar, click once on the CreateFooting pad footing icon. This stalls the command with the last applied settings.

J 8. Hit the “A” key on the keyboard. The Enter a numeric location dialog box willautomatically open with aS in the field. Enter 14.9, 14-9 after the S to define the positionfor the footing.

Enter a numeric location

Location: $1 4-91 4-S LF1I

The “R” key will open up the Enter a numeric location dialog box with an’@‘symbol in the field. This is known as a Relative Snap. (The coordinates you

_______

enter will be relative to the last point you clicked.

The “A” key is known as an Absolute Snap. (Absolute Snaps are relative tothe origin of the model)

Help: System> Appendix IL: Reserved Shortcuts

9. Click OK or hit the “Enter’ key, and the silo footing is created.

Copyright © 2007 tekla Corporation TEKLA STRUCTURES 13.0 BASIC ThRINING 1-21Basic Modeling I

I? Pad looting properties 5<

10. Right-click and select Interrupt to end the command. You can also exit any command byusing the escape key.

Interrupt

Pcint ci qrid r:ersecticr

End

Snap and SelectIcons

In order to work in the model it is important to understand the functionality of the snap andselect icons. To open toolbars you can click on the Window pull down menu and selectToolbars.

Below are the select icons. These icons allow you to select all parts, or specific parts of themodel by dragging a box around the entire model.

ifi sai

a,

/

400

/V

1’‘F

From left to right the select icons are as follows: all, connections, objects, surfaces, points,grid, grid lines, welds, cuts, views, bolt groups, single bolts, reinforcing bar, loads, anddistances.

The next 4 icons allow you to select connections and assemblies as a whole or as individualentities.

Pull down options are offered by Tekla Structures to allow you to select types of memberssuch as beams or columns. The last icon allows you further narrow your selection byspecWying more detailed information about an object.

For more information on using the select filter see

Help: Modeling> Settings and tools >FiIter


41-22 TEKLA STRUCTURES 13.0 BASIC TRrINING

Basic Modeling I

The snap icons function similarly to other computer aided drawing applications.

These snap icons are hierarchal from left to right. The two end icons designate if youwant to snap only to work points (used mostly for modeling) or all points on corners andedges of objects.

Help: Modeling> Settings and tools> Tools> Snapping

Copy the footing 1. Click the footing once to select it.

A If you are working in semi transparent mode (CTRL+2) instead of fillyrendered mode (CTRL-I-4) then you will have to select the edges of items ratherthan the surfaces.

2. Right-click and select Copy Special > Translate.., from the pop-up menu.

CopyCopy secal

Move

Move specialDelete

notate,,,Mirror..,With three ponts

—

3. This opens the Copy - translate dialog box shown here.

(JO i — aV”S

Copyright 0 2007 TekIa Corporation TEKLA STRUCTURES 13.0 BASIC TRAINING 1-23Basic Modeling I

Pick...

OK 1 [ Copy j [ Clear j [P/F [Cancel I

0

4. Complete the dialog box as shown and click Copy then OK.

For more information on copy go to

Help: Modeling >Settings and tools> Copying and Moving objects

5. Right-click and select Interrupt to end the command.

Interrupt

1.6 Create ColumnsWe will first create two of the colunms and then use the Copy command to create the othercolumns.

To create the first two co]umns:

I. Double-click on the Create column icon.

2. Complete the Column properties dialog box as shown on the following(for both the Attributes and Position tabs)

Copyiignt © 2007 IskIa corporalon

04

2J<I2” IEth’ 0”

Number ol copies

Point or grid intersection

End

Now the footings shouldlook as shown:

3

e4s C

Create ColumnTool

I

1-24 TEKLA STR,XThRES 13.0 SPSi0 TPJH;HGBasic Modeling I

J C.olunin projwitios

3. Click OK.

4. Pick the intersection of gridlines A-I (p1) tocreate one column, and then pick grid B-I(p2)to create the second column. Look in 3dview from time to time to check for correctplacement.

5. Right-click and select Interrupt to end thecommand.

Select the columns that you just created bydragging a window across them in a right toleft direction. (The crossing commandthnctions similar to other computer drawingapplications.)

v Se o!idd

Sled reieaoeo End releaos Des9i OeIo’minokoJes Pcrokizr.

Column properlieN

NLJrmtherirt seriesPretre:

Part .w

E Assembly C

Start number.

211

I sdea.J

Select.._1

21 Narre

21 P&e

El Malarial:

El Finish.

Class:

El

CDt.UMN

I\fl.:5cIA99

End re1ea,es Des. D&Or1O

Attbtes Fsr hrarsin Stat Seres

Pos tics

ElVedsal. Middle V U

El Relation: Front V 0 fl0

9isce4el Middle V

LeversElT 44

ES&iom U

___J

Mcdy IwW7r_Ii_J

lJserdetrnod attributes

LJH1EP w/r ca;;1

Copy columns

A

II

.0

CopynDht © 2007 Tekla Corporation TEKLA STRUCTURES 13.0 BASIC TRAINING 1-25BasIc Modeling I

2. Right-click and select Copy Special > Translate... from the pop-up menu.

CopyCopy specalMove

Moe special

Delete

Rotate.Mirror,

With three points

C

3. This opens the Copy - translate dialog box shown here.

jjdrf1S8’ Ith’ U”

Pick... ]OK j{ Copy jj CIearj

Ntsiber ci coiesI S

[w/r H Cancel

4. Complete the dialog box and click Copy then OK. Columns should copy.5. Right-click and select Interrupt to end the command.

Interrupt


End

6. Now all the columns appear in the model.

A You can select multiple parts in the model by holding down the “Ctfl” keywhen selecting objects in the model individually.

CopyTight 203? TekIa Corporation

C

1-26 TE,(LA STRUCTURES 13.0 ESC Ttl4lNGBasic Modeling I

Help: Modeling> Introduction> Selecting model objects> How to select objects

1.7 Silos

Create silos

I

3. To select the profile — Click the Select... button on the right and go to TUBE profiles inthe catalog.


1-27

We will now model the silos.

I. Double-click on the Create column icon.

2. Complete the Column properties dialog box as shown below(for both the Attributes and Position tabs).

V coiuinn properties Twcaunnn I)rOlwt

t: atandrd w stdaic

Start releases End releases ‘ Design De{ornrnoAttributes Pardon j_ Analysis

Nsxitardg series

Design

Start number

ElEl

Start peteases End releasesAttt&tss __j Position

Position

El Vertical Middle w 0

r . 00000

ElHizo’a& Wc& C

Levels

4 I

El Bottoe

Pret:

El Part w

EAssw4 C

A!ttxIes

El Prie

2) Material:

El Finish

El Class: Li]El [userdetined attnbules

SOSlT&ALUMINUM

DelormingAnalysis

—- -ii1

-zz1

LDL/r_H Cancei

Copyright @ 2007 Tekta Corporation

-Qrculan hollow sections

Uthet C1o4n

C

4. Click OK

5. To select aluminum as the grade required, click the Select.... button next to the Materialoption

6. Click OK

A.

7. Hovering your cross hairs over the top edge of the circular base will automaticallyhighlight the snap point at the center because the ‘Points and Grid Intersections Snap isactivated.

Copyright 2007 Tekla Corporation

0

C

P’ollenane ruE25D”1)8

EslIe,.

4.

+.

ILTC

Fter

I profilesL profiles

profilesC oroliles

FIFE tattles hUllQ Ff55 profdes ICDIJ

Uece,d Anefitsis User aUrtes

Profile type

Profile type: Circuler hollow sections

Prolile subtype: d’t

Picture

Property Syrb Vtn -

Diameter d 250Plalelhickn... 1/B

LHS

0 EPOOPD

• Q flectar4a oiov sections

• Ciokssetha,s4 5 Timbei Riches4 5 Double Tees [PCI

PlateprofilesWelded boir profiles

_Parametric proBes

L RCDL profiles+ BCDX protiles

E Show all plotiler

[ OK Apc4

V

rC

UrK,

in

E Show details

ISeIect material

S elected grade:

I + Steel

6061-TE ALUMINUM

4 Concrete4 Reinforcing bar I4 Timber

Miscellaneousc’jrncEiig

RflR1-TR1 Al IIMINIIM

1-28 TEt(LA STRUCTURES 13.0 BASIC TRMNINGBasic Modeling I

A

LiJiHHIX

The visibility of objects in views depends on the work area, view depth, viewsetup, and view filter. You can also temporarily hide parts in a view by usingthe Hide tool (on the pop-up menu).

In the pictures hereafter all the model objects created may not always bevisible.

Help: Modeling> Getting started> Settings and Tools> Displaying andhiding objects in views

TEKIA STRUCTURES 13.0 BASIC TININGBasic Modeling I

1-29

z

Interrupt8. Right-click and select Interrupt to end the command.

Now the silos appear in the model.

A

Ponit or grid intersectionEnd

Copyright © 2007 TeRla Corporalion

1.8 Create BeamsWe will first create the beams at the 12-7” 1/2 level and then copy them (using the selectfilter) to the two upper levels.

1. Open the PLAN AT EL. 12-7”112 view.

2. Hit the “CtrI+4” hotkey to change the object representation to Rendered.

In rendered views, use the shortcuts Clrl+1 .5 and Shift-I-I .5 to set the desiredrepresentation for parts h the model or components which we will create later.

IIE standard

Start releases End releases j DesignAttribtes Position Anab’sis Loaig

Numbering seriesPrehx: Start nurrber:

Part- E 1

JAssembly 1

SEAM

W24X62

[DK fl Apply [ Modily fl Set fl wir ]7ancei

‘I,

Create steel 3. Double-click on the Create beam icon.beams

4. Complete the Beam properties dialog box as shown below.

[Save asj standard

D elcwningComsae

Attributes

2 Name:

2 Prolile:

Matetial: A2

Fiiish:

Class: 3

][ileoi.. I

2 User-defined attributes...

C

U

5. Click OK.

6. Pick the intersection of gridlines A-4 and then 8-4 as shown below and notice how thebeam automatically appears at the correct level in the 3D view simultaneously

1-30 TEK.A STRIJ0EJRES 13.0 BASiC TRJiNiNCBasic Modeling I

CopyTiglit © 2007 leida Corraiion

4.B

A

4 5!

A Note that it is very important to input beams from left to right and bottom totop. Tekla Structures will consider the first end input in the model as the lefiend.

7. Continue adding beams along gridlines 5,lines A and B.

6 and?. Input beam between columns on grid

3 4 5 6, 7

8. Right-click and select interrupt to end the command.

Interrupt

TEKL4 STRUCTURES 13.0 BASIC TRAINING 1-31Basic Modeling I

B

3

S

AL6:

A


End

Copyrighi © 2007 lekia Corporation

Filter beams 1. Choose the select filter option Beam_filter from the drop down list.

Beam liter S.

A A select filter provides you control over selecting different types of objectsusing both standard and user-defined filters.

Help: Modeling> Settings and tools> Filter> Select filter

2. By dragging the mouse (right to left),this only highlights the beams.

se] ect an area in the model as shown below. Notice

Copy beams 1. Open the ELEVATION AT GRID 7 view, right-click and select Copy from the pop-upmenu.

Interrupt

U

2. Select a base point at the intersection of Grid A & 1271/2. This is where you want to‘pick up the items you are copying.


Cn

Copy Soecal

rylo;e SpeciaDeere

UCCopygnI © 2007 Texle corporalion

44-0”

24-0”

12’-7”1/2

0”

12’J’i /2

B

3. Select a destination point at the intersection of GRID A & 24-0

4. A message may appear stating objects are outside the work area.shown below.

as shown above.

If so, click Expand as

ObjeL Is oijl side II.,. work a, en

0becls wce placed oxn,e the wck sea.Do nJ wart to exn he woel< aea 0 ockide the rtw o,ects7

Q Do nol rhow this menae agan

I i


1-33

A

44,-a”

B

o’I

5. Right-click and select Interrupt to end the Command.


Interrupt

Point r grid irtersec:Dn

End

6. Change the select filter option back to standard (as shown below) and click in a view, soyou will be able to select objects other than beams.

Seam lilteraridar d

Angle_FilterB ea’n_uilter

V

A

In the 3d view, this portion of the model should look like this.

A

r

0U

Beams aroundsilos

Next we will create beams at elevation 44’-().

1. Open the PLAN AT EL 44’-O.

2. Use the “Ctrl-’-P” hotkey to change this view to 3d.

3. Hit the “Ctrl-’-4” hotkey to change the object representation to Rendered.

Hide silos 4. Select both Silos (select one then hold the “Ctrl” key down while selecting the other) andright-click to open up the pop-up menu. While holding the “Shift” key down, select theHide option as shown below.

A

1-34 TEKI.A STROCEJRES 13.0 BASiC 1iNiNGBasic Modeling I

You can also hide objects without holding down the ‘Shift” key. When youselect the Hide option without the “Shift” key down, the object will notbecome completely hidden. They will change to Reference Lines.

UCopyñghl © 2007 TeKia Corporailen

cJ.

II.

Interrupt

Copy

Copy special

Move

Move special

Delete

Center of avityClash check

Exact linesRirle npc

I.

/Hide

£ I:1

ShOw assemblyFit by partsCreate view

Compare

Drawing

Zoom

Update window

Next windo.’

Add to Assembly

Remove from assembly

Create gridbeams

a

1. Click the Create beam icon.

2. Create the missing beams at the gridline intersections shown in the figure below.

Copyfight @ 2007 Tekla Corporation 1-35TEKLA STRUCTURES 13,0 BASIC TININGBasic Modeling I

Create the restof the beams

A1

Next we will create beams in locations where no gidlines intersect. The snapping tools helpyou pick points to create objects precisely where you need them, without having to know thecoordinates or layout additional lines or points.

Help: Modeling> Settings and tools> Tools> Snapping

If you double-click on an existing beam in the model and click Apply in theBeam Properties dialog box, those settings become active. Then only a singleclick on the Create Beam icon is required to add beams with those settings toyour model.

C)

c.

1-36 TEKLA STRUCtURES 13.0 BASIC TRAININGBasic Modeling I

A

Copynght © 2007 TelcIa Corporation

Create beam A I. Make sure only the Snap to reference lines! paints icon of the two main snap switcheson the right is pressed down.

Auto V Outline planes

___________

-

2. Make sure the Snap to mid points icon is pressed down.

I Auto V Outline planes I..

3. Pick a midpoint of the beam between A-2 and A-3 (pl) and then the midpoint of thebeam between B-2 and B-3 (p2) as shown below.

Create beam B We will pick the start position of beam B by using the gridline intersection A-i as atemporary reference point and tracking along gridline I in the direction of intersection B-i for29’-6”.

We will then pick the second position of beam B using the temporary snap switchPerpendicular.

Make sure the Snap to points and grid intersections icon is also pressed down.

IL4I Auto V Outline planes

Pick the firstposition ofbeam B

I. Hold down the “Ctrl” key first and then click gridline intersection A-I (p1). This will be atemporary reference point. A green cross will be placed there. (See below.)

2. Then move the cursor (do not pick ) to the gridline intersection B-i (p2).

TEKLA STRUCTURES 13M BASrC TRAININGBasic Modeling I

1-37

‘I

CcpyTight © 2007 Tekla Corporation

3. While the cursor is resting at B-I (p2), push “A” on the keyboard and a numeric locatordialog box will open. Type 29-6” for the numeric location or in this case, the distance. (Ifyoujust start typing after picking a reference point the Enter a numeric location dialogbox will open automatically.)

4. Click OK or “Enter” and the cursor snaps to the correct position (which is 29’-6” from A-1 in the direction of B-i) as shown below.

Tracking movesp1 towards p2(29’-69

p2 L

r

p1

U

(IU1-38 TEKLA STRUCTURES 13.0 BASJC TRAINING

Basic Modeling ICopydght© 2007 Tekia Corparalion

Pick secondposition of beamB

5. Right click and select Perpendicular, or let the snap grab perpendicular to select a pointfor the other end of the beam.

Interrupt

Point or grid intersectionEnd

Center

Mid

Interseci;on

Perpendicular

[‘lear

6. Pick the second position on beam A (p2) as shown below.

7. Right-click and select Interrupt.

h9terrupt

Point or grid intersectIonEnd

2

Create beam C 8. Click once on the beam icon to get back in the beam command. Pick the intersection ofbeam B and gridline 2 (p1) and then the intersection of gridlines B-2 (p2) as shown here.Make sure the Intersection Snap is set.

X 4 Auto ‘. Oe planes v


1-39Copyrighl @ 2007 TekIa Corporation

We will first create one of the beams that ifame around the silo and then by using the CopySpecial > Rotate command create the other three.

Help: Modeling> Settings and tools> Settings and tools reference> Edit>Copy>Rotate...

I. Hold down the “Ctrl” key and pick gridline intersection A-I (pi) to set a temporaryreference point. A green cross will be placed there. See below.

2. Then move the cursor (do not pickl I) to the gridline intersection B-I (p2).

3. While the cursor is resting at B-i, type 13’-O for the numeric location or in this casedistance. (The Enter a numeric location dialog box will open automatically.)

4. Click OK or “Enter”, the cursor will snap to the correct position 13-0 away from (p1) asshown on the following page.

5. Move the cursor to the intersection ofAl again.

6. Hold the CTRL Key again and click this point

140 TEKL.A STRuCTURES 13.0 aASiC TRAININGBasic Modeling I

(0

t2

Create beam D

Tracking movesp1 towards p2(1 3’-09

0

Copynght © 2007 Tekla Corporation

A

1-

7. Track the cursor once again to the right, but do not click

Enter a numeric location

8. Once a snap point is highlighted, input the value as shown and click OK. The beam willnow appear

9. Right click and select Interrupt to end the command.

Copy rotate thebeam

interrupt

Point or grid ntersection

End

2. Right-click and select Copy Special > Rotate... from the pop-up menu.

TEKLA STRUCTURES 13.0 BASIC TRAINING

Location: 1 3!QI

1. Select the beam that you just created.

Copylight © 2007 Tekla Corporation

Basic Modeling I1-41

Copy spedal

Move

Move speo&

Deete

Rotate...‘t’cc..

With three po’nLc- —---------

-

3. This opens the Copy special - rotate dialog box.

4. In the 3D view pick the center point of the silo as the point to define the rotation

5. The origin for XC) and YD values will appear in the dialog box.

6. Complete the other fields in the dialog.

7. Click Copy and then OK.


Interrupt


Er C

a

U

CopC’

—

V

Origi

________

XC 14-9

‘i’D 14-9

Arie acw

-J-j

CopyNumber ol copies LI

C,,

otati - -

Angle Tso.ouuo IAround z

L OK j[ Copy JL Clear

S.

Cancel

1-42 TEKLA STRUCTURES 130 BASiC TRAININGBasic Modeling I

Copyright © 2007 TeIia Corration

This portion of the model should look like this.

Copy translate thebeam to the othersilo

I. Select the beams shown highlighted in the picture below (press the “Ctrl” key to add partsto the selection).

2. Right-click asid select Copy from the pop-up menu.

Interrupt

Propertes...

User-defined atUibutes,.

InqLnre

Copy specialVove

I.

Move specieDelete

TUQA STRUCTURES 3.0 BASIC T4ININGBasic Modeling I

1-43Copyght © 2007 Tekle Corporaton

3. Select a base point or “pick-up” point.

A

1—

4. Select a new point or a “put-down’ point.

1-44 TEKLA STRUCTURES 13.0 BASIC TRAINiNGBasic Modeling I

r

C

(6


6. Now click in the 3D view to select the view. A red box willappear around the edge of the view. Right click in the viewnow and select Redraw WindoW. The model should nowlook as shown on the following page.

itelrupt

Zrooetes

MoveFit vork area

Redra’, ,\Find0,\!

Copynght © 2007 Tekla Corporalion

A

1.9 Create BracingNext we will input the vertical bracing members using the Create beam tool.

Open the Elevation on Grid A view if it is not already visible.

12

Create braces I. Double-click on the Create beam icon.

TEKLA STRUCTURES 13.0 BASC TR4ININGBasic Modeling I

‘S

1• 2 3 4

Ccpyright © 2007 Tekla Corration I -45

2. From the drop down menu at the top of the dialog box, select Vertical_has_brace andclick Load

Start releasesf End releasesAttributes Position] Analysis

Nunibering seriesPrefüc

Design DelorrningLoading iL Composite

Start nwnter:

0ci

3. Complete the Beam properties dialog box as shown below.

VerticaL hss brace

Start releasesAttributes

Numbering series

1hs

Assembly D

AttributesName:

Profile:

Material:

2] flush:

2] Class: 4

2] User-defined attributes

[save VerticaLhss_brac

4. Click OK.

5. lii the Grid line A view create the first brace by first picking the gridline intersection A-2and then the midpoint of column A-3 as shown on the next page.

Copyright 2007 Torts Corporation

U

jJ IVerticaLhn_brace JIHe asJ VerticaLhss_brac

End releasesPosition Anäysis

PreFix:

Design Jj DeforniingLoading _j_ Ccwrçosite

Start number:

VERTICAL HSS BRACE

HSS4X4X1/4

.A5OIJ-SR.8

0U

Apply ( Modify [ Set wir j[ Cancel

14$ TEICA SThUCTRES 13.0 BASIC TiNINGBasic Modeling I U

Make sure you pick the mid point of the column and not the midpoint between the 12-7%”

24’ -0”

12’-7’ ‘112

0”

level and the 24-0” level

Create the secondbrace

Create the next brace by picking the top position of column A-2 and then midpoint ofcolumn 43 as shown below.


We will now adjust this bracing member so that the lower end of the brace is offset 6 inchesfrom the grid level. To do this, we will use handles to move the part end.

TEKLA SWUCTURES 13,0 BASIC TRArNINIGBasic ModGIing I

1-47

2

2

24’-0”

12 ‘-7” 112

Copyright © 2007 Tekla Corporalion

Help: Modeling> Parts> Part location

Holding down the Alt key while dragging a box across the handle allows foreasier selection of that handle or allows selection of multiple handles at thatlocation

3. Right-click and select Move Special > Translate... to move the handle 6 inches upwards.

1-48 TEKLA STRUCTURES 13.0 BASIC TININGBasic Modeling I

Use handle tomove brace end

1. Select the first brace to display the handles.

2. Pick the yellow handle (Tekla Structures highlights the handle).

‘I,

VU

UUCopytghl © 27 Tekla Corporation

Interrupt

Propertes

Thqu’e

Lop-i:

Copy specialMove

Delete

Exact linesHide hnes r

4. This opens the Move - translate dialog box shown here.

5. Complete the dZ field and click Move. then OK.


7. Repeat the procedure to move the second brace’s top handle 24 inches downwards.

8. Pick the handle (Tekia Structures then highlights the handle).

Remember that this handle may be yellow or magenta in color depending uponwhether it is the Start Point (yellow) or the End Point (magenta) of the item.

TEKLA STRUCTURES 13,0 BASIC TRAININGBasic Modeling I

Move special j Translate.,.

Rotate,,,

With three poIrJ

A

CopyTight © 2007 TekIa Corporalion 1-49

9. Complete the dZ field and ClickMove, then OK.

10. Right click and select Interrupt toend the command.

1. Select both braces as shown here byclicking each one individually whileholding down the CTRL key

2. Right-click and select Copy Special> Mirror...

Move specialDelete

Center oF gravity

Clash check

Exact lines

Hi Ines

Hide

Show assembly

Ft by pads

Create view

Compare

Drawing

Zoom

r: ve translate

0”

I.2D” IPick..,

L2_f L9v Clear { Li?_/ F J [Cancel I

Copy mirrorbraces

Copy spedal P

MoveransJat.

Move speca;

Dele

Rotate..,Mirror...

‘c”.’ith tne point

Move

4

Translate.,,

Rotate...I. Mirror,.

a,With three points

I.

C

‘4

P

Update windowNext window

Add to Assembly

Remove From assembly

1-50 TEeK’.ASTRtDi1RES3.D8ASlCIfl+3Basic Modeling I

CopyTiglil © 2007 Teda Corporaton

3. This opens the Copy - mirror dialog box.

Point or grid intersectionEnd

zr Copy ir Ce

Help: Modeling> Settings and toots> Settings and tools reference> Edit>Cop>Mirror...

1EKL STRUCTURES 13.0 BASiC TININGBasic Modeling I

1-51

4. In the view, pick two points on grid 3 to define the mirror Line. The XO, VO and Anglefields automatically change based on these 2 points.

‘,. The points that you click to define the mirror represent the seline of themirror or the ‘line of symmetry’ in plan. Try to imagine what the image wouldlook like when reflected in a mirror that is placed on the line drawn between thetwo points you clicked in the model.

ll Copy mirror

xo 3’4”

Yo J”

Angle 9O.000Q

5. Click Copy and then OK.


Copyiight @ 2007 Tekla Corporation

I)1.10 Add Infill BeamsNext we will input some infill beams using the Create beam tooL.

Open the Plan on 12-7W view ifit is not already visible.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7B

____ ____ ____

B

/ /

( .

/

AL

_____ _____ _____

4 5 7

Create stair 1. Double-click on the Create beam icon.landing beam

2. Load the Beam properties

U1-52 TEK STRUCTURES 13.0 BASIC TINING Copght © 2007 Tekla rratior C)

Basic Modelin9 I

All available sections are listed here with parameters that are correct to thevery latest editions of industry organization manuals Simply locate and selectthe section you would like to use.

V Beam

D elormingComposite

Start number;

Beam

Start releases End r&eases - Design,_JAttitutes Position Analysis Loadir

Numbering series

Pref iii:

EPart

BAssentj B

AttriEjtes

3

E User-defined attributes...

El

Name:

Ri Profile:

Ri Material;

BEAM

IA932

Ri Finish:

Class:

I [Seiect... ii[Select...

jw,ir j[ canc&J

3. Click the Select... button to launch the section catalog.

‘I,

4. Select W18X40 from the catalog

TEKLA STRUCTURES 13,0 BASIC TRAININGBasic Modeling I

Copyright © 2007 Tekta Corporation 1-53

Prctk nfl W<4O 0&w Anak: Us arjre: L- )Profe r,,

Filler: [ Edter I Profile type :i: i proirles

— I Jprofrles Profile subtype: Hot rolled+ @ HP.* \‘NJF pictureU . W

T t5 W4+. 5l W5* WG

S9 W8•

55W12ii5Wl4t ‘0-

J35 Property S. Vakie Lrt

__________

l-ieghr h in/a n9 Wi <41 Width b 6’’ in

9 Wi <45 Web thickness 3/8 in

9 wi <46 Flenge thickness t 1/2 in

5Rounding radius 1 ri 11/16 inRounding radius 2 r2 0” in9 WiRt<55 Flange slope ratio Is 0.00

9w1’<00

fl Show all piofiles Show details

________

111K ii Pø I ....-- IcdI

I

5. Click OK

6. Hold down the CURL key and click the mouse at the (,.intersection of grid line A5

7. Then highlight a snap point (shown using the near’ snapabove) to determine the direction of the tracking.Remember — Do not click.

8. Type 7-0” to make the new beam start at that distancefrom the CTRL point in the direction you tracked themouse.

Enteranurneric location

I

(a$

1-54 TEICASTRuC11jRES 13.0 BASiC TRAINING CopynghIQ20O7TeeiaCorporaonBasic Modeling I

1€ Select profile

/

A

/

9. Use the perpendicular snap to connect the beam to the beam on grid line 6

We will now add some horizontal bracing sections too.

1.11 Add Horizontal BracingDivided LinePoints

First, we will use the Divided Line Points tool to establish the midpoint between twopoints we select. Double click the icon shown below.

Points Tools allow us to quickly and easily establishwithout having to measure and calculate distances.

2. Check that the No. of Points in the points tool isset to 1. This will place one point halfwaybetween the two points you click in the model. Ifthis was set to 2 then it would add two pointsequally spaced between the points you clickeffectively dividing the length into 3 equalspaces.

line o;ts

TEKLA STRUCTURES 13.0 BASIC TrNINGBasic Modeling I

‘I,points in the model

6 6

‘7’B

No. oF points

2

3. Click OK

4. Click the points as shown using the Endpointsnap. Notice that a tiny cross appears halfway I

between both points.

Copyiight © 2007 Tekla Corporalion 1-55

S. Now add two W16X50 beams as shown below. Tip: Add the beams from left to right anduse the perpendicular snap to ensure they are horizontal in the model.

4; 5 6;B

J

B

______ ______ -

A

_______ _______ _______

7

6. Finally add the horizontal bracing.

7. Use the Create Beam tool again and select and load the properties for a Horizontal Brace—

C1-56 TEK STRUCTURES 1 3.0 BASIC TlNlNG Copydghi © 2007 Tekla Corralion

Basic Modeling I

TEKLA STRUCTURES 13.0 BASIC TlNING 1-57Basic Modeling I

Hox&brace

Start releases It End releases - DesignAttributes Position AnalysisJ_Loadinj

Numbering series

[ave asj HorizonlaLbrace

0 &cirrriing

Composite

PreFix: Start number:

Part t

Assembly 0

Attribes

E Name: HORIZONTAL BRACE

Profile: WTBX2O jE Material: A992

Firish:

ElCiass: 4

[_User-deFined attributes...

Ii Seleci,.

—__________ [ Select...j

OK IrApply jf Modify j[ Set j[ 7/F iLcancel

8. Change the section profile to match the one shown above.

9. Click OK and add the beams going from left to right as shown below.

Copyrighi © 2007 Tekla Cerporation

Move Bracing 10. Now move these beams down to within the depth of the floor beams.

11. HighIiu both beams by holding down the CTRL key while clicking the members.

12. Release the CTRL key and right click the mouse.

4 5

B:

NJ IInterrupt

Copy

Copy seoa!Move

MoespedaI

Rotete.,,

1 Mirror.,.Center of gravity

With three pointsClash check

Exact linesHide lines

13. Select Move Special - Translate and enter -9” (the negative value moves the bracingbeams down)

IL)1-58 TEKLA STRUCTuRES 130 BASIC TRAINING

Basic Modeling I

4;B

5, 6 7

4 6: 7:

6 7C)

A

/ Delete

5j

Copyñgl 2007 TelcIa Corporanon

f Move Clear j [ / r I Lcanc&

14. Finally check that the braces are in the correct position in the 3D view.

Move beam usingoffset

1. Double Click on the highlighted beam to open the properties dialog

TEKLA STRUCTURES 13.0 BASIC TINING 1-59

E I•’Pick...


Basic Modeling I

2. Go to the Position tab


0

C.

Beam properties

[E] cii standard t ave as -I orizontaL bra

Stan releases JL End releases f Design j{ DelormingAttributes Position Anajysis Loading Composite

Position

On plane: Middle V

E Rotation: Top v 0.0000

EN depth: Behind V.

End oftsetStart: • End:

Dx 0

0s’ E 0”

D2 0” EU’Curved beam

Efladius: >CYplane V 0

I

Nurther ci segments: 1

[ OK][ AppJy Get H r/r fl Cancel

Copynght © 2007 TeRla CorporaUon

3. Adjust the dialog box as shown and click Modi’. Notice that the beam has now moveddown 3 while the start and end points have remained in their original position.

It really makes very little difference whether you locate beams using offsets orby simply moving them into position. Sometimes their may be speed advantagesto be gained by modeling one way rather than another..

Now we have modeled all the steel members in BasicModell. The model should appear as inthe picture below.

AId

At this point we have added all the marbers into the model. In a real contractwe could now run the Advanced Sill by going to File> Reports> AdvancedBill, then clicking Create from All.

We will deal with Reports and Numbering in much more depth later in thismanual.

TLKLA STRUCTURES 13.0 BASIC TRAINING 1-51Basic Modeling I

V

Copynghl © 2007 Tekia Corporation

C

C

1-62 TEK STRUCTURES 13.0 BASIC TIN[N0 Copght@ 2007 Tek[a rraIionBasic Modeling I

TEKLA

System Components


29 October 2007


c

2.ii TEXLASTRUCTURES 13.0 BASiC TINING Cpyrght€2007ToldacorporaaooSyslem Components

Contents

2 Creating System Components .1

2.1 About System Components 1Check clashing of steel structures 2

2.2 Column Base Plates 32.3 Beam to Beam Web 7

Shear plates 7Checking Connections 9

2.4 Beam to Column Web 10Clip angle 10Two-sided Chp angles 11

2.5 Vertical Bracing Connections 13Tube Gusset 13Modifying Connections 15

2.6 Beam to Column Flange 18End plate 18

2.7 Bracing Connections 19Wrap Plate 19

2.8 Re-Check Entire Model Clashing 25

Copyright® 2007 Tekle Corporarirn TEKLASTRUCTURFS 13,0 DASIC TRAJNrNG 2-uiSystem Components

C

U2iv TEKLA STRUCTURES 13.0 BASIC TRAINING CopeigNO2OO7TeIdaC&pocdn

System Components -- /

4/ !W;-

!,:r

Creating SystemComponents

In this lesson This lesson introduces the basics of creating system connections in Tekla Structures.

You will learn how to:

Create connections

Work with connection properties

Save the properties for later use

2.1 About System ComponentsYou can model connections quickly with the Tekla Structures system components.

The greatest benefits of using system components are:

• The connection properties can be saved with a particular name so that they can be usedlater. These properties can then be used for all projects.

• When you modi& an object’s profile in the model, all of the connections to the objectare automatically modified at the same time.

• If you highlight an object and select options suth as edit, copy, or mirror, all connectionsinto the object are automatically included. The connections that are copied or mirroredare exactly the same as the originals. The same applies to plates and bolts.

• With AutoDefaults you can create rules defining when to use different connectionproperties. (Covered in the advanced course)

All available system components are located in the component catalog, which can be opened44 using Ctrl4-F or by clicking the binocular icon on the component toolbar.

When applying a connection that you are unfamiliar with, accept the default properties andcreate the connection. Then look to see what needs to be modified. This is usually quickerthan trying to set the values for the connection before seeing what the connection actuallycreates.

Help: Detailing > Getting started> Using components> Creating components

Help: Detailing > Getting started > Basics> Component concepts

Help: Detailing> Getting started> Basics> Picking order

Help: Detailing> Getting started > Basics> Up direction

TEKLA STRUCTURES 110 BASIC TRAINING 2-1System Components

Copyright © 2007 TekTa Corpoiation

rCheck clashing of steel structures C

In Chapter 1 we created a model of a small industrial structure. To complete the model wewill need to connect the parts. Before creating the connections all of the members in themodel usually collide with other members.

By using the Clash check command we can check which parts in the model collide. We willrun a clash cheek now, and again after the connections have been applied.

Help: Modeling> Settings and tools> Querying objects> Clash check

1. Select all of the parts of the model by dragging an area select around the whole model.

2. Right-click and select C’ash check.

Tekla Structures highlights the colliding parts in orange and displays the clash check log inthe List dialog box. You can see that all of the parts in the model collide.

2-2 TEKL.A STRUCTURES 13.0 BASIC TRAININGSystem camponents

Check clashing

Select any clashing parts from the list and Tekia Structures highlights them in the model.

1 LIst

___ ___________

In -

nIl

S..

C

1’UCopyrighl 02007 Tekls corporation

2.2 Column Base Plates

Create base plateto one column

‘I’

The first system connections that we wil] add are the column base plates.

First we will create a base plate using the default values. We will then modi& the propertiesof the base plate and finally create the rest of the base plates with the new properties.

1. Open the component catalog by clicking on the binu1ar icon or by typing Ctrl+F.

2. To see pictures of the connection, make sure the Thumbnails icon is active, see below.

3. Type base into the upper field and click on the Search button. In the Componentcatalog, double-click on the U.S. Base plate (1047) icon.

Component catalog ‘.

___

Lifhsi5... nlO* (1054] l1 5(51 (53415 5.,, 515(1110531 43. ,ü., 0334.. CIlis 03,, 05(t. LP,& 0’. 41111 SElL-CU’ 1140

p.’dl@5,34l ‘4 5434344 U5345. st.-430.

¶5(11

The following dialog on the next page appears:

Copyright @2007 TekJa corporation TEKLA STRuCTURES 13.0 BASIc TRAINING 2-3Systen Components

Tekla Structures U.S. Base plate (1047)

Load ,nda

Pchja Peal, Parnslers General Slillenaro Anchop pod, Sepia pJ.iee M4oi,

Th—C

4. Click OK to accept the default values.

5. Pick any column.

6. When prompted, pick the bottom endpoint of the column as the position and the baseplate will be created.

7. Use the shortcut CtrI+2 to make the parts displayed in shaded wire frame.

You can see that the anchor bolts were created as Anchor J-rods.

2-4 TEKLA STRUCTURES 13.0 BASIC TRALNINGSystem Components

0L.

t

,isndapd

0C’

RIRIEJ

Copyright® 2001 ToNe Corporation

Edit Anchor Rods We will change the Anchor J-rods in the base plate to Plate washer Anchors by modiingthe connection properties.

I. Double-click on the green connection symbol, and the Base plate dialog box willreopen.

2. Select the Anchor rods tab page in the dialog box.

3. Edit the values in the fields sho highlighted in the figure on the next page.

TEKLA STRUCTuRES 13.0 BASIC TRAININGSystem components

2-5

.

7-

-

77-

Copyright @2001 Tekla Corporatron

Tekla Structures U.S. Base plate (1047)

n,udr[yeCiVreclontwe iiJJ ØL1

Pttuse Pans Pacacoelera General Solsaneru Ardror rods too,, pI$os Arralys,s

Anch rod proSe R003/4

Nor posSe

Wa*e p,ob

Phee waslreo

Cosipsale

Pos_No

lE1

lp

Nanre Class Corrasarrl

RI

Psc And anon

RIRI

RI

—2i—No

‘/ \N;/

V

Nc v’

— 1 Delarjll

.s No

4. Click Modify and the I-bolts become Plate washer anchors.

5. Click Apply, OK to accept the properties for use later.

6. Notice that we have put L /2’ of grout in the model, above the footing pad.

I. Press the Enter key to start the base plate command again.

To repeat the last command, do one of the following:

• Click Edit-> Repeat last command

• Press Enter

At this point in a real contract you would be able to run the Anchor BoltDrawing and send it out to for approval or over to the site so they can startpouring the bases. For taining purposes however, we will skip this step tilllater

i

b h

---_.-----i m;-i

Malarial

3/4_HEAW_MEILNUT QRI 3/4 WASHER QRI121

:a V

Yes

121 No

RIN0

ElNo

ENo

RI Default

121 aLJLJ

Ce — ate

Ware, nde a’aca:

Gauss shclqess

6,0,4 Po_No

El

1)2

Oea(e asseaas loss al aFos

1219o

rr_ I_I

0

t

Create baseplates to rest ofthe columns

V2. Create the rest of the base plates by picking each column and then the position for the

base plate.

2-6 TEKLA StRUcTURES 13.0 BASIC TRAINiNGSystem Components

Copyright © 2007 TekIa Corporallon

2.3 Beam to Beam Web

Shear plates

Create one shearplate connection

We will use the Shear plate simple (146) connection to make the beam to beam webconnections. The shear plate will be welded to the primary beam web and bolted to thesecondary beam web. We will use the connection when the secondary beam is perpendicularto the main member or at a skewed angle to the main member.

1. Open the component dialog (Ctrl+F or binocular icon), find the Shear plate simple(146) connection, and double-click on its icon.

ii’ Component calalog L

[Search]

Store

A

I

TEKLA STRUCTURES 13.0 BASIC TAININGSystem Components

2-7

146

Search result

Shea, plate simple

Copyright © 2007 Tekia Corporal’sr

The following dialog appears:

2. Pick the beam on gridline 1 as the main part of the connection.

3. Pick the beam perpendicular to the main part to be the secondary part and the connectionwill be created.

2-8 TEKLA STRUCTURES 13.0 BASIC TRAININGSystem Components

a

C

0

Tekia Structures Shear plate simple (146)

fla

s- —

liens ith Bob

L

Dov,tim e.ncu eeiobo EoSedo oba 0a4.,

I

LZ LD - I a

Copytghtl 21307 T&da CelTraIion

Checking ConnectionsTo make it easier to check the connection you created, you can create views from differentsides of a selected connection. In the view the work area is closely fitted around theconnection.

Ornate connectionbasic views

Create the rest ofthe shear plates

To create component basic views:

t. Select the connection symbol.

2. Right-click and select Create view> Component basic views, and four basic views(front, top end and perspective) appear.

3. Keep the Component front view open and close the other component basic views.

Tekla will automatically change the color of the component cone from green toyellow if an edge distance issue is detected. Edge distance rules are set upunder the Tools> Options> Components dialog box. (The default edgedistance is 1.2 times the bolt diameter)

With the connection’s applied properties, create shear plate connections to all the other beamto beam conditions.

Notice how Tekla automatically detects the depth of the supported beam and applies thecorrect number of bolts to the connection automatically.

TCKLA STRuCTuRES 13.0 BASIC TRAININGSystem Components

Check boltdimensions

‘I,

We will now check the bolt location distances and bolt edge distances between bolts and theshear plate.

Help: Modeling> Settings and tools > Querying objects > Measure

I, Click Tools> Measure> Boft measure.

2. Pick the bolt group.

3. Pick the shear plate and the temporary dimensions are sho in the view.

I

Now we will accept the created connection with the default properties.

copyright @2001 Tokla Corporotion 2-9

2.4 Beam to Column Web

Clip angle

We will use the Clip angle (141) connection to make the beam to column web connections.

For the double sided beam to column web connections we will use the Two sided Clip angle(143) connection. That connection uses only one bolt group to go through all three parts.

We will then make the wall brace 10 column connections with Tube gusset (20). Thisconnection uses a gusset plate to connect the beani to the column. Connection plates weldedto the end of the braces will be bolted to the gusset plate.

Create clip angles

We will now use the Clip angIe (141) connection to make all single beam to column webconnections using the default connection properties. We will modi the properties later withAuto Defaults.

1. In the component catalog, find the Clip angle (141) connection.

Liar*3Ie 1141]

2-10 TFKLA STRUCTURES 13.0 BASIC TRAININGSystem Components

r

I

Cop,TighI © 2007 Tate CorpOlalion

2. Make an end plate connection at every beam to column web condition where there isonly one secondary beam coming to the column web, The column is the main part in theconnection, so when prompted, pick the column as the main part. and the beam as thesecondary part.

Two-sided Clip angles

Create two-sidedclip angles

Create the two sided clip angle connection to all double sided beam to column webconditions to connect beams to both sides of the column web:

1. Find the Two sided clip angle (143) connection.

To sided clip anqe(143l

2. When prompted, pick the column as the main part.

3. Pick a beam on one side, and then the beam on the other side as the secondary parts.

4. Click the middle mouse button to complete the connection.

A When there are multiple secondaries you need to click the middle mouse buttonto complete the selection.

Help: Detailing> Getting started > Basics > Picking order

TLKLA sThuCTuREs 13.0 BASIC TRAININGSystem Components

Copyright © 2007 Tekla Corporahon 2-li

5. Double click on the connection cone to open the Two Sided Clip Angle properties dialogbox. Then set the Safety Connections Property on the Parts tab as shown below

Pats Fs&nth Gene, Nolcn Doe; 4,glebo.o Bo8oI; Bo:SDos Osstwe BeanJ 4’*so

Solely co’ylons

\‘etlItaIcLl/c4Iset

Hoizonlal cul

PoN; l4atsA

JA I2 Ri[ZAH2F0 l2L -

Rl;A I

2° 1 2[

___

A J

6. Click Modify when complete and notice that the angles on one side drop down to allowfor safe erection practices.

7. Click Apply then save the connection settings for fi.nure use by typing a name in theSave As.. filed and click the Save As.. button.

Save Lcad j staad v IL JII5a0r I

0

2-12 TEKLA STRUCTURES 13.0 BASIC TRAININGSystem components

t

b I’P,ofiIeNS 2 - --

PzoI’Ie FS 2 F IQ

PtohIeZNS 2 :zz_ZiGProfiIo2FS 2LZIZ:::E:Z 30

Er!III,jI ‘; L5

.‘

Sde2taon.cdtn4 2

EEl!? RH --

9

CopNighI 10 2007 Tekla Corpotation

8. Apply the Two sided clip angIe (143) to all two sided beam to column webs framingconditions.

2.5 Vertical Bracing Connections

Tube GussetWe will connect all the wall braces to columns using Tube gusset (20) connections and thenmodiv their properties all at once.

I. Find the Tube gusset (20) connection.

LtTube gusset ç20)

2. Pick the column on grid intersection A-3 as the main part

3. Pick two adioining braces, one by one, as secondaries.

4. Click the middle mouse button to create the connection.

5. While still in the active command, Repeat for the other side of the same column.

Now we can see that the connection created has two gusset plates each one with two braces.

We could also have created a single gusset plate going through the column bycreating one connection with the 4 braces.

Create tubegusset tointersection ofbraces

‘I,

V

HJIa 1

TEKLA STRUCTURtS 13.0 BASIC TRAINING 2-1 3System Components

Copyright © 2001 Tekla corporation

Create the rest ofthe tube gussets

Check one tubegussetconnection

4n

3. Select the Snap to Geometry Lines (Points select switch. This allows you to snap toall edges of parts rather than just the work points on parts.

4. Select the Create X measure icon and check the clearance to the corner of the plate.

We will now increase the clearance.

2-14 TERLA STRUCTURES 13.0 BASIC TRAININGSystem Components

Whiie still in the command, create the connections to the other ends of the braces by doingthe following:

1. Pick the column.

2. Pick the brace.

3. Click the middle mouse button to create the connection.

r

- -

I. Create Component basic views of the tube gusset connection on the center of the Xbrace.

2. Open the Component front views you can make sure there is clearance from the gussetplates to the column web.

/- To see the column web in the connection front view you can change the view

type in the view properties dialog to rerdered.

.

Copylight © 2007 TelO Corporation

Modifying Connections

Add clearancebetween thegusset plate andthe column

We wilt modify the connection by adding a clearance between the gusset plates and thecolumn. We will also change the number of bolt rows.

1. Double-click on the connection symbol.

2. On the Picture tab, type the value in the field defining the clearance between the gussetplate and the column.

Edit the numberof bolt rows

3. On the Braceboitsi and Bracebolts2 tab pages, edit the number of horizontal andvertical bolt rows as shown in the figures below.

TEKLA STRUCTURES 13.0 DASIc TRAINiNGSystem components

2-15

Soya I rJ!_I 500fldOSd

ignore olhep types

t 1okL Structures tutw,stssot (20)

LSaveao I

C,05,fr9esRctn,o 6us& Discs cmii Oenec

Herp.

Cu, non cowi Biatebok Brace Sots 2 Onoce bc 3

]

EJ ZJ

1)2) IEr j

V

r&i m I [W/l [can

copyright © 2007 Tekla Corporation

Bracebolts 1

4. Click Modify and then Apply.

Ei4

p.Bracebolts 2

The Braceboltsi tab affects the first picked brace, Hracebolts2 tab the secondpick and Bracebolts3 picks 3-9.

Check the Check that the number of bolt rows was changed and that the clearance is correct.changes

check the clearance:

Click the Create X measure icon.

Pick the starting and end pothts as showor

— notate bbIs frara!Ssv “c

2)

ENEl

0’

nTo

1.

2-16 TEKLA STRUCTURES 13.0 BAsIC TRAININGSystem Components

CopThI © 2007 TeNs CapotaD

3. Pick a point to locate the dimension.

4. Repeat for the other dimensions you want to check.

Now we will also modify the other tube gusset connections with the new properties weapplied.

Modify all the tube We can easily modify only connections of the same type shown in the connection dialog bygusset selecting Ignore other types in the connection dialog box.connections at

-

once I. Check that Ignore other types is selected in the connection dialog box.

Help: Detailing>Getting Started>Using Components>Modifying components

TekI Structures lube gusset (20)

Save J Load J standard

[ignore ether types I_________

2. Select all the connections in the model by using the Select component select switchshown below and dragging a window around the whole model.

Select switches

i t r; i ri ri

3. Click Modify.

We will now save the edited properties for later use.

/— By saving the properties with a descriptive name you can easily use them later.

You can also get AutoDefaults to automatically use the saved properties indesired cases by setting up AutoDefaults rules.

Save the 4. Type Wall bracings in the Save as field in the dialog box.properties

5. Click the Save as button.

Iiikli Sliocturos 1uIa gueset (20) P5<

I I Save I Hoa4 I roandadzIS8VeaSl

Wall bracings I_!!_Jignore other types

copyright @2007 Tekla Corporation TERLA STRUCTURES 13.0 BASIC TrlNING 2-17System Components

2.6 Beam to Column Flange

End plate

We will now create End plate (144) connections for all the beam to column flangeconditions by using the default properties.

Then we will edit one of the connection’s properties.

2-18 TEKLA STRUCTURES 130 BASiC TMININGSystem Components

Create end plates 1. Find the End plate (144) connection.

E re 144)

2. Create connections at all the beam to column flange framing conditions.

1

4’UCopyright® 2007 ToWs Corporation

2.7 Bracing Connections

Wrap Plate

Create wrap plateconnection

1. Find the Wraparound Gusset Cross (60) connection.

Wraparound gussetcross (SOT

2. Double click the connection to open up the parameters. Notice how the numbers areadded to help us select the members in the correct order.

TEKLA STRUCTURES 13.0 BASIC TRAINrNGSystem Components

i Sec. I ij9ad sienoere

ignore olhie’ iypee

., ickla sir i.r tint. Wroparounni tps..oI cr0 (60)

I Save ari niandard

23 [y...]

Picture Gusnet Brace corn Gnnenaj 0 tinner conn 1 Oussstconn2flr.ce bolts 1

LZZJ

‘if23 LEE]-j1

Brace bolts 2 4nIe bnIts Ocrign

e

[lEE!LEE!

[TQK

_____I

r j L.i I lw/ri rc& I

Copyright 0 2007 Tekla Corporation 2-19

4. We can then find and select on]y the options we want to alter rather than searchingthrough the entire component parameters.

5. We can see that the wrap plate looks small so we will shorten our bracing member inorder to give the wrap plate a better shape.

6. Open the system component and go to the Gusset Conn I tab. Set the bolts as shown

Tekla Structures Wraparound gusset cr0 (60)

_

— ——

;:1Ndmd

.H* — as. hi .‘—a

Ib- JILj, A

E1

—9 5

eJ ti

ElEl

____

0 0.111..

0

- H-

7. Do the same on the Gusset Conn 2 tab

2-20 TEKUA STRUCTURES 13.0 BASIC TRAININGsystem components

5HHbHI s,..ba.2

9’

3. Click OK and add the connection to the bracing where it meets id B5 to see what itlooks like. n

Adjust Wrap Platosize

copTghs 2007 Tekla CorporatlDn

. Tekia Structures Wraparound gusset crc (60)

- s” -a

—

I*—u 2r.. 17 15— :I;i_

-

•. j;—

SI,”,

21°, 04 ter

21

Sn

- II 5I

8. Finally shorten the brace to adequately clear the column corner by adjusting the setbackon the Brace Bolts I tab.

s. Tekla Structures Wraparound gusset cr0 (60)

5- -

— — ,,.,

—0...s.I O..,,s...- G. G...,I...I O..tII2 8,.s,bd.I O,..tII,Z

tz:ar fl1.d.,..g 5 IJ L

¾iflp. Øsss.fla.51I1,

___________

I_______: :

___

00 LD Ei 00

9. Click Modify

10. Now add the connection to the other ends of the WT bracings. Only three picks neededper connection, since the column is not present.

Copnight© 2007 Tekla Corporation TEKLA STRUCTURES 13-0 BASIC TRAINING 2—21System Components

Check clashing

11. The end result should look like the image on the previous page.

Now we will examine the connecti a little more close]y to check it is abso]utelv correct.

1. Make sure the Select Objects In Components symbol is pressed down

2. Select all the objects at the wrap plate connection by dragging a box around them

3. Right click and select Clash Check

To quickly locate and view colliding parts in the model, select a line containing the IDnumbers of colliding parts from the list. lekla Structures highlights the parts in the model.

4. Notice that the bolts and beams are highlighted.

The bolts from the wrap plate to the beam along grid line 6 are highlighting becausethey are flagging a potential clearance or access issue. Upon inspection you will

2-22 TEKLA STRUCTURES 13.0 BASIC TRAININGSystem Components

FCopyright © 2007 Tekla Coiporation

notice that this is probably acceptable enough to allow access in the field so you canigiore this clash.

The bolts from the wrap plate to the other beam are clashing because we added asystem component to each side of the connection and each system component addedits own set of bolts in that location. You will notice in the graphic below that thebolts in this location have 2 nuts.

Exploding connections has some benefits and some drawbacks. When youexplode a connection you remove the link from that connection to the systemcomponent that defined it. This effectively freezes the objects in thatconnection. They will not change when you modib the system component so itcan prevent you from accidentally changing settings. This also means that ifyou have a number of exploded system components you would need to changeeach and every one individually rather than editing the system component andhaving it automatically modi& all the similar connections in the model.

:.. .-*::

Explode We will now explode and modii the system component to reso]ve this problem.connection

A

Select the component symbol and right click the mouse.

Jete

2th’iincatog..

HideCompi[ content-‘ .—

-_-*. -- I*

._—__v__._E.... _l,.1 LIXtewfloDwiexwni,w -

2. Choose Explode Component

3. You will need to do this twice to remove both component symbols.

4. Select and delete one set of bolts

copyrght @2007 Tekla corporation TEKLASTRUCTURtS 13.0 BASIC TAlNrNG 2•23System components

ci—

:jfl PExats[dehnesHeRtb?pflCreate’,ew

rest

5. You will now notice that the bolts remaining dont go through all the members. Tocorrect this we must use the Edit Bolt Parts Command.

5. Select the bolts then right click

e

Edit bolt parts 7. Choose Bolt Paris

Ilde IihideFit by pat

8. Choose the beam first, then one angle, then the other as shown below

zrzzj z-zzzt

r•9. Make sure you select the angles and not the wrap plate.

10. Click the middle mouse button to end the command and the bolts should now go all theway through each mcmi her.

2-24 TEKLA STRUCTURES 130 BASJC TRAININGSystem Components

C.

wwni.ftctanate

.

Iriierftot

ftwetes...

Copycopy

F-

0i

a ,

3— . --

Copyfight © 2007 Tekle Coirstion

2.8 Re-Check Entire Model Clashing1. Select all of the parts by dragging an area select around the whole model.2. Right-click and select Clash check.

‘... You can locate specific clashes in the model by selecting lines in the clashreport. Tekla will highlight the items in the model that are causing thatparticular clash. Note that one member may cause and report several differentclashes with other members and these will all show up on the report.

You can also zone in on the clashing part by holding down the ‘F’ key whenclick a line on the report This will temporarily hide everything else other thanthe specific clash you clicked in the report. making the clash easier to find. Toreturn to normal, simply redraw the window.

Different settings on the Select Filters toolbar will allow you to locate different types ofclashes. For instance you can restrict the clash check to only look for clashes betweenmembers or main members and secondary parts or main members secondary parts and boltstoo.

copyright © 2007 Tokla Corporation TEKLA STRUCTURES 13.0 BASIC TRAINING 2-25System components

0

0

02-26 TEKLASTRUCTURES 13.0 BASIC TRAiNING CopyTht@2OO7 TeldaCapona&o

System Components

eSe TEKLA

Basic Modeling 2


October 29, 2007


0

9,

3-il TEKLA STRUCTURES 13.0 BASIC TRAINING Copqight@2OO7TeIda CccaiionBasic Modeling 2

Contents

3 Basic Modeling 2 I

3.1 Start a new model 23.2 Open and Save an Existing Model 23.3 Create new model 3

Create grid 3Create plane views along gridhnes 6

3.4 Create Concrete Members 7Pad footings 7Concrete columns 9Copy the members 11Pre-cast ledger beams 12Pre-cast Slabs 16

3.5 Create Steel Framing 20Steel columns 21Steel rafter 24Work points for roof joists 25Copy the portal frame and the points 26Set Sloping Work Plane for Joists 27True plan view 29Create roofjoists 29Vertical Eaves Bracing 31Crane Beam Support Stubs 33

3.6 Combine Models 1 and 2 34Change the phase of BasicModel2 members in preparation 34Copy from model 35Check that all part properties are consistent 31

3.7 Define Your Own Select Filters 39Recreate the Modell grid 41

3.6 Setting Up Job Specific Information 43Project properties 43Check preferences 44

Cbpysight© 2007 Tekla Corporation TEKLASTRUCTURES 13.0 BASIC TRAINING 3-uiBasic Modeling 2

9

3-iv TEXLA STRUCTURES 13.0 BASLC TRAINING Copyright @2007 Tekla CorporationBasic Modeling 2

In this lesson In this lesson we will cover some preliminary tasks that you need to do before starting tomodel in a real project. We will create a new model and recap the basic fUnctions introducedin lesson I. After that, you will learn some more about the basic fUnctions.

We will revise how to

• Open and save or backup models

• Input Grids

• Create Beams and columns

• Copy and move items


• Adjust atn-ibutes of members

• Input construction points

• Work in true planes (sloped, skewed)

• Use phases

• Combine separate models

1EXLA STRUcTuRLS 13.0 BASiC TRAININGBasic Modeling 2

m

3 Basic Modeling 2

copyrighI @2007 TekIa Corporation 3-1

3.1 Start a new modelThere are two options available for the beginning part of this lesson. Users attending atraining class can open the BasicModel-Concrete provided or alternatively can opt to buildthe model shown below step by step by following the manual as normal.

• To open the model continue below to section 3.2

• To build the model jump to section 3.3

3.2 Open and Save an Existing ModelStart base model 1. Click the Open icon,

2. Navigate to the TeklaStructuresModels\Training\Steel folder,

r

3. Select the existing model, Basic Model 2 - Concrete, and click OK.

4. From the File pull-down menu select Save as...

Edit View Points Parts Lo,

J New... Chl-.N

Opan Cr1.0Id Save

I LW Save as.

D_.,. A..,...:.. OLS -

3-2 TERLA STRUCTURES 13.0 BASIC TRAINENGBasic Modeling 2

I

14ã 0 &‘1sclaSl,nes4udnT,ergS4nI Bo.._I

MC&I .e Mojeb be, ,edeee voice, ci 1,c, SIte D.,ig,a Decocorn3 Becclcddl ce/m/20371011sr FIROJ DESI3FR PRCJ DES[APTI

I 8s*vcdd2-Cc,-c,e.

Mod,1 come: Boom Modd 2- [Oracle

[ O[ I ,cci I

0

I)U

5. Enter “Basic Model 2 —flrstna,ne lasiname”

Copyright® 2007 Tolda corpocton

6. Click the OK button and the model will be created.

7. Now jump forward to section 3.5- Create Steel Framing

3.3 Create new modelStart a new model

-]

I. Pick the New icon.

2. Name the model ‘Basic Model 2 —Jirstname lastname”.

3. Click the OK button and the model will he created.

Create grid

Set Work plane toa new position

We will now create a grid for the model. In order to combine Basic Model 1 and BasicModel 2 later, we will take into account the positioning of Basic Model I and define theorigin of Basic Model 2 grid to different in the global coordinates.

The grid is created according to the work plane, the current local coordinate system, of themodel. So before creating the grid we will temporarily position the work plane to new globalcoordinates.

AThe red coordinate arrow symbol indicates the work plane, which is thecurrent local coordinate system of the model. Most of the commandsdependent on the coordinate system use work plane coordinates.

You can create a skew grid by first setting the work plane to the desired skewposition.

4. On the meno, select View> Work plane > With one point. Press the letter A.

5. Type SO,45’-7, click Enter or OK.

Location: $045’?

See. D’J eJ.St,oJure,Modeb1 rw,g\SteeI

t Sov,os

Moder 1op Model, Di. ,,ed Ve,oaq el Telda Skoc.. D.:i,.3 Ba,cldodel I O5.’l2lO1laa, PROJ D[SIGNSR PROJ DES[RIPH

pso. j

Ua,ic Model 2

OK ii

‘I,

V

Copy,ight @200? Telda Corporalion TEKLA STRUCTURES 13.0 BASIC TRAINING 3-3Basic Modeling 2

The work plane is positioned in global O45’-7.O

/— You can use the command Work plane > With one point to set the work plane

exactly to the desired position. This command keeps the work plane parallel tothe current work plane, but moves it to a new position using a single pickedpoint.

Create the grid 1. Delete the default grid (if one exists).

2. Double-click on the Create grid line icon.

3. Edit the grid, in the Grid properties dialog box, according to the figure below(coordinates and text).

p

ft

L

CopTighI © 2007 TeRLa Corporaton3-4 TEKLAS1RUCTURES 13.0 BASIC TRAININGBasic Modeling 2

O!22•11!!236!I2zii

0 23-6 501 O 5s-

Labels

Ex 1234567

Ei CDEF

Ez 0236 059-868-3

Lie extensions OrinLeft/Below Right/Above

Jx G0 .80”— EXO 0

Ev 6.0 6fP ‘‘c IP ZEz •6O 60 zo QH

Magnetism

El Magnetic id ane

Depth oF magnetic plane 0’

Other settings

______________________

[iier-defined attributes...

Create J Moy j [ Set 11W/Fl Dose

4. Click Create.

5. Enter BASIC MODEL 2 in the save as field and click the Save as button to save thegrid values.

Fit work area 1. Click anywhere in the view.

2. Right-click and select Fit work area.

The view should now look like the one below.

TEKLASTRUCTURES 13.0 BASIC TRAFNINGBasic Modeling 2

(IE . standard

Coordinates

v [ve asj standard

Cop5Tigbt @200? lekla Corporaliss 3.5

3-6 TEKLA STRUCTURES 13.0 BASIC TRAININGRasic Modeling 2

C

F:

Th

-3

C

Create plane views along gridlinesWe will now create Elevation and Plan views along the gridlines.

Create grid views 1. Select the grid.

2. Right-click and select Create view> Grid views from the pop-up menu.

3. Click the Show.., button on each view plane to open the View properties dialog box,set the view properties the way you want and click OK.

4. Click Create in the Creation of views along grid lines dilalog box.

Copyright @2007 Tetla corporation

Pad footings

S’-1OW-1O tooting

I

3.4 Create Concrete MembersFirst we will create pad footings and columns on gridline I and then copy them to the othergridlines.

We will then create beams on w-idlines I and 3 and mirror them to the other side of thestructure. With a slab generation mao. we will then create slabs on top of some beams

We will now create foundations on gridline 1.

Double-click on the Create pad tooting icon.

2. Load the saved PadFooting properties.

3. Enter the pad footing information in the dialog box for an 8’10*8 10 footing as shown.

€:yFr:

i[2.xi

Gupyght @2001 1ea Corration TEKLASTRLJCTURES 130 BASJC TRAINING 3JBasic ModelIng 2

1. Click Apply.

2. Pick grid intersections C-I and F-I.

While still in the command:

3. Enter the pad footing information in the dialog box for a 6lOv61 0 footing as shownin the drawing.

4. Click Apply.

5. Pick grid intersections D-l and F-I.

The footings should now look like those shown below:

D

E

3---.

3-8 TEKLASTRUC1URES 135 BASIC TININGBasic Modeling 2

‘5(


Save PadFDoang v [save 1 PadFootk,g

Atbibutes Posnf Cast urit

Name PAD_FOOTING

[EIProtie 1”9OS”

Material 5301] Select.

E Finish

Class S

Lin attributes.. [:1

OK Apply J Modify ii Get j[E/r]I CanJ

6’-1O6’-1C tooting

C

Copflitl 2X7 TeldaCspv,aqion

Concrete columns

36’x24” columns

(I

Now we will create the columns on gridline I.

1. Double-click on the Create Concrete column icon.

2. Load the COLUMN properties from the drop down list.

3. On the Position tab set the bottom atO and the top at 236

• Levels

-

Top: 23-6

i Bottom 0”

4. Enter the information in the Concrete column properties dialog box for a 30*20(36”X24”) column, and click Apply.

TEKLA S1RUCTURCS 13.0 BASIC TRAININGBasic ModelIng 2

( Concrete column properties

Column Cokn

Start releases Erreleasz_J_ DesignAllnibutes Position I Cast unit

Position

Vertical

D*{m,gAnalysis

Middle V; 0”

Rotation

Ho,iont

Fr,t 0.0000

Midde v W

OK ii App’ j[ ModifyJ[ setJjw/rl[ Cancel

Cpyrrght © 2007 TokEn Corporation 3-9

5. Pick the intersections of grids C-I and then F-1.While stilt in the command:

‘4;

24’x24’ columns 6. Complete the dialog for 2iO*20 (24”X24”) columns and create them on gridintersections D-1 and E-l.

7. Adjust the top level of these columns to be set at 21-0

Vt

3-10 TCXLA STRUCTURES 13.0 BASIC TRlNlNG

W Concrete column properties I5

LrJ EEStart releases

‘t Cokznn

AttribUtesEnd releasesPosition

ØNarne

Profile

COLUMN

Design .JL Delorming

Cast urut J Anelysit

38e24

E Material

EFinish

5000

Class 13

.J I •.

- Select.

User-defined attributes..

HOK Apply ft Mody ILet JIw/r1Lcanu

Bnlt Modeling 2CopyTight @ 2007 Ttkla Corporation

Copy the members

Copy themembers ongridlines C and F

End releases jj Desi

__

Del orn*igPosilron Cast un j__ Analysis

Add these columns to grids Dl and El

2...

We will now copy the footings and columns to other gridlines.

I. Select the footings and columns on gridlines C and F. Use the CTRL key to selectmultiple items.

2. Right-click and select Copy special > Translate on the pop-up menu.

TEKLA STRUCTURES 13.0 BASIC TRAINFNGBasic Modeling 2

Cokarnn

Start releasesAttributes

-. {ac1; Cc4nn

Position

Øverlical Middle 0

Rotation Front v 0.9000

Hoijzonlal Middle v 0

Levels.(ETop 21.0

Botlorn:

11 JL Modily ]LIJEJ[ Cancel

D

Copyright @2007 Tekla Corporabon 3-11

3. Pick two adjacent points along grid line C to define the translation vector (]Y-S’ in thex-direction).

4. Type in the number of copies (6).

5. Click Copy.

C

Copy themembers ongridlines 0 and E

6. Select the footings and columns on gridlines D and E.

7. Right-click and select Copy on the pop-up menu.

S. With only the Snap to points and grid intersections snap active, pick a gridintersection along grid line one to define the copy origin

9. Then select the corresponding intersections along grid lines 3, 5, and 7.

The end result should look like the graphic shown below. (The colors may be different)

Pre-cast ledger beams

Create beams ongridlines I and 3

We will now create the beams along gridlines I and 3 at level 23-6”.

I. Double-click on the Create concrete beam icon.

3-12 TEKLASTRUCTURES 13.0 BASiC TRAININGBesic Modeling 2

< •1 96” Numbe, of copies 6

dY”

Pick.

LE1 [] tea’

_______

cc

1

D

I

Copyright @ 2007 Teida Corporatirn

2. Set the BEAM properties as shown. Clicking the button next to the profile will open theprofile catalog in order to enter the values required

TEKLA STRtJCTURFS 13M BASIC TRAININGBasic Modeling 2

Concrete beam properties

ItBearn [save asj ItBeam

Start releases End releases Loading DesignAttributes [_?osition

E Name B EAM

Cast unit

Shape

DeformingAnalysis

Makexid

RCDL24’9D”-3J”8’

5W0

Finish

Class

ri!i[Seect.. I

6

UserdeId attri&jtes.

LOK jj Apply i[ ModiJL j[w/r}I Cancel

Piojdenane CL24’r’r’w

Filter

t Select profile

Filter

,.. G,e,al Ma.ths us altctqAe

Pife type

Profile lype. j RCL p’ol’leo

Profile wbtype ri’ibt

PLCt’jxe

I] T profiles

i C C piotilex+ -O Circular hoflow seclions* El 9ec,aholowkaDimre- • Oscija, secbis

5 TirtetPro(es+ O D.Oe Tees iRCI*, Plate proliles

• 31 Welded box prolilesP 1 Pararnetiic pietiesP.1 RCDLprotiles4.$ ACOX pieties

J RCL protles

S Is I..iG5 L-20

PCLp RD< pieties+ -( RDO< protilesA 15 Deck Sleb profiles

15 Others

Pioçe,Web Peckness

FL,r!qo lii

2Show elipofles

Symbol Vaue24” ii

h r’ ii32”B

V

OK fl Apply

Sl•ii del

Copyrighf @2001 Tekla Corporalien 3-13

3. Enter the information in the Concrete beam properties dialog box for gridline 1 beams.

4. Click Apply. If you wish to save these properties, type a name in the box next to the rSave As button, and then click Save As

5. In the 3D view pick the reference point of the column at C and 23’-6 (Snap to endpoints should be active).

6. Still having the cursor snapping to the picked point at the top of the column on grid C,type z to lock the z coordinate and then pick the top point of the column at D and 23 ‘-6.

7. End the command by clicking the left mouse button.

8. Still having the z coordinate locked; create the other two beams on gridline I in the sameway.

9. Open the profile catalog once again and change the profile as shown

10. Enter the information for the beams on gridline 3 in the Concrete beam propertiesdialog box.

3-14 TEKLA STRUCTURES 13.0 BASIC TRAININGBasic Modeling 2

CoordinateOrtho-Locks

Picnic name RCDL1 1 3/1 623”5/8 1911 /1657/8

Fer -

t Modity profile catalog

______

PrcUe leFer 1 Pro(etsce:

Generof Use attib4es

ii flOLprofes

Prolile stttype: rhb1

Picture

4-2

p—itt,JIt2

I piolilect_ pIOIIIOS

t. I profilest: C profiles

Circular hollow sectionsRectangular hollow sections

+ Circular sections+

— Tnte °roRasP eta I ceslfl C)

• j Plaepiofes

i Weldsi box prcR;es

1. Pa&seuicrgcfa.9CD ofies

4 5 t2+ :5r IT-lB

55 1120:41 15 11-24

4 flCDX protrles4 J RCL profilest: 90< piotiles* 4 fl0-C<profas

5 Dect&Slthpiofes-

— DLhas

oj( E& it

Properly Sy., velue UrWeb thickness s 24’ inHeight h ‘ inWidth b 34” inflange thickness S B” in

I’CopwNC ZN? Tekla Corporation

11. ClickApply

U. Create the gridline 3 beams.

13. Twe z to unlock the z coordinate — the Z should disappear from the status bar along thebottom of the screen

Coordinates can be locked in the X. Y or Z direction. This is similar to the‘Orthd snap in other CAD programs. Remember to highlight the snap first.then press the coordinate key to be locked before clicking the first point.

Copy the beamsto gridlines 5 and7

14. Select the beamsjust citated on gridlines 1 and 3.

15. Copy special > Rotate the beams to the other end of the structure indicating themidpoint of gridline 4 as the center of rotation (Snap to midpoints should be active).

Origin CopyX0 Nrher of conies 1

YD 68 — —

Angle 0.0000 J

‘‘I

VThe model should now look as shown below.

C

otetionAngle 180.0000

Aicund z

OK J[ cojJflëie [ Catel

Copyright © 2007 Tekla corporabDa TEKLA STRuCTuREs 13.0 BASIC TRAINING 3-15Basic Modeling 2

The model should now ]ook as shown below.

Pre-cast Slabs

F.

r

Create the precastslabs

We will now create precast slabs on top of the framework by using the Modeling of FloorBay macro (66).

1. Open the PLAN at ELEV 236 View

2. Find the Modeling of Floor Bay macro (66) in the Component catalog.

3. Double-click on the component to open the component dialog box.

4. Complete the dialog box as shown on the next page.


0

Select and move views between the hsts to control stiy.To select mUiple views, hold down ctrl -key wFüle selecting.

Narrtd views:

4.

Visible vlews:

3d:L!V&TICN oti

ZLEVATION ONflEVATION ON!L!VAI I ON C-N

flEVATIDT-1 ONZLZVATION C-NILI’AIION ONELSVAIION ONELEVAT I ON ONZLZVAT ION 0+1EIEVTID-N ONELAN AT EL Ci’

PWZ AT EL 23,-6”

-l&IO 1

0t10 2

OID 3

IO 4tIO S0t17

0L10 7

0.ID C

Dam D

£

0t10 F

4,

1,-i[ Pelete J

[ QK I

V

CopyTi9hl €‘ 2007 Tekla corporaton

5. Click the Profile tab and complete the box as shown. In the Pos_No upper box, type theword Concrete as this will affect how your items are numbered in the model.

6. Click the button next to the Profile tab and navigate to the Parameuic TT slab profilethen enter the information as shown on the next page.

TEKLA STRUCTURES 13.0 BASIC TNLNG 3-17Basic Modeling 2

L!1 IZiJ <ErlemalDe,rmi>

Paiartrerr P:olrlar

lokia Structure. Modclin ol floor bay C”) -

HIt-

Prcqeclni ype

I I!!‘-

-til

5 Delatdt

I Z1 [.Z1 L._ LFZJ P7Tfl [Crct I

€ Tokia gir,€ Modeling of floor lv r’ 5?

Name

o Ia

Li.j Ed,r.atflrw)

Pa,acrere,, Prdfec /1 lyoe Thrcrnfee,IN,bo,

r b h Por$ Mer’alSlab SI C 21C1_ 55000

: 9cP1

clan d dab

Irdem Lie’ Aduoirre,, Twa P,th&S,seWdF

S ac&a SEr___ .zz EDdaut -----Ia ELD&ath S CLJa 5De S CE’5: 5Se,ae Ca 5De

S IaDaur a oS 2JDeIat 21S ED&L* SS 21

i - I riwi LQ’j LEI.CJ I Curcel I

Copyright @2007 Takla Corporalron

— View 2 - PLAF4 Al a. 23-6

2’ 3!

.NN_64\

C

P.cJ.e name:

t Select profile Ut’ )

5ene sr4.ss JeallsAe5

Foldel,io.e

Pr&k type. Usc-defred. psias&c

Prolile eublype Corrc T T ht-s-l-b21-oIrl-63l-rlplll

Pdtse

Prepay SyIthol V,e UretN 2r

L L proliles

T T profiles

C C profiles

• 0 Circular hollow sections

I] Pactarigidar hollow s,ctlons

f • Circular sections@ Timber Profiles@ Double Tees IRCI

*3 ODTr5 loDr

± 3 1293

‘DthaCTeernsNes& icr

TEK-T’

&TT

I Praleixctiesfl WS&dswoJdes1.. Paratrelnc profies

RCDL profiles-a

Shoyq all profiles

L.OK ]

A

I rnress m rim i

DefF, c ateJelance beweai tS,e fazro & e-e to

\a/,dlh ot Ihe plale sI..Stcpe lactor d the p-

Tal radIi b 977/16 in

b2S..

b3rIp

E Show details

7.40

VDOD

.9

n

in

ejJ

7. In the PLAN ±23 ‘-6 view, pick positions 1 and 2, click the Middle Mouse Button

8. Pick positions 3 and 4 as shown, click the middle mouse button.

9. Pick positions 5 and 6, click the middle mouse butt.

3-18 TENLA STRUCTURES 13.0 BASIC TRAININGBnic Modeling 2

C)CopyngIrl a 2007 TekIs Corporstisri

10. The slabs are created in view below.

D

__________________

!t

C

____ ____

II. Select the macro symbol and copy it to the span between rids F and F.

1 2 3

F•1

Fp’.sfl’, Søt’=•I

F

12. Now repeat the process to fill in the slabs in the center bay.

13. Change the parametric profile as showr to account for the difference in bay width.

TEXLASIRUC1URES 13.0 BASIC TININGBasic Medeling 2

Copight C 20W Tekia Corporawn 3-19

3.5 Create Steel FramingFirst, we will create two columns on gridline I and then a sloping beam or rafter betweenthem.

After that we will create the construction points needed to create roofjoists. We will copy-translate the completed portal frame and points.

3-20 TERLA STRUCTURES 130 BASIC TRAiNINGBasic Modeling 2

PyoUer.e,e rT4 117 a44’-r4ao’r8

t Soled profile 1<

LiJ

• Denote &*s Use, &t,&Jes

ReNt t,çe

Relde ype: Usadefr,&. paarrel’c

Ps&eesaype Ccnc.Tt hb&+b2fsf,It2dpiE’±. 0 Cgciiaho(owsecta.,

j Q Rectana hollow sections

• Cipsular sections PoIseil Tiobe, Profles

‘0 Double Tees RCIt: °0 Rectenqular IRCI b

: I Plate p,ct8eshIJ1

1. Parameltic protlesRCDL plofilee

• RCDX poSes

1 RCLceNtes

- I RO< oNes

t4 Pacedy S Vn‘ ‘eCow Tesetel 24”

A6VJLCF.&T TOLdtMdh 1173/4 I• O CANAM T:-ickrtso & tie lo s 4”

,Dezcte 2’

, oeteaeeos its b2 48± ‘5 t-otowcoeslths

S:y,4a’.-b sIr 033; 95 Caos4e&abo WdF&iherAeslor. b3 8’

@ ‘5 Da.neTe,,ocnje’RC1 Sicqeiacior,4thepe etc 302

EJ Show alp poSes

1

Ehow depots

Lie

55

C

.5

14. Finally copy the slabs to the other bays.

/— The Modeling of Floor Bay (66) component can be used for steel decking or

Vmesh flooring too. It iil restricted to concrete slabs. Simply change thesection name to be used in the component to quickly and easily add flooring ofany type to a model.

Cepysight @2007 Tekla Corporation

Steel columns

Then to emulate a change in the contract, we will replace the concrete columns on gridlines2, 4 and 6, combining them with the upper steel columns so that they are turned into fill-length steel columns.

Utilizing a sloping work plane and view planes, we will model roofjoists.

Finally, we will create vertical eaves bracing on gridlines C and F.

We first create two W3OXI 08 columns on gridline 1 at CI and FlCreate columns 1. Double-click on the Create column icon.

2. Load the COLUMN pronerties.

3. Complete the Column properties (profile and levels) for the column at rid intersectionC-i using prefix and start numbers previously saved. The columns on grid line C shouldhave a bottom elevation of 23-6 and a top elevation of 66’-3and a 900 rotation

C I uri’n yioperliiis :4 Colunn juopeities

i4j tAs b..±i Cck Co&si v

drth,e: Eie:gn Delc,rmg Endi&e,te Dei,’. DtbnwMF,bie Po:hon M*:I: SlyI vi:r: AII(t,iAes Po:t,,” AJ’I*III Slail e{eiel

)l.iit&w rt’ £(tfl.

Ft4 2flsv&i jtJvei1& ldde V ti

ePa ‘N EfiicAdn Bact V O(O3

C RH — —___________

RI Har,d Ii Ide v 0A?Iit,,n,

ENaie Cli,1i1411

E” 2lToc 1ST

! ‘ r PBo..,‘. II e,& 492

Lvi Fn

2CC. 7

2

m[Wj[iji i/r LIIEJ[Jr jJ 17LrJ[ Coce j

4. Click Apply

5. Pick grid intersection C-I to create the column.

6. Complete the Column properties for the column at grid F-I. The columns on grid line Fshould have a bottom elevation of 23-6 and a top elevation of 59-8 as shown on the nextpage.

ThIG.A sTRUcTIREs 13.0 BASIC TRN1NSBasic Modeling 2

I

€i 2007 Teja corcoalb 3-21

7. Click Apply.

8. Pick the nñd intersection F-I to create the second column.

Measure the gap

r

Since the profile depth of the concrete and steel columns are different, middle positioningcauses a gap in the outer face.

Use the Measure tool to measure the distance from the edge of the column to the edge of theslab.

I. Click on the Create y measure icon.

2. In the GRJD I view pick the point in the slab corner, then the point in the columncorner. (7

Column properties

EEi Ii;iE V Save asJ standard

Deoign DeforningPosition Analysis JL Start releases

End releases

Attributes

Posilior

El Vertical

El Aotatà

Middle V C”

Back t C.OO

El Horizontal: Middle v 3

—

______

—

_____

—

________

Levels

El Top:

El Bottom:

-b’!

23’6

10K 11 Moy II II Cancel]

3-22 TEKLA STRUCTURES 130 BASiC TRAININGBasic Modeling 2

Copyright 0 2007 lekla Corporation

3. Pick a position to place the dimension.

C

A The measure tools measure distances between two points in the view plane.

Measures are visible in the rendered view window until you update or redrawthe window.

Adjust the column edge to the slab (and concrete column) by using the vertical positionoffset in the Column properties dialog.

1. Open the Column properties dialog box.

2. Modify the column on gridline C using a vertical offset of -31/16”

3. Modify the column on gridline F using a vertical offset too.

4. Check that both column flanges line up with the outer faces of the concrete. The offseton the column at Ft may be a positive figure

TEKLA STRUCTURES 13.0 BASIC TLINLNGBasic Modeling 2

ii

Adjust the verticalposition

ii:i standard v. [save as] standard

End releasesAtthbutes

IDesign L Delorming

Pcsitn Analysis Start ieleases

Position

__________

Vertical: 1frn iddle v -31 /16

Rotation. Back V 02000

E Ho,izoral: Midde V Q’

Copyright © 2007 lekla Corporation 3-23

Steel rafter

Create rafter

Offsets for all members follow the rules outlined in the graphic below.

a

na

3-24 TEKLA STRUCTURES 130 BASIC TRAININGBasic Modeling 2

— -J1

0

PLATE

I,

CHW*IEL

0

1•

aDg

RWATIIJ

— —

,“.

..

.,...4,F’ Lfl

ax

pLmlTm IN ‘tME

2>PUSITTh lb DEPTH

Now we will create a W30X99 rafter between the two columns that we just created.

1. Double-click on the Create beam icon.

2. Load the RAFTER properties.

3. Enter W30X99 for the rafter profile and click Apply.

Copyright €5 2007 Tekla Corporalson

5.

‘_ You may need to expand the 3D view at this point if your rafters are not visible.To do this double click in open space in the 3D view then change the dialog asshown below.

View depth: Up: 1000

jDown: a-a

Work points for roof joistsAfter inputting the two columns and the rafter. we will layout points for modeling the roofjoists

We can now use the grid intersections C and 66’-3” and F and 59’-8” to create the workpoints for the first and last roofjoists.

1. Double-click on the Create extension point icon.

2. Type -2-0”, click OK. (We use a negative value to make the extension point work backtowards the first point clicked)

Copyiight © 2001 Telda corporat’Dn 3—25

4. Tn the GRID I view pick grid C and 66-3” and then F and 59’-8”.

Ce. — F

- 66’—3’’59IIe

First and last joistwork points

TEKLRSTRucTIJREs 13.0 BAlC TRAINrNGBasic Modeling 2

3. Pick grid intersection C and 66’-3”, and then F and 59-8”.

4. Repeat, picking the points in the reverse order.

2”1/lB 0)

Create extension point adds or subtracts a point along a line that you specie byclicking Iwo points in the model. The points that arc clicked by you in themodel define the direction vector; the value you enter defines the distance fromthe first selected point. A positive or negative value defines the direction alongthe defined vector. A positive value means the extension point to be added willfurther away from the first point clicked, negative means back towards the firstpoint clicked

Divide theworking points in12 segments

Using the Create divided line points command, divide the space between the two workpoints that you just created into twelve equal spaces (11 points).5. Double-click to open the Divided line points dialog box.

.a —

(• Divided line IloinIs 5<

No. of points 11

[ OK Apply Cancel

6. Type Ii and click OK

7. Select the two work points created previously.

Copy the portal frame and the points

Copy themem hers

We will now copy the columns, the rafter and the points to idlines 2-7.

I. Select the columns, the rafter and the points.

3-26 TEKLA STRUCTURES 13.0 BASIC TINLNGBasic Modeling 2

I

V

Copynhl © 2007 Tekla Corration

II2. Right-click and select Copy special> Translate.

3. Pick two points to show the translation vector (19’-8” in x direction).

4. Type the number of copies (6).

5, Click Copy.

Set Sloping Work Plane for Joists

Set work plane tothe roof slope

14

The next step is to model the joists on the sloped roof. To place the parts in the correct planewe will first change the work plane (wtich currently is the local coordinate system of themodel) to the roof slope.

Help: Modeling> Getting Started> Basics > Defining the work area and shift(ng thework plane

To set the work plane to the roof slope:

6. Pick the Set Work by 3 points icon.

7. Pick the top of the Cl column as the origin.

8. Pick the top of another grid C column to define the positive x direction.

TEKLA STRUCTURES 13.0 BASIC TRAININGBasic Madeling 2

I.I

21F.

Copytghl @ 2007 TekIa Corporation 3-27

9. Pick the top of the Fl column to define the positive y direction.

66’-S”

The work plane is now positioned to the top plane of the rafter.

A The Set work plane to part plane command sets the work plane parallel to thepart plane (front, top, back, bottom) on the center line of the part.

/— You can use the command Work plane > With one point to set the work plane

exactly to the desired position. This command keeps the work plane parallel tothe current work plane, but moves it to a new position using a single pickedpoint.

66’-3

C;

3-28 TEKLA STRUCTURES 13 0 BASLC TR4INNGBasic Modeling 2

Joist orientation with adjustedUcs

e

a

c

Joist Orientation without adjusted UCS

Cupynghl @ 2007 Tekla Corporation

True plan viewWe will now make a true plan view of the roof by creating a view perpendicular to the workplane. We can also use the true plan view in drawings.

/— Working in a true plan view makes it easier to model sloped objects since the

grids are also shown in the true plan and points outside the view plane arepresented as red crosses with circles.

The pan positioning, copying. etc, however, always comply with the workplane coordinate system no matter in which view you perform the commands.

Create true plan I Pick Properties > View...VIGW

2. Load the Plan View pre-defined settings and complete the properties as shown below,click OK.

ISavaslVew

EName: tRUE PLAN ON ROOF

E Angle: D Plane. H Rotation around Z: -300000

12] Projection: § Orthogonal E Rotion oirdX: 20.0000

Repiesentation

Eviewtype: Rendered

121 Color and transparency in all vievn: standard v Fpresentationj

VisibilityView depth: Up: 3Cr

EDown:

EVisibility ci object types: [ Display...

E Visible object group: standard-. vi [object group...

OK J[ Appy ir Modify set .[W/FJflcanc

3. Select View> Create view> To workplane.

The new view is created. The grid is also shown in the true plan view plane. Notice thatbecause you are now looking directly at the sloping roof, your columns may look a little oddbecause they are effectively skewed in this view.

Create roof joistsWe will now create the roofjoists by using the Create beam tool.

Create purlins I. Double-click on the Create beam icon.

2. Load the Joist properties.

3. Select a 12K5 profile for the joists.

Copydght@200? Tokla corporation TEKLA STRUCTuRES 13.0 BASIC TRAINING 3-29Basic Modeling 2

t View properties

4. Change the Position I At depth to: Behind \‘9th 21 112 offset and Apply.

5. Pick the joist work point near grid intersection F-I at the command Pick first position.

6. At the command: Pick second point, pick the work point near grid intersection F-2.

7. Check the elevation view on grid Ito ensure that the roofjoist is orientated andpositioned correctly.

F

8. Create the rest of the joists by using the Copy special > Translate command. (12copies along the slope and 5 copies of those along the building)

3-30 ICKLA STRUCTURES 130 BASIC TRAININGBeeic Modeling 2

59 -a

p

Position

On plane: Miadle U”

2 Rotation: lop y: 0.0000 IEAt depth: Behind V -21/2

..

r

&9s

E

Copynghi €12007 Telda CmpoIion

Set the workplane back toglobal origin

Now we must switch the work plane back to the global origin to carry on modeling outsideof the roof plane,

I. Select View> Work plane> Work plane...

2. Select Plane: XY and set the depth coordinate toO and click Change.

Vertica’ Eaves BracingWorking in along grid line C we will create vertical bracing using the Create beam tool.

I. Open the PLAN AT ELEV 663 view

2. Double-cHck on the Create beam icon.&zDnw

3. Load the.Vértieal_HSS_Brace properties.

4. Enter HSSSX4X.250 (EDI Compliant) as the profile.

EI

-

-—

Plane: HDepth coordinate: 0”

I Changej Caic&

The work plane is now set back to the global origin.

z

Create brace

TEKL4srnucTuRrs 13.0 BAsic TRAINING 3-31Basic Modeling 2

copight @2007 Tekta corporabon

5. Click Apply.

3-32 TEKLA STRUCTURES 13.0 BASt TRAININGBasic ModeRng 2

2’

F

1Move41transLate

6. Create one brace using the column top positions at C-I and C-2.

C

±7. Open the Plan at 598 level and place a brace along the column top positions at F-I and

F-2

1 2’

F

8. Move each brace down and out towards the center of the column. Remember we offsetthe columns out to the face of the concrete.

4’

.31/16

Pick...

love Clear [W/FIEel


Copy the bracealong grids C andF

1. Select the brace and use Copy special> Translate... to copy the brace five times at 19’-8” intervals along idline C.

Crane Beam Support StubsNext we will add crane girders to the framing.

1. Double-click on the Create beam icon.

2. Load the BEAM properties.

3. Enler WI 8X40 for the profile size.

4. In the GRID 1 view, pick the grid intersection C and 50’-W.5. Move the cursor to map (do not pick!) in the y direction (activate the Snap to nearestoption).

6. With the keyboard type 3 ‘-0 for the numeric location and press Enter.

Practice the use of Polar Tracking in order to hilly maximize your modelingspeed. Remember relative and absolute snaps can also help you to locate itemsor points in your model.

Copy girders I. Copy the girder that you created to the other columns on gridline C.2. Use the Copy special> mirror command to copy the girders from gridline C to gridline

Create Stubs

‘I,

VCl

F.

IErtLA STRuCTURES 13.0 BASIC TRAiNING 3.33Basic Modeling 2

Cowitt @ 2007 T€ cowaiI

Take some time now to complete the connections on this model using whatever you deemappropriate. You will find many useful connections in the component catalog for connectingthe raflers, crane beams and eaves braces to the columns and there are several joist to beamset ups too. Don’t forget to add the column base plates too.

Perform a clash check on your model as you work and once again on the entire structure afteryou are complete.

a

Save the modelwith a new name

I. Click File> Save as...

2. In the field at the bottom of the dialog box and type BasicModelcombined.-firstnamelastnaine

3. Press the OK button. The model has now been saved with the new name.

3.6 Combine Models I and 2Next we will combine BasicModell and BasicModelCombined by copying the objects inphase I from BasicModel 1. To copy the objects from another model we will use thecommand; Copy from model. This command copies objects from specified phase(s) fromanother model.

To be able to manage the objects from the two models after we have combined them we willfirst transfer the model 2 parts to a different phase.

Help: Modeling> Settings and tools > Settings > Phases

Change the phase of BasicModel2 members in preparationCheck objects byphases

I. Click Properties > Phase number... to open the Phase manager dialog box. Bydefault only Phase I appears in the dialog box.

2. Select Phase I.

3.34 TEKLA STRUCTURES 13.0 BASIC TRMNINGBasic Modeling 2

LbU

Copyright® 2007 Tekla Corporation

3. Click Objects by phases.

flierNumber

C.. Number NamePhase 1

PhasePlant iF

Set current

Add

Delete

Select

OK

Phase manager

FilterNirkec

C Number Name.

1 Modell

Objects by phase

Objects

Remove padfootings

Copy from model

Copy from model

6. Also edit the name of the Phase Ito Model I.

7. Make sure ‘Model 2’ is highlighted

8. See that all of the parts are still highlighted in the Model 2 phase.

9. Click Modify phase.

10. Now all of the parts in the model have changed to Phase number 2.

In BasicModel 1 the column footings on gridline B were dimensioned both for steel columnson gridline B and concrete columns on gridline C. Afier combining the models the footingson gridline C will no longer be needed and you can delete them.

11. Delete the pad footings on gridline C.

Since we did not edit the phases in BasicModell they all belong to phase number 1.

1. Click Edit> Copy special> From model...

2. Select BasioModell as the model to copy from in the Model directories list.

EKLAS’RL’CTuqES 90 BASIC AINrNSBsie Modeling 2

Name flnter IComment

Add a new phase- ModeI2

All the parts in the model become highlighted, indicating that they belong to Phase I.

4. Click on the Add button to add a new phase.

5. Edit the name of the new phase to Model 2.

Nai

Comr

Cocvrigrt @ 2c0? Telda Oa.at’ 3.35

3. Enter I as the phase number from which to copy the objects.

4. Click Copy.

Only click the copy button once Subsequent clicking will re-import BasicModel I on top of itself and in a real contract you may possibly create apotentially serious mat&al over purchasing problem.

&

1

The model 1 parts are now in the combined model.


Copy I roai model

Filter C:\TeklaSlructuresModels\T raining\Steel

Directories

C:\TeklaStructuresModels\Training\SteelS.C:\TeklaStructuresModels\Training\Steeft.

Filter 1Model directories

Easc Model]

__________

Basic Model 2-Basic Model 2-ConcreteBasicModelcombinedBasicModelconbined

IPhase numbeis 1

Selection C:\TekieStructuresModels\Training\Steel\Basic Model 1

I fP Cancel 1

Cpyrigbl 2007 Tekla Corporat’or

A With the Copy special> From model command you are not able to importdrawings with the model.

Check that all part properties are consistent

Use Select Filters

The Model t parts were created without paying attention to part properties and they may notbe consistent with the Model 2 parts (color, name, numbering series, and material).This is important because it will simpli’ how our automatic drawing output can be handled.For instance: When we created Basic Model I, we didn’t really pay attention to the Namefield in the Part Properties dialog box. The pro-am uses this field to help produce betterdrawings. Items that are named as Columns for example will have drawings produced withmore column oriented dimensioning rules. Items named as JOIST can be easily omitted fromthe fabrication drawing production system as these will not be necessary.Part properties can also control how numbering prefixes can be handled. So to avoid columnsand beams all receiving the same prefix we must be disciplined about defining partproperties.

To check and modi& this we must leam the use of Select Filters.

I. Select the Beam Filter on toolbar

ear hire’

2. Now drag a box over the entire model

3. Everything that should be defined as a BEAM in the Name field of the part propertiesdialog box should now be highlighted.

4. Notice that only items that were named BEAM are highlighted. The sloping beams werenamed as RAFTER and the eaves braces were named as VERTICAL HSS BRACE

TEKLA STRucTlJEs 13.3 OASMO TRtItGBa5it Modelinu 2

copyngbt © 2t07 Tekia corrahc9 3-37

Using the predefined attributes that were set up by Tekia ensures that not onlywill the name field be consistent but the grades and numbering series fieldswill also be correct.

iiij standard

EAssembl9

il,iiiEet

Name: BEAM

: Protile: W24X82

I E Material: :4992

Finish

IE:cat 3

Select..

__________

Select..._1

• Horizontal bracing

• Vertical bracing

• Silos

• Concrete beams

• Concrete columns

• Slabs

• Pad Footings

• Joists


‘3

‘I,

VCheck other partsproperties

By following the procedure above check and change the properties for:

• Beams

v [aj standard

Stan .&earnl End rele-esesAtt:tites Positn Anys

Nsnbering series

Desia] DSorm,gLoad’ J Cmceite

w

B

PreF&: Start rjn’tjef:

User-cef&,ed td&tes

[ppty tviodJ[ fiet ][ ,‘rj[ Cancel

Now complete the remainder in a similar manner

• Columns

C

Copynght @ 2007 Tekta Corporation

3.7 Define Your Own Select FiltersTo make the selecting of parts easier in the future we will now define select filters for eachpart type. We will use the names of the part as Filtering criteria.

For steel I concrete beams and columns we will use the materials as additional filteringcriteria to be able to filter them separately.

As we will be primarily involved in producing Steel drawings we may like to filter out all theconcrete items in our model. To do this we can create a select filter that excludes us fromselecting any item that has a concrete material grade assigned.

Typical default concrete grades in Tekla Structures are 3000, 4000, 5000, 6000 artd 7000.

Help: Modeling> Settings and tools> Filter> Select filter

Define select filter I. Click on the Display select filter dialog icon to open the Select filter dialog box.for all concreteitems 2. Select and delete each row In the dialog box except one.

OK N Ic&i3. Change the one remaining row to read as showTI below

standard ‘.j [ave as standard

objects with matchng properties can be selected

I Calegoe Raty Coràai Vakie ) Aa/OiE Pa,: Materid E..aIs 10) C

Delete at

JLJ rceti4. Then repeat by adding a new row for each grade.

copyright @2007 TeRra Corporation TEKLA STRUCTURES 130 BASIC TRAINING 3-39Basic Modeling 2

j Object group select (lIter

[i] [J standard v standard

Objects with matching properties can be selected

caiegi Pier’ Ccnmn I Md/Oi A:owQ Pa,n Kane Eo4s

Past ProNe Equals [DelelerowLi Pat MateidC DeterealC Part Phase EqualsC Part Lot Equals

Part Pret Equal:

I Object group select filter

5. Enter the name Concrete in the Save as field and click Save as.

6. You can now select the new filter on the drop-down list.

Cc,icsete

ChanneLlilterColunn_FilterConcrete h.

IDoubleTeeIPrama FilIr

7. Then drag a box over your entire model to select only the concrete members.

You can change the condition field to ‘Does not equal’ if you wanted to selecteeverything except the concrete grades but bear in mind that this may notalways mean ‘Steel Only’ In this model for example the silos are aluminum sowould then be highlighted as a ‘non-concrete’ item.

Object group seloct filter

Concrete

0ects i.,t rri&cJig propertiec c&, t,a selecled

v[saveaal Concrete

I Category Properly Condilion Value I And/C,‘ Part Material Equals 3000 Or.‘ Part Material Equals 4000 Orv Part Malerial Equals 5000 Or• Part Material Equals 6000 0,

Part Material Equals 7000 Or

flAdd row j

E5elete all

I____

1

e

‘4

Cl

A

3-40 IEKL.A STRUCTURES 130 BASIC TRAININGBasic Modelirrg 2

Copyrrght © 2007 Tekla Corporation

/— Drop down lists in each column provide more grouping options. For more

information see Help: What’s New> What’s New in Steel Detailing>Easier and faster modeling> General Modeling > New select and viewfilter

By using the Select from model.., option select filters can be defined for various itemsincluding:

• Slabs

• Horizontal bracing

• Vertical bracing

• Silos

• Rafters

• Joists.

Define select filterfor plates

/ — Create your own select filters to use both for modeling and for automating9 drawing creation with the help of wizards.

Recreate the Modell gridAlthough all the parts in Model I have been imported, the grid system will not combine. Thisis because the grid system is not tied to the phase. We will now re-load the saved settings forthe first grid.

Refresh the model 1. Save and re-open the model in order to force the model to load the new attributes thathave been added from BasicModell

Add new grid 2. Open the grid properties dialog box from the Points — Grid menuproperties3. Select and Load the BASIC_MODELI properties

Ccpcip © 20C7 Telda Cocp,ra3ow TEIÜ.A 5TRUCThRES 13.0 BASIC TRAiNiNG 3-41Bacic Modeling 2

Create Grid Views

Cooc’Jjr:aes[ax

lay

Labels

4. Click Create

5. Recreate the arid views for Phase 1 by using the Create View — Grid Views learnedpreviously.

5. Add PHASE 1 before the View names in order to differentiate between these views andthe existing views.

Save the model 7. Finally save the model.


9.

BASIC_MODEL]

vI[ieasI BASIC MODEL1r

lax

Line extensionsLe1UBelos

W 81 3’S’

0” 43-2”

Ofl27’9/224LO’ 44’.fl”

1234597

O’12-7”1/224O’ 44’.Q”

PP/Above

9,-n”

E

[ax

lay

8,-C.,

8.-u,.

Origin

jaxo

RI Nt

[azo

i:r’0”

a,,Magretñn

[a Magnetic grid plane

[a Depth of magnetic plane

Other s&tings

[a [.defined attributes...

Create Modif9 J[ S&

______

Close

Creation of views along grid lines

V. Isaveasi slanderd

View name prefix

[J standard

View plane Number of views

) All

1? Al

)C Al

OK Create

ASE 1 PLAN AT EL.

PHASE 1 ELEVATION

PHASE 1 ELEVATION

View properties

Plan View

Elevation View

Elevalr, ‘JEw

v Show...]

V [how..i

.1Jbanc& ]

Copyright © 2007 Tekla Corps,atisn

3.8 Setting Up Job Specific InformationNow that we are almost ready to commence making drawings, now would be a good time toset up many preferences and job specific properties that you may want to show on the output.Note that you can set up this information at any time but the most logical time to do this isright at the start of the contract.

• Project properties

• Preferences

Tekla Structures contains a powerful tool to help productivity with regard to setting upinformation that may be repeated over several contracts. All this information can be enteredonce then stored in a “Firm or Project Folder” so that the next time you start a new model ona particular project or for a particular client, you already have the settings required.

“_ For more information on Firm and Project Folders, please consult the HelpFiles or the Tekia Extranet

Project propertiesProject properties are common to all drawings and can be used to fill in typical informationin the title blocks.

Setup project I. Open the Project properties dialog box by selecting Properties-> Project Propertiesproperties2. Note below that default information has been added in the dialog box to show you what

fields will apply when used on templates. Replace the defaults with project information.

Project nrxnber TRAINCB2

Name BASIC TRAINING

Builder <your name)

-

Object PRUJ:OBJECT

Address q,our address>

Designer PROJ:DESIGNER

Stat date

End date —

______________________

Into 1 INFO_i

___________

Into 2 INFO_2

____________

User-deFined attributes.

Descriplion (Shown in Open dialog box)

Basic Training Model 2

j( AppJ iceI

3. Press OK.

Cccght®237 Toca C&oo,ator TEICA STRUCTURES T3O GAS TRMd’G 3-43Basic Modeling 2

Project properties

Check preferencesBefore starting the modeling we will check that preferences are set up correctly.

Check that your preferences are set up correctly before you start modeling. Ifyou change settings on the Preferences tab, Tekla Snctures only applies thenew settings to connections you subsequenily create. Connections you createdprior to changing the preferences are not affected.

c:ampnenta

eneralLoad x.odelin;Mcuae settings

flwtherirLgOrientation marksUnits and decimals

Folded pi&e: BR.

B ohs

Factor oF bolt edge distance: 1.2

Compare edge distance to: Bolt diameter

Bolt standard: A325N

Bolt si:e: 3/4

PartsPart material: A36

Pat stait rijrnbers

[Advanced...

3.44 TEKLA STRUCTURES 13.0 BASl TRAININGSasic Modeling 2

Welded to canary:

Welded to secondary

Loose pats:

AssemNy loose parts:

p\1

p\l

p\l

P\1

[uK j[ Apply ] Cancel

Help: System > t:sing Tekia Structures effectively > General> Preferences

Checkpreferences

4. Open Tools > Options...

5. For Components, check the values are as below, and click OK.

stderd

Clash check

V [Save asj stsidard

PIQUe names

Plate: PL

V

V

V

copyright © 2007 TekIa corpoabon

TEKLA

Interactive SteelDetailing


29 October 2007

Copyright © 2007 Tekia Corporation

4-N TEKLASTRUCTURES 110 BASIC IRAINJNG CopyTight® 2007 Tekla CorparaffonInteractive Steel Detailing

Contents

4 Interactive Steel Detailing .1

4.1 Create Gusset Plate with Stiffeners Interactively 1Explode gusset plate connection 2Reshape the gusset plate 3Add stiffeners 6

4.2 Create an Unusual or Unique Connection 9Create plate and fitting for the beam 9Create a plate for the column 14Adjust Contour Plate 17Create welds 18Create bolt group 20

4.3 Create a Custom Component 23Define the Custom Component 23Apply the Custom Component 27

C,tø2OC? TeaC.,oaGn :EI&AsRlDThRES 13.0 BASO TRA!41K3 4-lBInteractive Steel Detailing

¶1

94_jy TEKLA STRUCTURES 13.0 BASIC TRAINING COpyT1ght2OO7TOIda Cotwa&ji

Interactive Steel Detailing

,v,Y_p...tJ

Interactive Steel Detailing

In this lesson Tekia Stuctures system components cover a great variety of the components used in mostprojects. However, you may come across situations where its not possible to make thenecessary connections in your model using the system components.

In this chapter we will take advantage of the Tekla Structures tube gusset connection by usingit as a base for a customized connection. We will explode the system component, modify theungrouped objects and then add objects to the connection using a system component detail.We will also create a whole new connection (i.e. all connection objects: parts, welds, boltsand cuts) interactively from scratch without using any system components.

We vil) learn how to

Adapt a System Component to our specific needs

• Combine one System Component with another to create a complex connection

• Create a Custom Component interactively

• Apply the created component around the model

4.1 Create Gusset P’ate with StiffenersInteractively

In Tekla Sftuctures there is no gusset plate system component available in which you can getthe stiffeners included in the connection. You can, however, create the stiffeners separatelyby using a system component detail.

We will explode an existing tube gusset connection, modi’ the gusset plate shape and thencreate stiffeners in the connection using a system component detail.

Near the bottom end of the column at grid A-2 is a Tube Gusset (20) connection.

TEK..ASTRJCLRES 3C BASIc TRAI’I,NSIflttnctive &fiOI Detailing

4-1

4

Copyright © 2fX7 Teka CGWa&n

In the figure on the left we see the connemion before the stiffeners have been added. In thefigure on the right we see how the connection will look after the stiffeners have been added.

Create component 1. Select the component symbol,basic views

2. Right-click and select Create view> Component basic view.

3. Adjust size of window as needed.

Explode gusset plate connectionInside of the system connection we are not able to reshape the gusset plate the way it isshown in the figure above.

In situations where the connection parameters do not contain a particular option, we must editthe parts outside of the connection.

In order to modii3’ connection objects outside the connection, we need to explode theconnection to tmgroup the objects in the connection. Modifications when done outside of theconnection dialog box without first exploding the connection will result in the changes beingovertritten if the connection were to get updated.

Before exploding the connection you should take advantage of the connectionto get as close to the desired result as possible since editing connection macrosis faster and easier than editing objects outside the connection.

I. Select gusset plate’s connection symbol.

2. Right-click and select Explode component

All connection objects (even if they are set to not visible” in the view properties) willbecome visible. Now all of these objects have lost intelligence and association to theconnection dialog box.

p

‘I,

VExplode To explode the connection:connection

4-2 TEKLASTRIJCTuRES 13.0 BASIc TftAININGInteractive Steel Detailing

copyright © 2007 Tekla corporation

Reshape the gusset plate

After exploding the connection, the objects that were in the connection are nolonger connection objects.

They will be presented in the model as objects (main parts) both in wire frameand in shaded wire frame. You can only select the objects by using the selectobjects select switch.

U & standad

We will now reshape the gusset plate as shown in the figure below by editing the polygonplate using the Edit polygon shape command.

TEKLA STRUCTURES 13.0 BASIC ‘RAINCIntecactivv Steel DetailiM

A

CopflhtC 2007 TaMe Caporaten 4-3

The system component added the gusset plate using the ‘Contour Plate’command that we have not actually learned yet. The contour plate featuresspecial editable corners that can be adjusted easily, This exercise highlightshow to edit a component that has been added by the system. This is thequickest way to work when 3D modeling. Add the system component closestto your needs, then edit it as necessary.

F-

-‘I,v&

r

r

I

Create a We will first create a temporary construction line to help to locate the bottom right corner ofconstruction line the gusset plate.

We want to work in plane view, not 3d, while making cuts.

1. F-lit Ctrl + P to place view into plane view mode.

2. Ctrl + 2 to lighten up the pieces.

3. Click the Create construction line icon.

4. Pick the top right corner of the gusset plate as the starting point of the line.

44 TEKLA STRUCTURES 110 BASIC TRAININGInteractive Steel Delailina

Cop>.gM 2007 Telda Corraton

5. Type the R key to invoke the relative coordinate snap. then type O,O,-24 to define the endpoint of the construction line (-2’-O’ in the z direction from the last picked point).

Enter j numeric location

Location: @0.0:24

As you type, the Enter a numeric location dialog box is automatical]y displayed.

6. Press Enter and the construction line is created

Jnstead of recreating the polygon plate we will now reshape the existing plate by using theEdit> Polygon shape command

Help: Modeling> Detailing> Detailing commands> Edit> Polygon shape

1. Make sure the plate is highlighted. You will see 3 magenta boxes and one yellow.

2. Select Edit> Polygon shape and follow the instructions on the command line.

‘EKI.AS’RUCTUREs ‘It BASFC R4JN:NsInteractWe Ste Detling

H.7>

Edit polygonshape

v 0ut planes

copight © 2007 Telda Codporator 4.5

3. Pick the gusset p]ale corner (1), see the figure below.

Add stiffeners

4. Pick the intersection of the gusset plate edge and the construction line (2).

5. Snap to the perpendicular point on the gusset plate edge and pick point (3). (Make sureyou pick the plate edge and not the idline).

6. Pick the gusset plate top left corner (4).

7. Pick the bottom cornerright on the yellow box (5) as the corner to be removed. The plateis now reshaped.

We will now add stiffeners Eo our connection using the Multiple Stifferiers (1064) detail.When we open the detail’s dialog box we can see thich options are available to us forcreating the stiffeners. In this case we are interested in setting the stiffener spacing and theedge distance from the edge of the stiffener to the edge of the column. We can then measurethe column to get the parameters exactly as desired.

I. Take the following measurements in the model: Click the Create X measure icon, pickthe points and a place for the dintension as shown below:

2. Click the Create V measure icon, pick the points and a place for the dimension asC shown below:

4-6 TEKLA STRUCTURES 13.0 BASIC TR4ININCInteractive Steel Detailing

.1

I AThe construction line is no longer needed and you can delete it.

/— The same result may be accomplished by using the cut command.

r

I

Measuredimensions

n

Copy,ight @2007 Tekla Corporation

Create stiffenersusing macro

1. Open the component catalog (Ctrl+F) and find the Multiple stiffeners (1064) component.Double-click on the component icon.

064)

2. Edit the fields shown highlightedon each of the tab pages belowand click Apply (study theassiation with the dimensionstaken in the model and note thetolerances).

Picture Stilfeners Parameters GeneraljtAna!ysis

Ptrjre Stitencis Paacneie!s Generai Anysis

bLeft stiffenerRight stiffener 3/8

4. Pick the midpoint of the gusset plate, and the stifl’eners are created.

TERLA 5TRIJcThRE5 3 0 BASC iiNN0intrctive Seei Detiing

44

6

Miltiple Stiffeners (1

a li/is

h PosNo Material NameEF

-

I rj ETh

E

l iEFIr;:1 —L—J

______

V

LZ \_.....j• EI1/4 I

3. Pick the column.

cop1nrght @2007 Tekia coroorator

You can see the final result in the figures below.

We could now explode the stiffener detail but since we have not edited the connection objectsexcept for the detail we can also just leave it.

/— If you need to remove a pan from a system component but cannot find an

option in any of the drop down fields to do so. you can just enter a zerothickness for that parts ‘t’ value. This will effectively remove the item from thecomponent and the connection in the model.

Now notice that the connections at the top of the vertical bracing are fouling the underside ofthe beam flange. Use the knowledge learned here to modi’ the connection to resolve theclash with the beam.

4-8 TEKLA STRUCTuREs 13.0 BASIC TRAiNINGInteractive St.eI Detailing

(V

•-- -; y‘N i [1

Copynglil n 2007 Tekla Corporalion

4.2 Create an Unusual or Unique ConnectionSometimes you may need to create all the objects for a connection interactively. As anexample we will now create plates, a polygon cut, a fining, a bolt group and weldsinteractively in order to create the unusual ooking connection shown below.

Create plate and fitting for the beam

Create connectionbasic views anddelete theconnection

Create end platefor the beam

At grid intersection Al at level 44-0 (the top of the roof beams on Basic Model 1),

1. Select the existing end plate connection, right-click and select Create view>Component basic views.

2. Delete the existing connection.

We will now use the beam command to create the end plate for the beam.

TEKLA STRUCTURES 13.D BASIC TRAININGInteractive Steel Detailing

Copyright® 2007 Tejia Corporation 4-9

PIate

Start releases End releases Dasi9n DebnngAttributes Position Analysis Loading Conçosite

Numbering scres

Attri&tes

-

2Narne: PLATE

ProFile: PL1

E Material: 436 —

ri —-. 1j Finish:

Class:

E [ ser-deFined attributes...

4-10 TEKLASIRUCTURSS 130 BASIC TRAININGinteractive Steel Detailing

‘11/lea

1/4”

3. Start the beam command (double click beam icon) and Apply the properties for the aidplate shown in the dialog box below.

Isaveasi Plate

Prefix:

Pat p

EAssembi M

Start ntsnbe,:

1 1-J.

- I

-_ ct...]Select...

OK ApplyJ[ MAy Set j[ w/rJ[ Cancel

Copyiight @2007 Tekie coqratioe

It is possible to create plates by using either the beam or the contour platecommand.

In the Component front view:

4. Right click in the view, select Properties, and set view depths to O’ This will keepdistant items from showing in the view you are working in.

5. Hold down the CtrI key and pick the intersection of the beam lower flange and thecolumn flange (1) to set the “From” location coordinates.

6. Then use the cursor to snap (do not pick!) at the top rit corner of the column (2) to setthe correct direction.

‘I,

V

Load I standaid

ViewName:

Angle:

V Save an standard

[Component Front view)

Plane

OrthogonalProjection:

Fleprenentation

View type: Rendered

Color and transparency in all views: standard

Rotation aroundZ: -30.0000

3. Rotation arozidX: 23.0000

— M [Representation]

VisibilityVie’cdepth: Ejup: I a I

Down 0”

E Visibility of objeot types: r Display.

Visible object group: stardard V group..

JL Apply ilL M’ J[et j[i/rj[ Catel

TEKIA STRuCtURES 13.0 BASIC tRAiNiNGInteractive Steel Detailing

Cop,ight€ 20C7 TetiaCotporaor 4-11

7. Type 1/4 for the numeric location (the Enter a numeric location dialog box will openautomaticaily) and press Enter.

The cursor picks to the desired start position (which equals ¼” from point I in the directionof point 2).

8. To pick the end position. hold down the CtrI key and pick position (2). Then use thecursor to snap to position (I). Type 1/4 for the numeric location and press Enter (whichequals 1/4” from point 2 in the direction of point I).

The plate then appears.

4-12 TEKL.A STRUCTURES 13.0 BASIC TRAININGInteractive Steel Detailing

r2

N’il)J

Copgight © 2007 Tekla CrporaIIon

2. Select the left edge then the right edge of the plate. This will allow a gap for the co]umnplate across the flange toes

Fit the end of abeam

Ii

We will use the Fitting command to trim the end of the beam at the end plate.

The Fitting tool will trim the end of the beam on a plane perpendicular to the view plane,which is defined by picking two points on a line.

Help: Modeling> Detailing> Fine-tuning part shape> Fitting

I. Go to your Component Top view.

2. Click on the Create fitting icon.

3. Select the beam as the part to be fitted.

4. Pick the points on the end plate corners to set the cut line for the fitting.

TEIG.A STRUCTURES 13.0 BASIC TRAININGInteractive Steel DeiaiIing

j?

Move the plateinto position

Now move the plate into position by working in the Component Front View.

I. Highlight the plate, right click, select the Move command

Copy

Copy special

Move

Move special

Delete

CorghtC 2’301 Telda Corpo,etTl 4-13

Create a plate for the column

We will now use the Create contour pLate command to create a plate for the column. Wewi]l use the Component end view for ease of picking points to place the plate. We will thenmove the plate to the correct depth.

Help: Modeling >Parts > Steel parts commands> Contour plate

4-14 IEKLA STRUCTURES 13.0 BASIC TRAiN[NGInteractive Steel Detailing

“ 1’

-— C J

Tekia Structures displays the fitting in the model using a fining symbol.

r

r

UCopyright @ 2007 Tekla Corporation

BEAM

‘N24X62SEAI,I

Create columnplate

I. Start the Create contour plate command.

2. Apply the properties for the plate as shown below:

In the Component end view:

3. Move the cursor over the top left corner of the end plate and hold down the CTRL keybefore clicking.

4. After you have clicked the left top corner of the end plate, release the CTRL key

5. Then move the cursor to the outside of the column flange and using the perpendicularsnap click the first point of the plate.

TEKLA STRuCTURES 130 BASIC TRAININGInteractive Steel Detailing

‘N 1! XED CD LrI. 1

: Co”toui plain, IJroportio$ -

Airribules Ar*s,s Sparnng Loeóre Desir

NtanbeA,g sent,

Prelire Snarl numbes

Pa4 1

Ecies* M JZ 1

ØNaa, PtA’T

1PIe P1211

Z%iasesi& •35 .

or r-

- IEci. S

E [ fn,edetlb,Ae. j-

Po,nen-

-

ArdeolN Idle

° ILeiI Moay j Sen Ii wfr I’ Cancel

Copyright (0 2007 Tekla Corporation 4-15

6. Move the cursor to the opposite flange of the column and use the perpendicular snap todefine the next point of the plate.

7. Now move the mouse over the bottom right coma of the p]ate and hold down the CTRLkey before clicking.

8. After you have clicked the right bottom corner of the end plate, release the CTRL key

9. Then use the perpendicular snap to the edge of the flange to define the third point on the

A

plate

10. Finally use the perpendicular snap to the outside of the oppositeplate.

11. Click the middle mouse button to end point selection.

The plate is created in the view plane of the Component end view.

4-16 ICKLA STRuCTURES 13.0 BASIC TININGInteractive Steel Detailing

-

-

viflange to complete the

4’

CQpynght © 2007 Tekla CorpoFation

Move the plate 1. In the Component top view, select the column connection plate, right-click and selectMove

2. Move the plate in the x direction (and only x) so that it is next to the d plate.

Adjust Contour PlateWhile the column connection plate is now in the correct position, there i’t enough roomdown the column flange toes to place a weld. We wilt now adjust the plate by moving thecontour plate chamfer boxes in order to provide this.

Move Contour 1. Select the contour plate.Plate Chamfers

2. Select one of the boxes.

3. Setect Move special — Translate and move the chamfer ¼” in the Y axis only

TEKUSIRuCTURES 110 BASIC TRALN[NGInteractive Steel Detailing

CDpotihl @2007 Tea Crnporation 4-17

Create welds

4. The vertical edge will look sloped until the bottom chamfer is modified too.

5. Repeat the process for each chamfer (-1/4’ for other end 2 boxes).

r

Weld columnplate to the beam

Next we will weld the end plate to the beam and the column connoction plate to the column.This will also add the plates to the beam and column assemblies.

Help: Modeling> Detailing> Detailing commands> Weld

1. Double-click on the Create weld icon.

2. Edit the Weld properties dialog as shown below and click OK.

4-1 6 TEKL.A STRUCTURES 13.0 BASIC TRAINiNGInteractive Steel Detailing

4

Mirr

Wit, dTe rón

Oeate view

Rir1 tn nlap rkO

Copytighl ©2007 Tekia Corporation

Angle

a

2 Fsh

2LecQt

Pach:

COIWTIaS attituiesia flelosonce text:

nt taco

2 Ettectree iFxo&.

2E42s.*nd

2worksh/sie.

0 Connect part)assomEAs.:

a

V.

3. Select the beam as the part to weld to (the primary part for workshop welds).

4. Select the end plate as the part to be welded (the secondary part for workshop welds).

C It is very important to enter the welding order correctly. Tekla Structures usesthe welding order to determine the primary and secondary parts of theassembly. This affects the position of the parts in the drawings.

Inquire assembly You can check assemblies using the command Inquire Assembly.

I. Pick the beam (or any part of the assembly).

2. Right-click and select Inquire > Assembly.

The main part of the assembly will appear red and other parts will appear yellow.

To select the entire assembly: press the Alt key while clicking a part in theassembly.

:E Weld pt-opel ties

V

0.0000 0.0006

V

V

0”

23 AngIe:

23 Contour.

a

E LenIt

23 Pitch

vi

V

&

0

42

No

As secondary part V 23

V

jgr-deIiried attributes...

‘I,

V

TEKLA s-RuCT1JRES 13.0 EASbO TIING 4-19Interactive Steet Detailteg

Copytight @2007 Te*a Cortu

P

A If your weld was not automatically placed in the desired position, you canmanually affect the location by setting the desired position for the weld in theWeld properties dialog box.

Weld connection By using the applied weld properties, weld the connection plate to the column.plate to thecolumn

Create bolt groupNext we will create a bolt group to connect the beam to the column. We will use the bolts tobolt the beam’s end plate to the column’s connection plate.

Create bolts

For information on bolt group dimensions see:

Help: Modeling> Detailing > Bolts > Creating a boll group

I. Double-click on the Create bolts icon.

2. Define bolt group properties as shown in the picture below and select Apply.

4-20 TEKLA STRUCtURES 13.0 BASIC TININGInteractive Steel Detailing

flCopoiighto 2007 Tekla Coon

3. Pick the column connection plate as the part to bolt to.

4. Pick the end plate as the part to be bolted.

5. Click the middle mouse button to finish selecting parts.

6. Pick the end plate top point as the first point (this will be the bolt coup origin).

7. Pick the end plate bottom point as the second point (this will indicate the bolt roup’s xdirection).

TEKLA STRUcTURES 13.0 BAsic TRAININGInteractive Steel Detailing

Save Load standard

AttributesSd:

El Sot size

[Save as

El Eo ctandad

4

Position

EDnoJae

El Dolt type:

A32

V

Site

El Ro:aEn Sack V

ElAr depth kiddie V I

• Ottsel from

El connect part/assembly:

Thread in material:

Ech

El Erara ngth

—j

As secondary part

Yes

3 /4

Start point:

Dy -U’

Os El C

End point:

0’’

Zr.

0’

-J

V

Sot group

23 Shape:

El Dolt dist)<:

El Dolt dist Y

H cie

1.23 Tolerance:

Array

Partswithslotted holes:

DECDD

i1oIetto,

1/16

Listed

- 2 lotlcrd t,s,tc

Slotted hcIr

l:;r,rate. ‘ilot:

lndseii botassen& C C El El

0’’

6’’

________________

C

Parallel

El [Useidethed atar5des JL OK JL Mo&y IF Get J( cacd

coporight © 2007 TaMe corporatrers 4-21

C0I-)a)

P

0a)

Second Point —

The bolt group has now been created and the final connection looks like in the figures below.

4-22 TEKLA STRUCTURES 130 BASIC TRAININGInteractive Steel Detailing

P

b.

r 7,—’—-

.

.

.

0

0. ¶,- -A

Copyright@ 2007 Tek[e CcepDralion

Now that we have made this one connection we may have to use it in simi]ar scenariosaround the model. Obviously we want to avoid having to remake it each time so we can saveit as a custom component then apply it to other locations.

in this part of the exercise we wi]l:

. Define the Custom Component

Replace an existing connection with our newly created custom component

Notice that the connection we made currentiy does not have a green cone (The ComponentSymbol)

Define the Custom Component

Create the customcomponent

A Custom Component can be a Connection, a Detail. a Seam. or a Part. For thepurpose of Basic Training we will only deal with the Connection which isdefined as two or more members coming together. The advanced trainingcourse deals with the other types of custom components in much more detail.

1. (3o to the Detailing Menu and select Define Custom Component

TEKL.A STRUCTURES 13.0 BASIC 1ININGInteractive Steel DetaIlIng

4•23

4.3 Create a Custom Component

Open the 3D View in order to show the view similar to the image above.

V

Copyrigrit @2007 Tekia Corporation

Ty,/Notes Pos&nAthaneed

T,’pe: Coinection ‘

Nane: T Rate——

Descuption:

Toe Plate - Beam to Column

Component identifier:

[ENeJ9 Fry) Ca’c&

2. Complete the details as sho’ above. If the Name field is already in use, the Next buttonwill not highlight.

3. Click Next

COMPONENT OBJECTS

In the model, select objects thatwill loin the custom component.

[ <BaCk J ii

_________

4-24 TERLA STRUCTURES 13.0 BASIC TRAININGInteractive Steel Detailing

[ii Custom component wizard - 1/4 e

l Custom component wizard - 214T 0..

Copyright © 2007 TekIa Corporation

4. Hold dor the CTRL key and select each component that was added in turn.

• Beam End Plate

• The Cut between the Beam End and the Beam End Plate

• Column Toe Plate

• Weld from Beam End Plate to Beam

• Weld from Column Toe Plate to Column

• Bolts

Custom component wizard - 1/4 - M...

6. Now select the Column as it will be the main part olthe connection.

7. Click Next

TEKLA STRUCTURES 13.0 BASIC TRAININGInteractive Steel Detailing

5. Click Next

MAIN PART

In the model, chck to locate thernn pait 101 Wit C,necht

Copyhgnl @2001 Teat Corpøralion 4-25

8. Then select the Beam

9. The Finish Button will now highlight.Click Finish

10. The green Component Symbol willnow appear. We have now saved theparts of the connection in the Customsection of the Component Catalog andcan use it to create simi ar connectionselsewhere around the model.

f4

r(

Custorn component wizard- 4/4 - S... C

SECONDARY PTS

In the model. select secondaryparts in picking aide,.

<Back_jI

I CancelJ

€ Custom component wizard - 4f 4 - S...

SECONDARY PARTS

n the model, select secondaryparts in picking order.

Finish cancel_J

4-26 TEKLA STRUCTURES 130 BASIC TJNFNGInteractive Steel Detailing

Copyright t’ 2007 Tekla Corpoiation

Replace anexistingconnection

We can even make this custom component intelligent’ so that it will detectvariances in column or beam sizes, sloped or skewed scenarios and can add thefacility to vary all of the parameters concerned (bolt size, plate size andthickness, distance to the first hole, bolt gage, weld sizes etc) All paramelersare user definable. This is taught in the Advanced Training Course

TEKLASTRUCTIJRES 13.0 BASIC tININGInteractive Steel Detailing

‘I,

V

Apply the Custom ComponentI.

I

Now go to the connection at grid A2 on the 44-0” level.

Highlight the component symbol, then delete it.

‘I

3. Open the Component Catalog

4. Select Custom from the drop down list

catalog

,‘ ‘i •S\,l4J : •• abe

60

Custom

[searciilte j

Ba&cs. . —

Fav&tes\llMIii

SketchesSearch resultR,am L—, bam rr,r.,p,—tirv,c

Copyright® 2007 Tekla Corporebon 4-27

5. Find Toe Plate and highlight its icon by clicking once

6. You will now be asked to pick the main part then the secondary part. Thess willcorrespond exactly with what we just defined when we made the custom component.Main part column, secondary part = beam

7. Now you should have exactly the same connection as the one you created at grid Al

4-28 IEKLA STRUCTURES 13.0 BASIC TININGIiiterac*ive Steel Detailing

We can copy this connection around the model or apply this connection in thesame manner we would apply any system component but until we addparametric intelligence to the component it will only be correct for exactlysimilar scenarios. In this case it will only be correct where a W24X55 beamconnects to the flange toes ofa Wl6X50 column.

Adding intelligence to these custom component is covered on the extranet andduring our Advanced Training Class

1Tce Plae

A

Copyright © 2007 Tekla Corporaton

O>S 1EKLA

Numbering and Reports


9 November 2007


Contents


5.1 Numbering BasicsDefining numbers to be used for partsRunning the numberingHow marks are assigned in numbering 2Numbering settings 2

5.2 Numberthe Model 25.3 Check the Numbering and Create Reports 45.4 Numbering Settings 7

Initial Numbering 8Before Creating Drawings 9After Creaking Drawings 10

5.5 Change Numbering Series 11

Copyright 20137 Teida Corpoiatior TEXLA STRUCTURES 13.0 BASIC TRAINING 5-luNumbrling and Reports

5-iv TEKLASTRUCTURES 13.0 BASIC TINING COPynght@27 Te1Co(xra1IonNumbering and Reports

In this lesson

*2!!


This lesson introduces the principles of numbering the model in Tekla Structures.

You will learn:

• The options available for numbering your model

• How marks are assigned in numbering

• How to check part marks

• To use report templates.

5.1 Numbering Basics

Defining numbers to be used for partsNumbering series are used to divide part, assembly and cast unit numbers into woups.For example, you can allocate separate numbering series to different part types (BEAM,COLUMN, BRACING. etc.) or according to which floor the part is located in (l’s floor, 2nd

floor, etc.).

You can name the numbering series to which a part, an assembly. or a cast unit belongs usingthe part properties dialog box. The numbering series name consists of a prefix and a startingnumber.

Running the numbering

Part Position and Assembly Position numbers are material specificand apply only to steel by default. Concrete members have partprefix “Concrete, and the starting number is I and they have a CastUnit Position number instead of an Assembly Position number. Seemore in Help: Modeling > Parts> Numbering parts> Definingnumbers to be used for parts.

When you initiate the numbering process, Tekla Structures assigns marks to parts,assemblies and cast units.

TEKLA 5rRuCTURES 13.0 BASIC rdNLNGNumbering and Reporis

5-1

A

Copyright @ 2D07 Tekia Corporabon

The numbering function is run by selecting Tools> Numbering > Modified or Tools>Numbering> Full. The Full option will check all parts in the model even if they have notbeen modified. The Modified option only checks the new and modified parts and is muchfaster.

Help: Modeling > Settings and tools > Settings and tools reference>Tools>Nnmbering>Modified

Help: Modeling > Settings and tools > Settings and tools reference>Tools>N umbering>Full

How marks are assigned in numberingIn numbering, parts with the same Part prefix and Start number will be compared with eachother. All identical parts within such a group will be given the same number. The prefix andstart number together define what numbers the part will be given, e.g. if the prefix is PC andthe starting number is I (steel columns in our model), the numbering result will be PC, PCiPC3. etc.

Help: Modeling> Parts> Numbering parts > What nffec numbering

The Assembly Position is used when that particular part becomes the main part of theassembly.

For instance; a beam may be made up of a shaft of steel, angle clips at each end and perhapsa shear tab somewhere along its length. Each individual part will have its own Part Position.

Item Part Position Assembly PositionShaft of Steel w28Angle Clips a44 A12Shear Tab p9 P16

When we make the assembly drawing. the entire assembly gets marked as One Beam Mkd I82’ because the shaft of steel was defined as the ‘Main Part of the Assembly’ If the assemblydrawing came out marked as ‘One Plate Mkd P16’ yet it shows the entire assembly then wecan tell that the main part of the assembly has been defined incorrectly.

Numbering settingsNumbering is carried out according to the settings in the Numbering setup dialog box. Inthe Numbering setup dialog you can define how new or modified parts are handled innumbering. For example, you decide whether a profile name affects the part number, anddefine the degree of tolerance in comparing the parts in numbering.

Help: Modeling > Settings and tools> Numbering> Numbering settings

5.2 Number the ModelUntil now, we have not looked at the how any items in the model are numbered. Try tocreate a drawing at this stage, would display a warning stating that the numbering is not upto date. If trying to create a report, there would be no numbers assigred to the items in themodel for the report to display.

5-2 TEKLA STRUCTURES 13.0 BASIC TINLNG CopyrightO 2007 Tekla CorporatrorNumbering and Report

fl Also check objects that have not been nthlied IFul ryjn*eiigJ

You would be prompted to click on perform numbering to number parts at that point.

We wilt use Inquire object to see the current state of the numbering of parts and then wewill number the model.

Inquire a part

?re

1. Select Inquire> Object... or click on the inquire icon.

2. Select any steel column.

The Inquire object dialog box opens. The Part position and Assembly position marks areshown as CO and wO. This indicates that the part and assembly have not been numbered yet.

Top level [ft—in] 44—0”Part positian

IAszebly position CO

Tekia Structures uses numbers to identify parts. assemblies and castunits when producing drawings and reports. You must make sure

• Tekla Structures numbers the model parts before you createdrawings or reports.

Belore this operation.the position numbers oF modiFied objects need to be updated.To update them, click PerForm numbering.

L Settingr. [Perrosm ntznberin9jI CariceJ

t Inquire object F]I°i1Id: 1316 Type: 2 Assem* phase: 1 Part phase:

part

St-st point 1317) [ft—in] a 115—0” y =

0”End point i3ia [ft—in] x 113—0’ =

0” z = 44—0’tenser sf gravity [ft—in1 a 112—i” y =

0’ z =

A

tin length [ft—in] 44-0”Gross length [ft—in] 44’—O’weigh.t Uhf) : 220l.lWeight:Met) Ubf] 21€.21Wei;htrosa) Uhf] 2231.13

[OKJ

Run fullnumbering

Select Tools > Numbering> Full from the pull-down menu.

Now all the parts, assemblies and cast units in our model have up-to-date position numbers.

TEKLA STRUCTURES 13.0 BASIC TRAININGNumbering and Reports

Copyright 0 2007 Tekla Corporatnn 5-3

5.3 Check the Numbering and Create ReportsWe will now check the marks assigned to parts. assemb]ies and cast units.

Inquire part I. Select Inquire >Object..

2. Select any column..

The Inquire object dialog box opens. Now the steel columns have Part position andAssembly position numbers and the concrete columns have cast unit numbers (the positionnumbers may differ in your model).

Inquire object

______________________________________

Id 1236 Type 2 Assembly phase: I Psi phase: 1

ertA

Start point (1237) ift—ini:,s 78’—8’)’ o 0’End point (1238) I St—on) S • 78—8 y — 0’ a • 44’D’Cnter of gravitv[ St—on] a— 78—E’y— 0t 22’O’

Top level I ft—on) 44—5’

I Part PositIon CiAnnhly no.i:ion CiNet 1ength ft—in) 44Groat length I ft—in) 140’((eight (Ib)5 - 2201-180f.aght]Wt) 105) 217621

Oleighc(Croos) [lbf] 2201.19

Vol,ia (in’) 7Th1 599642

Area in’) 2173847V

EbK I

The numbering is now up-to-date and we can create reports. We will next create an assembly-

part list of the whole model.

Help: Drawing> Printing> Printing reports > Producing reports on entire model

You can create reports already at an early stage of the project tocheck the model and gel pre-bill of material lists al quotation stage,cut lists, bolt lists, weld lists etc.

Create assemblypart list and castunit list

I. Click on the Create report icon to display the Report dialog box.

2. Select AssemblyJist_BOM report template from the list.

5-4 TEKL4 STRuCTuREs 13.0 BASiC TRAININGNumbering end Repoita

0

C(

‘I,

V

‘A Report

Hm,c,( Opkiaon

‘Oaf Sop Wee

Adv.a.d ecu NIe,

k,aeti:y_cer.ter_as_cravety halAtCflIV_Iacd_CO5€_i000

k.aOlyOa.&14_lin

Tee8-0—17 flt

A&.nOly_arPart_1djo.tntoa_Th_lit Tea

Ealtjd..litBe lrliaam,,a ‘a_By_li

CGapoaBeoCeóeeCpaee.aei.t

Name Ana-%..aLEr-k.t

stwllP

____

C,esefrne I___

copynght 0 2007 Teds corporation

3. On the Options tab, check the options as shown below.

(ii Report

4. Click Create from all to run a report of the entire model.

The report is now automatically displayed in a dialog. Mso the text file is eated in themodel folder.

nr

TEKLA STRUCTURES 13.0 BASIC TRAININGNumbering and Reports

5.5

E ii;iOptions

V Save asi standard

Repoii

ASSEMBLT LIST WITH SON)

XAY P6OJuCfllK DC.: O6IC4fZOOTJOB NUMBEr 25:15 ?i.e: 1O43:24

3n15 En. P≥ LBark Qty Pro!±le Length lLgtt NeLgnt flIIiSh

19 —8984 1969

I’936 8

BSM1014X90

ELMS321X44

B nil924X42

88134Z4Xl2

B 813!924X62

Sm9241<62

98 2

99 2

99 199 1

812 1910 1

811 8911 8

912 2

912 2

613 14913 14

814 23914 23

63 1363 13

846

1136 911018—4 5/8

39•1827 3664

432.

SEa7242(52

COLUMN

WISXSO

1874 3743k

[aK

is12)8 28017

44 . —c2101 266L5

Cupyright © 2007 TekIa Corporalor

5. Check the numbering range of the assemblies and parts.

6. Repeat the procedure above to create a cast unit list of the entire model.

We will create this report again, and give the report with a specific name in order to keep theinformañon on the stage of the project.

Naming a report 7. In the Report dialog box, edit report file name to read: Assembly_list_SOM_ABM,xsr

(Or you can type Assembly List - <today’s date> and change it next time you run the report)

8. Click Create from all.

9. The report is now displayed in a dialog box.

JO. Select Tools > Open model folder to check that the actual text file appears in the modelfolder.

Tekla Structures also stores a flaIl numbering history in the file: numbering.history.

The file contains the following model numbering details:

• User who carried out the numbering and the date

• Numbering Full / Modified

• Numbering settings used

a(\ ,)

6-6 TEKLA STRUCTURES 13.0 BASIC TRAININGNumbering and Reports

1’

To keep the report files you have created, give them a specificname. If you try to create a report with the existing name. Tekla

• Structures asks before it ovensTites the existing report

t

Message

Do you want to reace existing fe?

j Yes 1 I No

Re Dnr

Retort te,Iater

Advanced DiiiAs scab ly c ant as of GrantyAsseablynd_Code_iist

Asse.bly On Bold lintAs se.bly_Phase_i istAsceablv list

G [savna;J standard

TMes in repoilsr1:

T tIeZ

T$ie3

1’

V

-9

Ass.ab ly_or_P art_Id_list

• ASS ii_To_l ist

Bolt Iri list

molt_listChecked By listC os&ronent Co dccCoapon.nt_iist

Report tie

Nanf. .Assambly_list_BDMABM.xsr I[__Show

Create from all [ Create from selected

I_, J

Cancel

Copyright @2007 Tekla Corporation

• A ]ist of defined numbering series

• Information on the parts, assemblies and east units numbered

I. Select Tools> Display log file> Numbering history log...

This displays the numbering history in a dialog box.

For more information on the log file, see

Help: System> Files and folders > Log files> Numbering history log

When you select a list entry that contains the ID numbers of theparts or the assembly, Tekia Structures highlights them in themodel

5.4 Numbering SettingsFrom Version 13 onwards, Tekla has set up and provided a selection of common numberingsetups.

Initial Numbering

• Before Creating Drawings

• After Creating Drawings

Each of these has the numbering properties set up specifically for that part in a contract. Toview these, go to Setup -> Numbering

TEKLA STRuCTURES 13.0 BASIC TRdJNINGNumbering and Reports

5.7

Study thenumbering historylog

.t List

Part ad: 036 oeries:Concrete/l Csnorete/C —> Ccncrete/4ran ad: 061oares:Cencrete/1 Concrete/U—> Concrete/CPart it 069 rerias:Concrete/1 toncrete/U —stontretej4Part ad: 977 sertrs;Concrete/1 Concrete/U —> Concreta/4Part,d: 995 series-. Concrete/i Concrete/D > Concrete /4Part ad: 993 oeries:Conrreta/1 Concrete/C —> Concrete/4Part ±1: 100 1 series Concrete/i Concrete/C —> Concrete /4Part id 1009 aerieo:Concrete/1 Concrete/C—> Concrete/sPart ad: 101 Scarier Concrete/I. Concrete/U —> Concrete/IPart ad: 1026 seraes:Concrete/1 Concrete/U —> Concrete/IPart ad: 1034 satire. Concrete/i Concrete/C —soncretejlPart ad 1042 oeri*s;Concrete/1 oncrete/U —>cncrrtejlPart at 1050 saoiss;tcncrete/1 Ccncrete/C—> Concrete/SPart d: lCS8sa,aes: Concrete/I Concrete/C—> Concrete/SPert ad: 1067 senor: Concret/ Concrete/C —s Concrete/CPact id: loll stoics: Concret/1 Contret)0 -s Conroctel6Part ad: lop7serxo-./l v/C —re/ItPart Id: lab sroier:w/l v/O—>p/lOPart Id; 1110 srrieo;v/lw/05-o/lCPart ii; 113 0 saries;w/lw/O—>cr/lCPart Id; 115 0 series :v/lv/U—>w/10Part ad: 1176 serles:v/1 c/U —se/lbPart ad- 1196 oerias-u/le/C—s or/ICPart ad 1216 retOrt v/I v/C —r v/lUPart ad. 1236 seoie.-v/1 v/C —s v/jOPart id 1250 serIss;v/1 cc/C —re/joPart ad 1270 aeries:v/1 v/U rv/i3Past Id: .ZSOrer-_es:v/1 v/U —r v/lIPart Id: 1310 seraro:v/l v/U—sos/luPart Id’ 1336 seraer:o/l v/C —sw/laPast Id: 1358 oerier:v/l v/C —I- v/liPert 16: 1-367 series-. v/I. i9/0 —> v/li

I ° I

________________________

V

Copyright® 2007 Tekla Corporation

Initial Numberinginitial Numbering is used Select 1_Initial Numbering and click Load rThis setting would be chosen right at the start of the modeling process and would allow theuser to quickly check that members that are supposed to be similar are getting the samenumber. It consistently allows numbers to change every time a numbering of the model isperformed in der :o fill any gaps that may appear due to items being deleted from themodel.

1niAlNumbe:ig V Save asJ i_lrbaLNuntering —

Nurnberthg FaNy numberiig

______________

Ccipsre

I ElRerunberal I ElHos

H Re.ne o rximbers Part nne

[ Check 1c staJad parts H Sea,, sabcn

El Column orientationNew: Conpare to old v

El Reinforcing barsModified: Compare to old V

El Embedded objects

H Synchronize with master model Isavenumberirig-savel El Surface treatment

ElAutomatic cloningTolerance:

Steel 1/32

Concrete 1/4

Reinforcing bar 1/4

Other 032

OK J [ Apply J L Cancelj

You can see that Renumber All is checked. This causes Tekla to ignore the current numberon an item and possibly give it a new number based loosely on the order it was added to themodel.

During the modeling process Tekia consistently keeps tack of what items aresimilar to what other items and numbers the model accordingly. Consequently,when items change, the numbers must revise so that no different items have thesame number and that the amount of different numbers is minimized byconsolidating similar items wherever possible into the same number.

Also during the modeling process, items that previously had a number assigned may havebeen deleted, leaving a gap in the numbering. There maybe a B!, a B2, a B3 then a B5 inyour model meaning the B4 was deleted at some point. Initiai numbering will automaticallyfill those gaps so that the first time you issue your drawings or reports there will be no gapsin the numbering system.

f5-8 TEXLA STRUCTURES 13.0 BASIC TRAINING CopyrihI © 2007 ToMe Corporation


:? Numbering setup

Before Creating DrawingsThis setting differs from Initial Numbering by forbidding Tekia to renumber everything inthe model. It thes to retain the current numbers on parts that already have numbers but itdoes try to fill any gaps in numbers by re-using deleted numbers that are no longer in use.

JJ 2fletoreCreating..Drawings (save as) 2_BeFore_Creating_Drawings

Nuisng Fa* numbeing

Options CcnpaeflRerxIrtJetal Hos

E fle•use old numbers] Pait name

[Qtik br standard parts fl Ream orientation

Corwase to o -

Column orientation

2 Aedosci’g bssModgied: Compare [odd V

- Ernbedd,dotçects

fl Synchronize with masler model (save-numberingsave) SurFace ticatment• Automahc cloning

Tolerance: —

• Steel 1/32 1Cccele 1 a

I-

-Renforcrngbar 1/4

Other 1/32

OK ApplyJ Cancel

A typical scenario for this setting would be when modeling and checking is complete and weare ready to start creating drawings. (The exception to this would be the Anchor Plan whichtypcally doesnt show column marks anyway)

Note that if this setting is used, the particular number that was assigned to oneparticular member which has since been deleted or changed to be similar to

_______

another member could now be assigned to a completely different member.

Coyiht@2OO1 Telda Corporatori TEKLA STRuCTURES 13.0 BASIC TRAINING 5-9Numbering and Reports

l Numbering setup (5

After Creating DrawingsThe third default setting is used when approval changes or revisions arrive after drawingshave been created.

The system is allowed to re-use old numbers in order to minimize the gaps in the numbers.This may be particularly impatant if you are using multi-sheets (Large sheets with a numberof items detailed on one sheet) where you would like to avoid havhtg blank spaces on yoursheets.

/— If you would like your numbers to remain constant through the approval

process. you may want to uncheck the Re-use old numbers setting. This wouldstop a particular mark that was assigned to something at the approval stagefrom changing to something completely different at the fabrication stage.

The keep number if possib]e setting allows unique members in the model to retain theirnumbers after a change, unless that change makes them similar to another member, in whichcase that unique member will assume the number of the already present, similar member.

For multiple members in the model, if they are all changed at once, they may retain theirnumber but if one is changed and a numbering is performed, it may take anew number, thenwhen the others are changed, they may become similar to the first member that was changedand will assume it’s (new) number.

5•jQ TEKLA5TRUC1uRES 110 BA5IC TRALNINGNumbering and Reports

r

V

Save as 3..Altec.CreatintDrawinas3A[ter Creating_Drawings

Numbering Family numbering

Oplions Compare

fl Renumber all Holes

1 Re-use old numbers I 2 Part name

Check tar standard parts D Seam orientation

2 Cokirrir orE,1aicnNew Cm,parelc±

t 2 RernForcñg bsNodhed Keep rNjmber posaNe

2Ernbedded*cts

fl Sschonie wh master n-od& (save-ntrrering-saveJ Suf ace treatmant

EAutornatt ckringToterance

Steel 1/32

Concrete 1/4

Reinforcing bar 1/4

Other 1/32

OK IF Apply ] [ Cancel

Copyright © 2007 Tekla co-rraton

Take New NumberA further option available in the New and Modified section allows Tekla to take a newnumber regardless

New: Takenewnurnoer V

Modified: jnew number

This maybe useful for revisions after fabrication and erection has commenced as it will notinterfere with any drawings or numbers that have been previously issued. This may makehandling revisions slightly easier.

Changing the numbering settings in the middle of the project can be• • dangerous. In a case where you absolutely need to change the

settings in the middle of the project, make sure you understand howthe changes will affect the part marks.

Always carry out a full numbering on the model after you havechanged the numbering settings.

5.5 Change Numbering SeriesBy defining a numbering series (numbering prefixes and start numbers) we can group parts,assemblies and cast units the way we want. This way we can allocate parts in a certain areaof a building to a particular numbering series.

We will now change the numbering series of the items in phase ito start with 1000 and theitems in phase 2 to start with 2000

I. Set Initial Numbering

vJ[save s) 1_InitiaLNumbering

2. Number the Model — Full Numbering

3. Define a Select Filter to highlight oniy Phase I objects

Phasel v

ObWcl, with mSth’ç peopouties tan be s4cled

ceQof Propey Con., V&e I AndAJr [_Md ‘°_IE Obtect Phase 1

ai

OK Apps I4. Switch on the select filter

copyright @200? Tekla corporalion TEKL4 SCTORES 13.0 BAsic TRA[NING 5-11Numbering and Reports

[I Object group - selecL filter F

Phasel

5. Now drag a box over the entire model

4

6. Open the Part Properties box (Properties > Steel Parts> Beam)

I .:el K! [54. 3

7. Uncheck all the modi’ switches and revise the numbering series.

5-12 TEKLA STRUCTURES 13.0 BASIC TRAININSNumbering and Reports

fib

FlEE! LE! standard [save asJ standard

Start ,eleases End releases - Design II DeIorrningAttributes Position J[ Analysis LoadingJ Composite

Numbering seriesPrefix:

V.

B

Stan number:

121 1000

121 10001

D Part

D Assembly

Attributes

D Name:

E ProUe:

fl Mater

fl FirAsh:

Q Class:

BEAM

‘nqlB’<40

A882

—ii

3

______I______ _____I

H [usei-defined attributes

UK Apply H Moday H Getil! P/F Ii cancel

Copiight © 2007 Tekla Corpsradon

If you fail to uncheck all the modify switches you will change every single• highlighted item to match the properties shown in the current dialog box. This

can be undone but if it isn’t caught in time it can have potentially catastrophicconsequences.

8. Click Modify

9. Repeat the process for the Phase 2 items

10. Perform Full Numbering

11. Check the Numbering Log (Tools> Display Log File> Numbering History Log)Assax.bly :d: SC2.7 seraes :3:20D0 !-2 —> 2,1004Asa€rtly s.d: 53 5eries: C:00 3:Q —, S. 2204Asser.bi; :d: 5261 renes:3.-2020 B’0 —> 3,2004.ESer.bIy .d: senes:3,2202 3-2 —> 3/20:4

sseb1y ‘d: 3902 series:S:2200 S.C —> 3:124Assetly id: Sr2 ser.es:C120/ 0.2 > 0,1020Assextly zd: 3033 sera.es:0 120:0 0/0 — 0:11-21Assexb1 zd: 2072 3321e5:C/1000 0/ 0—>0: 1112Assartl7 id: 3004 5erIes:C?l000 0/0 —> 0/1003Asserr.bly d: 792’series:O/lOOO 0/2 —> 0/1004zser1y *d: 9011 saries:0.- 1000 tiC —> 0/1004sse.t1y id: SOdS rros:C/10OO 0/0 —>0/10033.ssehly 3d: 5263 series:0/10_ 0/2 —> 0/1126

The numbering log should show that items have changed to assume 1000 series or 2000series numbers.

Be careflul to allow a good safety margin of available marks when using this• • type of phased numbering system. If you have more than 1000 different

members in phase I then the I001° member must take the number 2000. Thiswill overlap with the first member in phase 2 and cause confusion.

Copyright @2001 TekIa Corporation TEKLA STRUCTURES 13.0 BASIC TIN[NG 5-13Numbering and Reporis

5-14 TEKLA STRUCTURES 13.0 BASIC TRAINING CopyTht 2CC? Telda CorporationNumbering and Reports

eSe TEKLA

Principles of Drawings


29 October 2007

Copyright 0 2007 Tekla Corporation

Contents

6 Principles of Drawings .1

6.1 Integration tween Drawings and the ModelTekia Structures model 2Drawings 2Changes in the model members 2

6.2 Drawing Types 36.3 Drawing List 3

Opening and closing drawings 3Drawing list contents 5Drawing status flags 6

6,4 Drawing Levels 7Modify drawing properties 7Modify view properties 8Modify object properties 9Drawing Objects 10

Copyright © 2007 Tekla Corporaton TEKLA STRUCTURES 13,0 BASIC TRAINING 6-uiPrinciples of Drawings

P.

r

çb

6-lw TEKLA STRUCTURES 13.0 BASIC TINiNG Copyiigbt@2007 Tea CorporationPrinciples of Drawings

!FPrinciples of Drawings

In this lesson This chapter introduces the principles of working with drawings in Tekia Structures.We will first explain the integration between drawings and the model.

Then we will:

• Introduce the drawing types available in Tekla Suctures

• Introduce the drawing list

• Introduce the various levels of editing the drawings

• Study the drawing objects and layout

6.1 Integration between Drawings and the ModelTekla Structures stores all the important project information in one place, i.e. the model.Drawings and other printouts such as reports, nc data files etc. are output produced directlyfrom the model.

F

TEKLA STRUCTURES 13.0 BASIC TRAININGPrinciples of Drawings

cpy,ight @2007 Telda Cerporatron 6.1

Tekia Structures modelThe model contains all the important project information:

• Pans’ geometrical and structural information

• Part marking

• Pan properties

• Bolts

• Assembly information

• User defined attributes

All the modifications must be done directly in the model. The model is always modified inthe Tekia Structures Model Editor.

DrawingsThe drawings are current views of the members contained in the model with addeddefinitions for:

• the sheet size to be used

• the way titles and tables are placed on the sheets

• what is dimensioned and how

• which marks are displayed

• how the item is oriented on the sheet

You can create drawings at any stage of a project. (Some of the drawing commands are located in the Model Editor and some are in theDrawing Editor. You will find all the commands for creating and managing drawings in theModel Editor. To view and edit drawings, you will use the Drawing Editor.

Help: Drawing> hotroduetion to Drawings

Changes in the model membersChanges in the model members can result in the drawings no longer being up-to-date. Thefollowing are examples of changes that affect the drawings:

• A parts profile or geometry changes

• Parts have been added or deleted

• The number of identical parts has changed

Tekla Stsuctures indicates updates in the related drawings and the drawing list the next timeyou number the model. Numbering does not have to be up-to-date to create or open generalarrangement drawings.

6—2 TEKLA STRUCTURES 13.0 BASIC TRAINING CoRyr’ghI@ 2007 Tokia CorporationPoinciples of Drawings

6.2 Drawing TypesGeneral Arrangement (GA) drawings, also known as Erection plans or E-sheets. cancontain several views, which can include the whole mode) or any part of it. With the GAdrawings you can create erection, foundation and other plans. as well as details from views inthe model.

Single-part drawings are workshop drawings of individual steel parts. Drawings can beproduced for any steel part in the model. The single-part drawings can contain holes butwelded parts cannot be included. This drawing type is available in Steel Detailing modue.Assembly drawings are typically workshop drawings where details of an assemblyconsisting of steel parts are presented for fabrication. In most cases, an assembly consists ofsingle steel parts that are either bolted or welded to the main steel part. This drawing type isavailable in Steel Detailing module.

Cast unit drawings are formwork or reinforcement drawings of reinforced concretestructures such as foundations. This drawing type is available in the Precast ConcreteDetailing module.

Multi-drawings are workshop drawings which gather together several single-part orassembly drawings on one sheet. This drawing type is available in Steel Detailing module.

6.3 Drawing ListWe will briefly cover the Tekla Structures drawing list.

You can use the drawing list to:

Select and open your drawings for viewing and editing in the Drawing Editor

• Update, clone and delete drawings

• Update GA drawing marks

Display and fiber drawings shown in the list

• Choose drawings to select parts in the model, or show only the drawings of the selectedparts in the list (not available for GA drawings)

• Lock, freeze and issue drawings

• Add revisions to drawings

• Modify properties of several drawings at a time.

The drawing list also displays the creation and modification dates of the drawings, drawingsize and type, etc.

Opening and closing drawingsYou can only have one drawing open at a time. If you already have a drawing open andchanges have been made. Tekla Structures prompts you to save that drawing before openingthe next one.

Open drawing list To open the drawing list and a drawing in Tekla Structures:and a GA drawing

I. Select Drawing> List.., from the menu or click the Open drawing list icon on theStandard toolbar.

copyright © 207 Tekia Corporation TEKLA SIRUcTURES 13.0 BAsic TRAINING 6—3Principles of Drawings

2. In the drawing list select a previously created drawing. r3. Click Open. or double-click on the drawing to open it in the Drawing Editor.

See also Help: Drawing> Getting started with drawings > Opening drawings.

When selecting drawings in the drawing list, the activated buttons at the bottom of theDrawings dialog box are Open, Update, Clone, Delete and Cancel. The table belowdescribes their functionality.

I E n’ Lc J L Delele 4SD,,.ê’gs Icerd, 1 selected [ CarIDel

Button Description

Open Opens the selected drawing in the Drawing Editor. You can only select onedrawing from the list at a time. If the Open button is grayed, you have more thanone drawing selected.You can also double-click a drawing on the list to open it. See also Openingdrawings.

Update Updates frozen drawings. and recreates unfrozen drawings. Locked drawings arenot updated.

Clone... Clones the selected drawing for a similar part.

Delete Deletes selected drawings. You cannot delete locked drawings.

Cancel Closes the dialog box.

Close a drawing To close the drawing in the Drawing Editor:

I. Select File> Close drawing from the menu or click the “x” in the upper right corner ofthe drawing window.

Tekia Structures asks:

‘IckLa Structures drdwing

is,U Disthle atdorn&ic updatg (Freezel

L Yes No JLcncei J

2, Select Yes to keep the changes that you have made to the drawing, or close the drawingwithout saving by clicking No. Check the box to Freeze the drawing upon saving.

- Freezing

) When the model changes, Tekia Structures will update the parts and drawingobjects in frozen drawings, but will not overwrite any elements addedmanually, such as extra marks or dimensions.

See Help: Drawing> Ceding Started with Drawings > Working withdrawings

6-4 TEXLA STRucTuRES 130 BASIC TRAINING Copyright @2007 Tekla CerporaterPrinciples of Drawirlgs

Drawing list contentsAll of your existing drawings are shown in the drawing list. The example below shows aportion of the header line information that is available in the drawing list.

Issue Lock Freeze Uptodate Changes Created Mo&red P,evisbn Size Tpoe Mark Name !*lel03)29.. 03)29.. 36”24 S lI 3100 FOU...flflQ flflO 5’W’ [‘1 Cmi nOC

See also Help: Drawings> Getting started with drawings> Opening drawings>Drawing list.

You can sort the order of the drawings by clicking the desired header linebutton in the drawing list.

You can adjust the column widths of the drawing list and Tekla Structures willkeep the changes.

The table below explains the header line items of the drawing list.

Item Explanation

Flags ?‘ I

Flags are characters ( -

, X , ,, etc.) at the beginning of

each row. They, along with the Changes column, indicate the drawingstatus.

Dates The creation and modification dates of the drawing.

Revision The revision number or mark of the drawing.

Size Paper size, which is shown automatically.

Type The drawing types are identified by the following letters:W for single-part drawings.A for assembly drawings.C for cast-unit drawings.G for general arrangemeiit drawings.M for multi-drawings.

Mark The drawing mark is the number of the part from which the drawing wascreated. You cannot change drawing marks.

Name You can add a drawing title using the Name field in the drawingproperties dialog box.

Title 1, Title 2, Add extra drawing title fields to the drawing properties dialog box.Title 3

User-defined Include up to 20 user-defined attributes in drawing lists.attributes

Copyright a 2001 Tekla corporation TEKLA STRUcTURES 13.0 BASIC TRJNING 6-5Principles of Drawings

Drawing status flagsThe status of drawings is represented by flags, which are shown on the left hand side of thedrawing list.

For more information about drawing status flags, see Help: Drawing> Getting startedwith drawings > Opening drawings> Drawing status flags.—

Flag Changes Text Description

Parts modified The parts in the drawing have changed, e.g. parts have beenadded or deleted, or part properties have changed.

Quantity increased The actual drawing is up to date, but the number ofQuantity decreased identical parts has changed.

! Original parts deleted The part from which the drawing was originally created hasbeen deleted.

x All parts deleted All the parts related to the drawing have been deleted.

3, The drawing is locked.S

-* The drawing is frozen.

• Linked drawing A linked drawing has been moditied.changed

• Copied view changed A copied drawing has been modified.

Drawing updated A frozen drawing has been updated.Original parts deleted, A drawing flagged n has been updated, and there are stillothers exist other parts relevant to the drawing in the model.

e Cloned The drawing is a cloned drawing.

j The drawing has been issued. For example, you might reissue drawings that have been sent to site.

a Issued drawing The issued drawing has been edited or otherwise changed.changed

Lock (LZ) and Issue ( _l) flags can be manually added to the selected drawings. The —

flag appears automatically on issued GA drawings that have been modified.

— Lock GA and other drawings from being accidentally deleted or changed.

Use the buttons on the right hand side of the drawing list to change the status of a drawing.Alternatively, select the drawing in the list, right-click to open the pop-up menu and changethe drawing status.

6-6 TEKLA STRUCTURES 13M BASIC TRAINING Copyñybl t’ 2007 Tekla CorporationPrinciples of Drawin9s

Iesta Lock Fieeze Upto Ctaige; Oeake

__

—-1— Open CtrItO 03/28

Properties... Alt+EnterLeer-defined attributes,.. AIt+URevision.,, CtrI+R

‘Jçdste Ct,’+’Jae masRerea:ePrr: &ayis, SFEL+0

• ctrh-EDelete DelSelert all Ctrl+A

Create Drawings

Or,Lc,cl’Freeze OF

Issue a drawing Tekia Structures saves the issue date, which can then be used in reports and drawings. in themodel database when the issue drawing thnction is used. To issue a drawing:

Select the drawing in the drawing list.

Click the Issue - On button and the flag will appear.

Open the drawing to view the drawing title.

Check that the issue date is shown correctly in the drawing title.

6.4 Drawing LevelsYou can edit drawings in the Drawing Editor on three levels:

• Drawing properties

• View properties

• Object properties

For more information about the drawing properties and different drawing levels, see thefollowing help files:

Help: Drawing> Introduction to drawings> Three levels of editing drawings

Kelp: Drawing> Drawing properties

Modify drawing propertiesThe highest level at which you can change the drawing properties affects all of the objects inthe drawing. These properties can be accessed through the Drawing properties dialog box foreach drawing type.

Seject Properties> type drawing... on the menu bar or double-click on the drawing to openthe drawing properties dialog box. The General arrangement drawing properties dialogbox is shown below.

Copyright® 2007 Tekla Cerporaten TEKLA STRUCTURES 13.0 BASIC TRAf4ING 6-7Principles of Drawings

AModify view properties

Whenever possible, you should modify drawings by changing thedrawing properties. These modifications also remain when thedrawing is recreated due to a model change.

r

The second level is to edit the view level, where you modi’ the selected drawing’s view. Itis important to remember that changes at this level take precedence over the drawing levelsettings.

In the drawing interface, double-click on the border surrounding the drawing view to openthe View properties dialog box. The View properties dialog from an assembly drawingview is shown below,

8-8 TEKLASTRIJCTURES 13.0 BASIC TINFNGPrinciples of Drawh,gs

CopyTight 0 2007 Tekfa corporation

0’

[t Genera! arrangeruent ci nawing properties

Save [ Load J sLdsd

21 Name:

E:ee

Si

Save at

Viewr

21 r LayorA. _JOnensloer

21 I View

21 menslon. _JMarks

21 I Derail view,..

21 DimenrioT]

El [, Parr marl J2 Lsurface freolmenl mark J

2 [ Golf mark

2 Connection merk..

2 [Neighbs. pat mark.

21 I flerrilorcement markr..

El Pal

21 Craface rear mans

El fl&er*cs IOthecs

CDL

El \Vml&

2l[ Odd

El etap

21 I__flerrcenwj.

Ei’ ocn

El I user-defined arrribures J[ OK IL Ap

21 Firer EtoarifJw I

________I[wJ_r_}I

Cancel

Modify object propertiesThe third and lowest level is to edit at the object level, where you change individual objectsin the drawing.

Tndividual object settings can be accessed by double-clicking on the obiect. The propertiesdialog for an assembly drawing bolt mwk is tho be[ow.

Copyright @2007 TekIa Corporation TEKLA STRuCTURES 13.0 BASIC TRAININGPrinciples of Drawings

6-9

Save J Lead J standard

Attributes 1 Attributes 2 Label

ElScae: .7 12W

V Save asJ Column with_GO

2pe&ttad,4e4ir No V

ElSize: QFilbypails

Rseabon aor,d 0.0fr’ 30 .4evfll

Detrie as distances

00

Xre*, -51/128

Vein: 115/32

X man: 431183/128

Deothdorwi

Ywas 115/22

hlwka

yew erien’ t negitos pate. 4

Devdn i•’”2/32

2 Paitsnak

El Surtace treatment rearkj

0bects

El Lees maik.

El I Connection maj

El Neighborpaitmaek

El [Reinforcement mark

4 2 Ssutace tieatnera]

Eli H&eenee

Others

ELOcaEl

Eli Grid

El r Np&. _j

El Refrocceenet

Eli Fiyer... El LNeolibor part til2.

OK J4 _H Moy ][iE Iw/rJi Cscel

* toll m.d S tsr “tx-’ ties

ztarsdard

C,tee GenerM

2Avde n±Rse length c< Gage oF o4aiendnBolt dameser or Centes-lecenter dizHdediaeeter

Type: DJStandardShsrt naneFull nameAnew-ct. sçe redWinder ci be’s550 at550 #Ste hega rieq* 3/32Sick anal,Size Card. AidcoureersuracGase oF outstardwCenter-Incense. 5’

±±! 2.. 5-

___ ___ ___

ore

Drawing ObjectsIn Tekla Structures. the term drawing object refers to lines, rectangles, arcs, circles, polylines, polygons. clouds, symbols. text. DWG/DXF files, marks and dimensions.

Always work downwards in the drawing hierarchy. Get your drawing as closeas possible to what you want by first attempting this at the entire drawing level.Then modib’ anything else that needs adjusted at the view level and finally ifany further cleanup is necessary (and this should be minimal) you can do this atthe individual object level. Once you have edited something at one level,changing something else at the level above may negate the changes you havejust made.

1_ If you find you are adjusting many items at the individual view level, pleasecontact Tekla Technical Support. They will almost definitely be able to suggesta method to minimize any extensive drawing editing. Ideally, you shouldn’thave to edit your drawings at all!

r

6-10 TEKLA STRUCTURES 130 BASIC TRAINING Copytight© 2007 Tekla CorraIinnPrinciples of Drawings

TEKLA

Assembly and Single PartDrawings


9 November 2007


Contents

7 Assembly and Single Part Drawings I

7.1 Assembly and Single-part drawings 27.2 Create Drawings 2

Create Assembly Drawings of selected parts 2Create Single Part Drawings 4

7.3 Creating Drawings from Groups of Similar Members 67.4 Creating AD Drawings Automatically 9

Functionalfty of drawing wizards 97.5 Edit Drawings Manually 127.6 Alterations 16

Change the model 17Update the Drawings 18

Copyright © 2007 Tekla Corporation TEKLA STRUCTURES 13.0 BAStC TRAtNtNG 7-hiAseembty and Single Part Drawings

iv TLKLA STRUCTURES 13.0 BASIC TftAININS Copyrght@ 2007 Tekla CorporationAssembly and Single Part Drawings

C

Assembly and Single PartDrawings

In this lesson We will introduce the creation of assembly and single-part drawings in Tekia Structures.

We will first create single-part and assembly drawings by using predefined drawing settings.Then, we will use wizards to automate the process.

We will then edit the drawing properties. We will also demonstrate how updating effects thedrawings.

Revision control of all drawing types is presented in Principles of working with drawings.

We will learn how to

• Create assembly drawings individually

• Create drawings of groups with common attributes

• Create drawings automatically

• Handle drawings after thanges are made in the model.

TEKLA STRUCTURES 13.0 BASIC TlNINSAssembly and Single Part Drawings

Copyright @2007 Tekla Corporation 7-1

7.1 Assembly and Single-part drawingsSingle-part drawings are workshop drawings of each of the individual steel parts in themodel. Assembly drawings are workshop drawings, in which details of an assemblyconsisting of the steel parts are presented for fabrication.

All of the views in single-part or assembly drawings are current views of the members asthey are in the model.

When the model contains any identical members, the drawing is a view of one of thesemembers. The drawing, however, contains information about the quantity of all of theidentical members. If the “host’ member of the drawing is modified or deleted, it will get anew position mark at the next numbering. Tekla Structures will then automatically assign theoriginal drawing to another member with the original position mark.

Tekla Structures integrates the drawings and reports with the model. This means that, forexample, dimensions and marks in the drawings are always correct. Because the infonnatiin the drawings and reports comes directly from the model, you cannot delete any of the partsor bolts from the drawings. You can, however, iIlter out parts and bolts in the drawings, ormake them invisible.

You can create drawings and reports at any stage of the project. If you change the model,Tekla Structures updates the related drawings the next time you perform numbering.

For more information, see Help: Drawing> Introduction to drawings> Basics.

7.2 Create DrawingsOnce you have numbered the model, you can create assembly and single-part drawings fromthe model. We will begin by creating these drawings one by one, then we will createdrawings in coups and then we will use the Drawing Wizard

There are many different settings available within the program to control how the drawingscreated will look. For instance: You may want column drawings to be dimensioneddifferently from Beam drawings and brace drawings may be different again. You can createan unlimited number of these drawing creaüon “profiles’

Create Assembly Drawings of selected partsWe will now use the Column with BOM (Bill of Materials) settings to create an assemblydrawing of one of the columns.

I. Open the BasicModelCombined model.

2. Select the Column at Grid A3

p7—2 TEKI.A STRucTURES 13.0 BASIC TRAINING CopyTight © 2007 TakIa Corporation

Assembly and Single Pan Drawings

3. Go to the Properties Menu and Select Assembly Drawing

4. Select Column with BOM from the drop down list and click Load, This sets all theproperties to commonly used settings for column assembly drawings.

[ Assembly drawing properties

[ Save Load 1 Cokjnnyth,,BOM a_j

E Nate: CO LU FN

2 Title:

5. Click OK

6. Go to the Drawing Menu and Select “Assembly Drawing”

7. Open the Drawing List and then open the column drawing to view it.

‘6-J

TEKLA STRUCTURES 13,0 BASIC TRAININGAssembly and Single Part Drawings

7-3Copyright © 2007 Teds Corporation

-a

OSIE - CCLUISN - 02

e

I nL_DFVATERAI.lçF*-N. t b —

EL:---i 1ii..a

8. Select any other item in the model. A beam for example and run the drawing byfollowing the same process.

Create Single Part DrawingsWe can also break out the individual parts of these assemblies and create individual drawingsof these items.

I. Set up properties for plates by going to the Properties Menu then selecting Single PartDrawings

2. Select the Plate with BOM as shown below and click Load, then OK

Single-part drawing properties

r

Save IL Load ] PIate_wth_DOM

ENane:

E TJe

PLATE

Save a Plate_with_ROM

3. Make sure you have ‘Objects in Components” selected

4. Highlight the column base plate in the model.

7-4 TEKLA STRUCTURES 130 BASIC TRAININGAssembly and Single Part Drawings

Copyright @ 2007 Tekla Corrstion

5. Click the Drawing Menu then Single Part Drawing. When you open the drawing list,notice that the drawing type is now “W’ instead of “A’ denoting that this is a single partdrawing.

L3J

6. Double click on the item on the drawing list to open the drawing.

• E — —St.,—at

“I

Ed

FA6 NAME

7. Of course, it wouldn’t make any sense to select each individual item and mn eachdrawing one at a time. We can thither automate this process by selecting groups of

Copynght © 2007 TekEa corporaor TERLA STRUCTURES 13.0 BASIc TRAININGAssembly and Single Part Drawings

ha’. Lad r,..’. Upeds D.,, c—o4/S/O7OO2LI274fl5/2X7

Maad Pa,,,.,, £. 1w, ‘.‘ a’—t’2r a [DI) ,J,aLLsaacD1r1119r A P lLn ODAM[P1/2W C[‘9ir,r VS IPZ DtATE

I 8P2

7-5

items. For example. we set the Column Drawing properties then run all the columndrawings at once. Then switch to Beam Properties and run all the Beams drawings at thesame time.

7.3 Creating Drawings from Groups of SimilarMembers

Create all the I. Now we will use the selection filters to group similar items. This restricts selection ofbeam drawings items in the model by any property. For example, if we select the Beam Filter front the

drop down matu, only items that are named BEAM will be selected when we drag ourmouse over the entire model.

E eam_Fiter

2. Set the Properties > Assembly Drawing to Beam with BOM’

Single-part drawing proper-ties

flsaJI Load j Geam_wititSOM-

- V Ii Save as Beam_wh_60M

Nase BEN-I

Til:

- ___________

3. Uncheck all the selection switches except Parts and Objects in Components. This avoidsselecting any unnecessary objects when you drag your mouse over the entire model.

k .kE1U ifl *-

p

4. Now drag a box over the entire mode] and notice that only the beams will behighlighted.

(7-6 TEKLA STRUCTURES 13.0 BAC TRAINING CopyrigMD2007 TeIdaCorpora

Assembly and Single Part Drawings

5. Now run the assembly drawings.

i W Ufl@7 DE

LJ 3 [!1 L16. Notice that all beam drawings will now be created.

Create all thecolumn drawings

Now do the same for all the columns.

1. Set the Column with BOM properties

TEKLA STRUCTURES 13.0 SASEC TRI{NINGAssembly and Single Part Drawings

7.7

File Edit View Points Parts Loads Analysis Detailing

I ekla Structures - C:\1 eklaStrucLv nMocIels\V1 3.O\BasicModelCornbined

nrawing Properees Sebip Tools Inquire

Wizard..

Si’*-p& ThA

Qd-W

Assom* dmww’g

?,wrp.wr

1211.11,11

I——

— Ow — — — SIB tIll Il — iI -BVIV2C Ut no.10 A ea Lt,2z±_l OZ2141111)IC Ct)tAflt. Iflfl.1r., A rrrj --214fl110 O) ri fl•l? A

sA/2Aj1t2 Vsi/flAIr /fl 101,710—- A IBO lOAM rjiirj54/fl/22117 /fl lri2.1au- A 0.0 61PJ4SOAr/all /a05 W1ThUU A Ill/a aLMA2405)22107 i0,tO 10-14296.. A Bill IEAM 624/10/267 210101//MA 101OWU. A 101/ 11AM S24/20)21.7 20/01///al 01•U A 11.1/ BEAM 1,1.1.04/257221/a? 00/25/2105 10-14290/.. A 20.14? 6/AM IEEi r11104/500/7 0/05/010 0-4210/.. A 10.19 6/00454/26/20/7 5/00/05 in//lOU. A 0-?9 SEw.04/26/20/? n//10 In/SIt A 0 II SCAM04/26/2022 0//03/ In/2It A 6SI SCAM MI 06/0260027 510//n Iro.WU & jill B/AM

IclAIlt_ A •2SJ 01404A RI — FoA I

JE--.

Copyrht @2007 Tekla Corporation

Name:

ETIe E_E4-

2. Click Load then OK

3. Select the Column Filter in the model.

E:c]umnl her

4. Drag a box over the entire model

.:1i

5. Notice that only the columns are highlighted.

6. Run the assembly drawings for those

Proper Setup Took inqire

Qd-L

Ctcl+W I

I

r

7-8 TEKLA STRUCTURES 13.0 BASIC TRINJN$

9’

Save ilL Load j m_titBCM

CCLU.IN

- :.:.

_______

1

0

Fh Edt ye;: ‘ct,ts Parts Loads n&ysS Detafriq

Tekla Structures - 1:1 pklncIu cliii esMoitelsWl 3_DBasicMoulelCc,inIsinei1

Drathig

Jw U?’ Th:Thu

Ør c) Lli11v 44€tu/ard

‘I P-

Sec*pad &avS,Q-&Thç

Cwsl r7dvwtmer dr,i.rn

Assembly and Single Part DrawingsCopyright @2007 Tekla Corporation

‘1

-LFiEJLø F__Up4A —• Cb.A., C’.d H.a4 H.4,.A4 Ag. At A I

11019JYD’ W rATIO F 513. 1094W2V217 fl nn,O F 024; 0044 rrjei,o]i uwm ,fln1Iu 5 0034c4!Afl: s1a’ ‘rirIt. A t &1A421’?? A.?? ‘IA’o4?1s?JO? aJIWAOD) 71r21r w 101.11 RAIO [iICIDoulwaAi AIm inn”. A 10.11 WMA04151111? 00,11/1101 rn-Ar A £010 11L040404/1/157 I0/Th1/XIZ £127 A 7UJ WLOAA (ZiLD14/20,1117 5111/n ,n,rir. A C4 0.0901/101110 fl/t00O fl/fl, F ‘11 0101.30’CA10J O4t) n’?ltA11 9 0.1144 jj ‘Th04)00/AS? 011W/fl Ifl)TTO A 07] OIL/MN04/117217 fl irTI?? A 0)1

0 rAil tL)/4h1/207307 ll/0 1111191. A 10111 0110444 “ ‘04710/000 00,113000, If??’?) A [0130 COLUMN04/1011327 00/51/lOX 01/211. A 0)14) COLuMNIAI%/1[i)7 IS/n/loll R1’)9• A 11141 334/lI F RAW?

z

Users can repeat the process for other items such as braces, channels, angles etc.

7.4 Creating All Drawings AutomaticallyYou wilt notice that it takes some time to either select each item individually or in groupsand set up each item’s drawing properties and there is also the chance that you may misssomething important. For this reason, Tekla has included a wizard to do all this work for you.The wizard simply automates the process we have just covered in a step-by-step fashion. Itsets the Beam drawing properties and the Beam Select filter. Then it finds all the beams inthe model and runs the drawings. Then it sets the Column properties and the Column filter,finds all the columns in the model, and runs those drawings. The process is repeated againand again for braces, channels, rafters, purl ins, hips, and etc. If it doesn’t find a selling forsomething in the model it will still run the drawing with the ‘standard’ settings and will warnyou with a message in the title column of the drawing list.

For more information on drawing wizards, see:

Help: Drawing> Getting started with drawings > Creating drawings> Using drawingwizards

Help: Drawing> Getting started with drawings> Drawing reference > FiIt>Wizard...

Drawing wizards cannot be used to create GeneralArrangement (GA) drawings or cast unit (CU) drawings of

________

concrete structures.

I— Remember that drawings are never recreated by the program. if the

drawing already exists and there have been no changes in themodel. To tbrce recreation of drawings, users must delete theexisting drawing.

Functionality of drawing wizardsFor each member type in the model, drawing wizards automatically perform the followingsteps:

1. Define the drawing type to be created (single, assembly)

2. Select the predetined drawing properties to be used

3. With the given select filter, select the parts from which to create drawings4. Create drawings.

Copyright @2007 TokIa Corporation TEKI.A STRUCTURES 13.0 BASIC TRAINING 7-9Assembly and Single Part Drawings

When you apply a wizard, you can choose whether the wizard creates drawings from allparts of the model, or just from the selected parts.

By creating wizards that match the select filters and drawingproperties in the project you can automatically create all single andassembly drawings of the parts using suitable predefined properties.

Preconditions of using a drawing wizard:

• Numbering of the model must be up to date• The appropriate wizard file must exist• The saved drawing properties listed in the wizard file must

exist• The saved select filters listed in the wizard file must exist• Model members which will be selected by the select filter

must exist

For this part of the exercise we will use the wizard to create the remaining drawings in themodel that have not been created already.

1. Select Drawing> Wizard.., from the menu or click on the Wizard icon on the Standardtoolbar to open the Wizard dialog box.

2. Select Assembly Drawings with BOM on the Wizards tab.

___________________

et,

_____________

• rOORg5prN)

b

_____

-

______________

- Sv€- &S

/

V

A

@7

Wizard

Wads Adva,ced

hf [‘tti,nr th [0lour,

S,_Fart_DravAigs_with_B0M-A IUSWizadHKusW&ASUSWizard_Single_Pa,IsUSWizard_S ingle_Parle-All

Show Edit

[Cieate horn a4 2eale horn selected Cancel

3. Click the Create from MI bunon.

It may take a few moments to complete depending on how’ many drawings we createdalready.

4. Sort the drawing list by name and search for any items that have the title ‘NOASSOCJATED DRAWING SETTING USED BY WIZARD’

7-10 TEKLA STRUCTURES 13.0 BASIC TINlNGAssembly and Single Part Drawings

CcpyThl @2007 ToOls Corporation

5. Highlight these items in the list and click the ‘Select Parts’ button to show them in themodel. You can then analyze and recreate these drawings manually with the drawingsettings of your choice or the wizard can be modified so that these items are included inthe future.

6. You can also open a few drawings and inspect or check them.

You can view the next drawing on the list by clicking Next or usingthe shortcut Clii + Page Down

r

Using the procedure outlined above, you could create single-part drawings from any otherselected steel parts in the model (columns, braces, angles, etc.).

It is advisable to create all the single and assembly drawings withthe wizard.

Tekla Structures displays a Cancel dialog boK during the creationof drawings. Click OK in the dialog box to stop creating thedrawings.

TEKLASTRUCTURES 130 BASl TRAININGAssembly and Single Part Drawings

———U-- — I--

in A

____

I.,2, mnA IFII?)t A Iii

2 l2OL’ASnOy flUnAOX A II IEAII

A ILIOT IAAAnexo, nAn lA,r,r,lA’IL&AAtan A EI2 IAAI A

A •I CAl

I____A #41

LJ

1’ /

UIAA’A4 w33

‘I,çr

cop1ighI © 2007 TeNs Corporaliin 7-11

7.5 Edit Drawings ManuallyIt is easy to manually add, delete and edit drawing objects (i.e. dimensions, lines, text,symbols, graphics and marks) in Tekla Structures drawings.

A Most drawing objects (both automatically and manually created) areassociative and automatically update if the model changes. However, somemanually created drawing objects such as lines, polygons, and circles are notyet associative.

We will now edit one HSS BRACE drawing manually to include the same editing that wedefined for the vertical brace_V drawing properties (the bolt distance dimensions, therectangular part mark frame, and single part views).

r

Save J Load BraceHSS wE’ 8DM rsave as 8raceHSSjà8OM 1

3. Click the Layout button

4. Now select the Other’ tab and change the include Single parts’ option to Yes. SinglePart Details can assume the attributes of the current thawing or can be set with their ownattributes in order to improve how the drawing looks automatically. In this example wewill set the single part views to have the USPlate attributes.

Yes V

Yes

LSPWe V

7-12 IEKLA STRUCTURES 13.0 BASIC TFNINGAssembly and Single Part Drawings

Include SinglePart Views

(Entire DrawingLevel)

I. Open the first HSS BRACE drawing in the drawing list

2. Double-click in open space on the drawing to open the Drawing Properties dialog box.

Assembly drawing properties

2Name. HSSBRd,CE

Views

n Layout. El I View.

j.

El L__Section_view

Eli

r*. Assembly I,iycnit properties -

Third angie

Yes

Save Load

Dra*;ng size scaiel Il2J PIOlectiori type

El Align section views with main v,ew

El Align end views wE, main view:

El Ertpand shortened parts to lii:

El lró4e s!e.p&lv

El Sirpaet at’tijtes:

V

OK ii F Get I[wfrl[ c

copyright ts2TtI Tekia Corporation

5. Click Modify

6. Once the drawing refreshes it may look something like shown below. Notice that thesingle plates are detailed out separately like a more traditional hand drawn drawing.

*1-EEEEEEEhti

cC

F

2 - VERI1CAL 1-155 SPACES - D4

I ‘;-

TEKLA STRUCTURES 13.0 BASIC TIlJrNGAssembly and Single Part Drawings

Change the Sc.aeof the SectionViews

(View Level)

BILL OF MATERIAL- -

F ;.-.

I: - I -J ‘I

p19

0-

7. Select the Section A-A view border. Double Click it

0

S S

I p19

0

8. In the view properties dialog box, change the scale as shown below

AA

7-13copfpgbt © 2007 Tekia Corporatiri

Attributes 1 Attributes 2 Label

View

______________________

Sce

0 Reflected view: No v

2 Size Q Fit pasts

0 Dehne as distances

x run -231128

V ml”: -33/128

Depth down: 43/128

2 View extension for neighbor parts:

Marks

r

Fdler.

0 I Bod mask.. J 0 1 Neltc: past mask.

0 I_Conneden mark..._J 0 [ Rek,fo,cermnt masks...]

E L Boll... 1 2 Neighbo, past...

0 Weld,, j 2 [ Reinfo,cement..

El Grid,..

2 [bc pal hiteti

OK 4rk’ IL Mo&y ilL setj[W/rJ[ Carrel

9. Click Modify

10. Repeat for Section B-B

II. Click on the Create Y dimension icon

12. Pick the corners of the plate to be dimensioned

13. Move the cursor to where you want the dimension to appear and click the middle mousebutton.

Save Load stenda v ( Save racehSSy4b_B

Rotation a,ound(in 3D views]

•0.0

00

Xmas.r 23,128

N’ max: 33/128

Depth up: 43/128

0”

,L EL Pastna&.

O [5iaceeatn rnak...

Objects

EL_______4

_______

El_______Others

Part..

Surtace treatment.

Reference objects...

Add bolt distancedimensions

(Individual objectlevel)

E

Ccpyiight 2007 Tolda Cowora6,n7-14 TEKLA STRUCTURES 13.0 BASIC TRAININGAssembly and Single Part Drawings

A‘I,

V

‘ The associative symbols indicate which drawing objects are associatedto the model and will be updated if the model is changed

Click SHIFT+A in the keyboard to display/hide the associative symbols

To move a dimension: select it and drag it to the desired position

Change the frameof part marks

(Individual objectlevel)

Add the dimension to the other end in the same way.

I. Double-click one of the part marks to open the Part mark properties dialog box.2. On the General tab, change the Frame around mark to rectangular and tick only thischeck box.

3. Select all the part marks in the drawing.

(You can use the Select part mark select switch.)

ktaEIC’ Emn34. Click Modi,

TEKLA STRUCTURES 13.0 BASIC TRAININGAssembly and Single Part Drawings

7-15

•1

N

- - . - -

2

D 15

B-B

Copyright @2007 Tekla Caj,oiWo

Now all the part marks in the drawing have rectangular frames.

/ — Remember you can modifi all the settings in a drawing at the drawingproperties or view properties level.

5. Close the drawing, click the check box to Freeze the drawing and click Yes in theconfirmation dialog box.

When you close a drawing that has been changed, Tekla Structures promptsyou to save the drawing.

Whenever you have manually edited the drawing it is recommended to selectDisable automatic updating (Freeze). This way you ‘will systematically freezeedited drawings and only them.

A snowflake icon ‘‘ appears in the drawing list to show that this drawing is frozen.

Now, this one brace drawing has roughly the same editing as all the other brace drawings.The difference is that part of this brace drawing editing was done manually.

If we wanted the rest of the brace drawings to have the same editing, we could repeat themanual editing to them one by one. However, changing the drawing properties is a bettersolution because this method is more automatic and much quicker.

a In order to automate the creation of drawings as much as possible,• • you should try finding adequate predefined drawing properties to

create (he drawings with instead of editing them manually.

Whenever there is a need to edit the drawings, you should firstcheck if the result can be achieved by changing the drawingproperties.

As long as you can manage to create complete drawings by usingpredefined drawing properties the creation and updating off thedrawings will he more automatic.

7.6 AlterationsWe will now modi& our model by changing the size of the plate in all gusset plateconnections. Changes in the model will result in some of the drawings no longer being up-to-date. To be able to open the drawings, you will need to run numbering and update them.

We will study how updating affects the edited drawings.

Updating will:

• Switch the flag on a frozen drawing to This indicates that the drawing has beenupdated (also manual editing, such as exfta marks or dimensions).

07-16 TEKLA STRUCTURES 13.0 BASIC TRAINING


Do you want to keep he changes to he drawing?

Disable automalic updating lFieezel

Yes_iii No Cancel

A

Copyrighl © 2007 Teds Corration

Change the model

• Regenerate any drawings with an flag that are unfrozen. with the originally useddrawing properties. The updating deletes all the manual editing (added dimensions, textsetc.).

• Update the quantities on a drawing with an ! flag.

Change gussetplate bolt spacing

1. Select the connection where the braces cross the column in the model — Shown below

2. Double-click on the connection cone to open the connection properties for editing.3. Check that Ignore other types is selected in the connection dialog box.

Sa’ Load e,dad

Lore olhei types-

4. On the Picture tab page, edit the extra width of the knife plate as shown below.

TEKLA STRUCTURES 13.0 BASIc TRAINiNGAesembly and Single Part Drawings

copyTigli @2001 TeI<la Co,ra1ion 7-17

5. Click Modify.

Now the model has changed and some of the drawings are no longer up to date. To be able toopen the drawings you need to run numbering and update them.

It is not possible to open earlier revisions of the drawings. Due to theintegration between drawings and the model a drawing that is not up-to-datecannot be opened.

Run numbering I. Select Tools> Numbering> Modified.

Update the DrawingsOnce the numbering is carried out, the flags in the Drawing list show all those affecteddrawings that need to be updated.

Help: Drawing> Getting started with drawings> Drawing status flags

tsto,c 94,2S/27 o4//2637 1E/29Y... A 4 HSS BR4Psrrdcd 34,25)20]? r(txfl(E ir)2io A IDE HSS BRACE

/ — You can filter up-to-date drawings with Filter> Up to date button, To get non

Q up to date drawings listed press Display> Invert button after Filler> Up todate.

Update unedited The unedited brace drawings were created with only the predefined drawing attributes. Theybrace drawings will be complete right after updating, since they are simply recreated using their own I

attributes.

To update drawings:

I. Select all the HSS BRACE drawings from the list.

2. Click Update.

3. Open the unedited drawing to see that it is ok

Update edited We will next update the manually edited brace thawing.brace drawing

1. Select the edited HSS BRACE drawing from the list.

2. Click Update.

3. Open the drawing and notice that the dimensions that we added were automaticallyupdated because the associative symbols were located on the comers of the knife plate.

I7-18 TEKLA STRUCTUREs 13.0 BASIC TRAINING copyright © 2007 Tekla corporation


4. There will also be magenta clouds shown around all the changes that were made. Theseare for your information only will not print on the drawings. You can add cloudsmanually using the Draw cloud tool.

5. You can also remove all the magenta clouds by running the remove clouds macro fromthe Tools> Macros merni.

Remember to add a revision to drawings that have been updated or changedafter you have released drawings for the contract.

Another way to avoid repetitive editing is to use cloning for similar items. Thisallows user to copy the dimension and editing from one item onto a similaritem.

Further information on this is available in the help flies or on the TeklaExtranet

TEKLAS1RUCTURES 130 BAsrc T[NlNG 7-19Assembly and Single Pad Drawings

qt5 (N/S

= =-=

‘I,

V

Copyright © 2007 TakIa Corporntian

7-20 TERLA STRUCTURES 13.0 BASIC TRAINING CopyTigI2O7TedaCajioronAssembly and Single Past Drawings

“I

e*e TEKLA

General ArrangementDrawings


29 October 2007


Contents

8 General Arrangement Drawings .1

8.1 Creating General Arrangement Drawings 2Create an Anchor Bolt Plan 3Create General Arrangement Drawing S

8.2 Modifying GA Drawings 12Modify drawing properties 12Modify view properties 14Modify object properties 16

8,3 Drawing Objects 17Create Drawing Objects 17

Copyright@2001 Tekla Corporation TEKLA STRUCTURES 13,0 BASIC TRAINING 8—UiGeneral Anangement Drawings

rIf,

pU.:

8-iv TEKLASTRUCTURES 13.DBASICTR4NjNG CopyrIgI4ø2OO7TddaCaraIjcnGeneral Arrangement Drawings

i:wøir r

___

General ArrangementDrawings

In this lesson We will introduce the creation of general arrangement drawings in Tekla Structures.

We will first create an example drawing from the BasicModelCombined model (see thepicture below presenting the steel frame).

We will also introduce the various levels of editing the drawings and study the drawingobjects and layout

We will learn how to:

• Make 3D Views, Plans, Elevations and Sections

• Use Filters

• Add drawing objects

TEKLA STRUCTuRES 13.0 BASIC TRAININGGeneral Arrangement Drawings

8-1CopSitl 2007 Tdda Corporaan

r8.1 Creating General Arrangement Drawings

We will now innduce general arrangement (GA) drawings and create an example drawingof the BasicModelCombined model.

Tekla Structures can be used to create general arrangement (GA) drawings which are alsoknown as Erection plans or E-Sheets.

GA drawings can contain several views, which can include the whole model or any part of it.With the GA drawings you can create erection, foundation and other plans, as well as detailsfrom views in the model.

You can create general arrangement drawings from one or several named model view(s) withthe following options:

• Create one drawing for each selected view

• Add all selected views to one drawing

• Create an empty thawing

You can create an empty drawing and add named model views to the thawing in the DrawingEditor. The views must exist but they do not necessarily have to be open.

/ — You cannot modii the appearance. such as the viewing angle, ofmodel views in the Drawing Editor. Therefore, check and modi&the appearance of model views in the Model Editor before creatingGA drawings. For example, check that the plan views are really 2Dviews, and rotate the rendered 3D views the way you want them tobe shown in the drawing.

In the example below, we will create a general arrangement drawing fromBasicModelcombined by including several named model views in the drawing.

/ — You do not need to number the model, or update numbering tocreate or open general arrangement drawings.

I8—2 TEKLA STRUCTURES 130 BASIC TRAINING Copyright @2007 Tekla corporation

General Arrangement Drawings

Create an Anchor Bolt PlanThe anchor bolt plan would typically bbe created as soon as the bases were modelled in orderto speed the construction process along but as we are just starting to learn about creatingdrawings in Tekla Structures, we will handle this now.

To create an Anchor Plan:

I. Open the Pian View at the base level

Select and move views between the lists to control visibilityTo select multiple views. hold down ctrl -key while selecting

Named views: Vistle views:

EMVMIDtT CM PIZ CZL!WJIDtT DN 3flD DZL!tYAIIZN ON IDLZVATION ON C-RID

flT

You don’t need to have the view open in order to make the GeneralArrangement Drawing but it does let you check that the result will be close to

________

what you are expecting.

2. Go to Drawing> General Arrangement Drawing

TEKLASTRucTIJRES 130 BASIc TRAININGGeneral Arrangement Drawings

3d—1

PLAN AT EL 0”

In. it

tLAN AT

PLAN ATPL.N AT4

IOKJ

— [ Delete

Copyright © 2007 Tekla corporaton 8-3

3. Choose Anchor Plan wloetaüs and click Load

l General arrangement drawing properties

Save ] Load AnchorPlan_w-Details-. t IL Save as J AnchorPlarr_w-Details

FiNarne: A&I

___________

Title: ANCHUR BOLT PLAN

________

FYou can select the scale of the drawing before creation. - -—

Click an the View... button and load the desired scale. —

4. Click OK

5. Now check the Open Drawing box and click Create

z : 1 1 :

/ F -, -, j

/ -=.

8-4 TEKLASTRuCTIJRES 130 BASIC TRAININGGeneral Arrangerncnt Drawings

ri Create general arrangement drawing

ELIVAI Icti ow n:• 7—iELEVATION ON OID aELEVATION ON UD SELEVATION ON flED CELEVATION ON oai:ELEVATION ON flID EELEVATION ON fiT) F

3 Sf1? 1 ‘VtT7ON

Ax 1L 0,’—iLAN Al EL 12—7”i/2PLAN Al EL. 23—C’PLAN AT EL. 24’-T’LMT Al EL. 44-0’

0 ptioris

____________________

All selected views to one drawkg % jrorawrng procertieJ

Open drawin3

7 Create Cancel

Copyright® 2007 Tekla Corporalion

Your output may differ from what is shown above depending on how the view looked on themodel when you created the drawing. Remember you can alter the drawing outputautomatically by adjusting the scale or other parameters to get exactly what you want to see.

Create a Single View GA Drawing1. Open the Plan at 24U Level View

2. Go to the Drawing menuand select GeneralArrangement Drawing

3. Highlight the Plan at El.24 -0’

6 7

TEKIA STRuCTURES 13.0 BASIC TkINrNGGeneral Arrangement Drawings

8-5

1 2 3 4 5

E

D

g :4’

1 Create general arrangement drawingViews

EL!VAIIQN ZN 2A12 2EIZVAIIDU ON ID ZELEVAIION ON ID FPHASE t STAn ET5VAITDN

LAN AT EL 0’L?JI Al !L. o—i

PLAN Al 1 12—71/2rZLrN LL.—a.,.4-3-n.Jk.-_,

I Ia; ci :a. ii’ -- IPLAN Al EL 60-10”PLAN A EL. 65-8”PLAN Al EL. E€’-S”ThUS tLAN ON OOF BRACIU

Oions

____________

All sected views to or drawing H I Drawig pro IjU Open drawing

L Create J [__Cancel

Copyright © 2007 Tokra Corporation

c ni-

Cn

C- C

, z C,

ci

irn

U—

—

(—

I Ha>S

t-C

I

•aa

‘Ca a 0 C Ea0

I 0 a ‘C C,

a

½ 0

NN

NN

N0

,

Ln

g a-u

(P0

a’r

3a

m(p

(0a’

30

3-

ra

0

Dc

C

33

-(P

(p •a

-0

0a

Cco

•

3—

ar

za

oa

a, a aa-

aSt

aa

a o-l

1=

a•(

3 a

to

—ø

100.

(0

cap

,

0

Co

OD

0 3- a (0

n a Sm CD B CD 0 C) CD 0 -l

‘-3

02

a-a

3r—

.a

-a

II

3—

(0V

-o 0 a C, 0 :3

-vI’

,

z 0 r F’,

n a cm CD a I a

‘a -4 C-,

-g

U,

a -C C, r 0 a 0. -D 0;

3 0, 3

ii

1*il

NN

NN

NH I—

ilIl

III

Ia.

Z1I

‘II.

DII

zI

1I-I

I’9

StIl

iIS

-In

is-I

is-i

iis

-I3I

-oI

RIa

III

13131

zJL

JH

C,

N 1(0 Ia 1< a

7. Click OK then OK again at the General Arrangement Dialog Box

8. Check the Open Drawing Box and click Create

Open&ag

k cxeate

Create a Multiple View GA DrawingWe will now repeat almost exactly the same process in order to make more erection plansand details.

To create a GA drawing that contains selected views, e.g. 3d, GRID 3 and GRID A, fromBasicModelCombined:

I. Run numbering Tools> Numbering > Full to make sw-e your part marks are up to date.

TEKLASWUCTURES 13.0 BASIC TRAININGGeneral Arrangement DrawIngs

C

Copyright © 2007 Tokla Corporation 8-7

2. SeLect Drawing > General arrangement drawing... from the menu.

Define drawingproperties

‘I,

V separately.

name.

3. Select the 3d, GRID 4and GRID A views in

____________________________________

the Create generalarrangement drawingdiaiog box. Thenselect the option Allselected views to

_________________________________________

one drawing.

fl!VarIDNONtIDZLZVATID)T ON 2L1D CZLZVATIDN ON LID 0!LZVAJ lot ctt;atoEL!]A1ION Ct GaID F

Opliors

AU selected ews to or thawing v I[Dra operties...

Open drawing

Create [ Cancel

You can select multiple views (or toggle the selection) in the dialogbox above by holding down the Ctrl key and picking each view

GA drawing views are automatically labeled with the current view

With the One drawing per view option you can select all the planviews in the dialog box, and create separate drawings withpredefined drawing properties all at once.

To define the properties of the GA drawing:

Click the Drawing properties... button to open the General arrangement drawingproperties dialog box.

2. Select standard settings from the option mlu and click Load.

3. Give the drawing a distinctive name in the Name field, e.g. STEEL FRAMEELEVATIONS

Copyright® 2007 Tekla corprnatior8•8 TEKLA STRUCTURES 1300ASIC TRAININGGeneral Anangementi Drawings

Create general arrangement drawingViews

aELfl’ATICN ON ;aID IEIEVTIOt OH Zfl 2ELE’’ATTOtI ON ID 3flEVATION ON GRID 4!L!VATIOtTDNIO 3ELEVATION ON QIDELEVATION ON saio 7£LEl/ATION UN GRID A

Layout.. ,j

Dimension

Pa’t.

4. ClicIc the View... button to open the General -view properties dialog box.

5. On the Attributes tab, change the drawing scale to something suitable and click OK toapply the scale and close the dialog box.

TEKLA S1RUCI1JRES 13.0 BASIC TRAININGGeneral Arrangement Drawings

General arrangement drawing pFoperties

ISae J l_d standard

9 Name:

9TiUe: IsTEFME

V Save as standard

Views

Dimensions

1

oil View. ii E I Detail view

Marks

9 DnensiotJj

9 Part mark... j 09 Surface treatment mark,,, j 9

Dbects

Soil mark...

Connection mark.

0

0

9 Neighbor part mark.,,

0 [Jorcement marks...

Surtace treatnrt..

Others

erence obiectsj

0

9

eighr part.

R&docanert..

0 I Rot..

9[ We

Grid...

oil F1iet,.9 Pro4ecbcqi...

9 [ser-deIioedtribtes... IK

0 lNe4Ptt1...

i..i!I.irIy j Get J UirJ [ Cancel

CopflMC 2007 T&a Cerporaan 8-9

__ _ _

eSave Load Scei V [ Saveas it I

Attributes Shortening Label Anchor boll plan1

Scale: [i 1 20.OOQO

View extension for neighbor parts: 0”

EReflected view No v

Show openirshecess symbol No V

Datum poirl foi elevations: Specthed V

Datum level: 0’

OK [ Apply IIJr, i lW/rh Cancel 3

6. Now click the Filter button and go to the Parts tab and complete the dialog as shownbelow.

Save H Load v [ saveasi’

Dbjects (other than component obiectsl

Coruiect’n oects

Nutnbets Parts Ccwnporients Raci-j bats Usec attributes.

Filter by Not Filter string

Pact

lEName E NUTWASHEHANCH0RJ0ISTSLABU I IUClass LI

___________________________

LI Profile LI

____________________________________________I

LIMatesis LI

____ ____

LI Finish LI —

________________________

Secondaty / Mai’ pads Seccndaty

___________

OK jJ Apply ] I SeL] lw/ri Cancel

7. Click OK

8. In the General arrangement drawing properties dialog box save the selected drawingproperties with a unique file manse, e.g. steelframe, by typing the file name and thenclicking the Save as button.

8-10 IEKLA STRUCTURES 13.0 BASIC TRAINING CopyrigFct 2007 Tekla corporationGeneral Arrangement Drawings

General - view properties

General -filter properties

Save J Load__1 SteeL Frame

A Drawing property tiles steeltrame gd and steelframe.gd.more are created in the.ABasicModelCombinedattñbutes folder.

Name

Steel_Frame.gdSteeF_Frane.;d more

9. Click OK to apply the selected GA drawing settings and to close the Generalarrangement drawing properties dialog box.

For more information on drawing properties, see Help: Drawing> Drawing properties.Create and openthe GA drawing

To create and open the GA drawing:

I. Select the Open drawing checkbox in the Create general arrangement drawing dialogbox to have Tekia Structures automatically open the drawing.

Options

____________________

2, Click Create.

3. Check that the created GA drawing is as shown below.

TEKLA STRUCTURES 13.0 BASIC TRAININGGeneral Arrangement Drawings

1I General drrangement drawing properties

‘IHs J SteeL Frame

All selected vievs to one drawing v j[brawinc properties.

If?ippen drawing

LDee h..

__ __

LE

Copyright © 2007 Tokln Corporation 8-11

All of the views in the GA drawing will be created according to thesame GA drawing properties you applied. If some views need

_______

different properties, you have to modify the view propertiesafterwards in the Drawing Editor.

/ — You can first define the GA drawing properties by selectingProperties > General arrangement drawing... from the menu, andthen load and apply the desired properties. After that open theCreate general arrangement drawing dialog box to create the GAdrawing with the selected views.

8.2 Modifying GA DrawingsYou can edit drawings in the Drawing Editor on three levels:

• Drawing properties

• View properties

• Object properties

For more information about the drawing properties and different drawing levels, see thefollowing help files:

Help: Drawing> Entroduction to drawings> Three levels of editing drawings

Help: Drawing> Drawing properties

Modify drawing propertiesAt the highest level, you can change the drawing properties which affect all of the objects inthe drawing.

Modify parts To change the GA drawing properties, e.g. the color of parts, in the Drawing Editor:color on drawing -

level I. Open the drawing and press the ‘B’ key to toggle the drawing between all black lines andcolored lines

2. Select Properties> Drawing... on the menu or double-click on the drawing to open theGeneral arrangement drawing properties dialog box.

3. Click the Part., button to open the General - part properties dialog box.

4. Select the Appearance tab.

5. Change the Color of Visible lines, e.g., to green. Check and see that the checkbox ismarked with a tick.

08-12 TEKtA STRUCTURES 13.0 BASIC TRAINING Copyright © 2007 Teicia Corporaton

General Arrangement Drawings

IRcolc

6. Click Modify and OK.

Change gridvisibility of manyGA drawings

If you had made more than one drawing you can simu]taneously change the drawingproperties, e.g. grid visibility, of more than one GA drawing:

I. Open the drawing list in the Model Editor.

2. Select two GA drawings in the drawing list by holding down the CM key.

3. Right-click to open the pop-up menu.

4, Select Properties.., or press Alt+Enter as shortcut tn open the General arrangementdrawing properties dialog box.

Title 1 Title_QIIa.iwI

Open C’4O

Properbes... Alt’+€nter

5. Click the Odd... buttoc to open the General - grid properties dialog box.

Oed,

E I Pan.

‘ E I SurFace trealment.

E [ flelerence oble_?j

El BoiL

El Weld.

Srid II

E [ Neighbor parr

E Lf&nborcenlent.._.,,J

6. Click the On/Off button to clear the checkboxes.

7. Change the grid visibility to Not visible.

TEKI.A STRUCTURES 13.0 BASIC TJNINGGeneral Arrangement Drawings

8-13

Gr,oe,,aI - part properties >

Save Load J elandard

L_L1

Vise tnt,

Type.

Hidden line,. Center line

E Color

Reference h’ies

El Color

El Type

Savea, B . .1:!

•1

V

i

v,LZZZ

InK JLMfl 1ETr1L c 1

T9pe Mark Name———

0 [2] El

Ljser’defined atb’ibr,jtes... Alt+LIRevrsion.,.

Copyright © 20W Tekla Corporation

PCsIaed v Save as

NcRble v

Text pacing

• •,,,

• • • • -1)2

Grid line

Text

Hetcjhl. 3/16

Anal

[LJ[ j[JfrjrI[ c

8. Click Modify and OK

9. Click OK to close the General arrangement drawing properties dialog box.

10. Open the modified drawings one at a time to check that the changes were can’ied outcorrectly.

Whenever possible, you should modi’ drawings by changing thedrawing properties. These modifications also remain when thedrawing is recreated due to a model change.

Modify view propertiesThe second level is to edit the view level, where you modil3’ the selected drawing’s view.

Modify properties To hide the dashed hidden lines of parts in the 3D view of the G [I] drawing:of selected view

1. Double-cltck on the border around the 3D VIEW drawing view to open the Viewproperties dialog box.

Show hidden lines 2. Click the Part., button to open the View part properties dialog box.of parts

3. Select the Content tab.

4. Click the On/Off button to clear the checkhoxes.

5. Turn the Hidden lines option back on. Check that the checkbox is marked with a tick.

8-14 TEKLA STRUcTURES 13.0 BASIC TR[NING Copyright 02007 Tekla corporationGeneral Arrangement Drawings

Lii! General- grid properties (5i1

6. Click Modify and OK.

Change part markcontent

7. Click the Part mark.., button to open the View part mark properties dialog box.

Patmar ii El{ Boltmark

El I Sustace treatment E [onnection mark...

El L Neighbor pail mark..

El lorcemanl marks,

8. On the Content tab, remove the <<Assembly position>> and the frame around it fromthe Elements in mark list for the main pafls, and add Profile to the list.

NameClassFinishSireLengthCamberr, Ps,V5Face dieci a’Gsce ol nstatk’o CCere’<:-cfle &‘a,Test

9. Click Modify and OK

TEKLA STRUCTURES 13,0 BASIC TRAININGGeneral Arrangemerrt Drawings

8-15

, Vkw part properties

‘ENG,,conc

Content Appearance Fill

P& lwese Eel

- - ..9I Saveas

Elrltil°n .r,ee

El Sjgrto: &fset 251S4

El Inner contoups: orJoIl

Center me

V

floienhddenb,es.

22?LIE o&oft

Beam

Main part

Sec pal El

Relerence Hp,:Plate

ElC

ElEl

Polygon El Beam

Main part ElSec pa: El

AddthonM maiks

Li Orserpialion ,nsks:

Q Ca,necimg side mapics

Plate Polygon

LIE

CE

{OK ]I Apply ,j

El o-c/cit

El on/oil

Modify Jj Get][fjL11—’

Cancel

—

vSthIe elem.,t

Pal pmit’aProtileMaiwial

M’ car

ENrneiism resaik

((s’ls”e)>

•aKasdelenenls

Owe EI2E

Color:

V

V

3i32He9sr

Fat

User-detired atlribete

[s

Copyright © 2007 Tekla Corporatror

The 3D View will now Jock much cleaner.

Modify how Itemsare represented

To change how items are represented in a view, adjust the Part Representation Properties

1. Double-click on the Elevation on Grid A view border.

2. Select the Part... button

3. On the Content tab, change Part Representation to Outline hhjj

4. Click Apply then Modify

The result should lock like this.

Modify object properties

Modify frame andleader line of asingle part mark

The third and lowest level is to edit at the object level, where you change individual objectsin the drawing.

To change the properties of a single part mark:

1. In the GRID A view, double-click on the part mark of one of the I-JSS profile diagonalbraces to open the Part mark properties dialog box.

8-16 TEKLA STRUCTURES 13,0 BASIC TINrNGGeneral Arrangement Drawings


2. On the General tab, change the frame and leader line types as shon below.

EEl [] standard

Caiera 6r&

F,a,no around mark

- Tve

;DCoIoc — V

Loader line

Typt V

LI knn V

V standard

3. Click Modify and OK The part mark should now look like the following.

8.3 Drawing ObjectsIn Tekia Structures, the term drawing object refers to lines, rectangles, arcs, circles, polylines, polygons, clouds, symbols, text, DWG/DXF files, marks and dimejsions.

There are three ways to add dimensions to GA drawings: manually, semi-automatically, andautomatically (parts and gridlines).

In addition. you may want to include additional drawing objects for temporary and/orrevision-related information, e.g. clouds and text.

For more information, see Help: Drawing > Editing drawings.

Create Drawing Objects

Create manualdimensions

In the G [11 drawing, we will manually dimension the location of the diagonal bracingconnection and add a cloud and a note text to the connection.

To add manual Y-dimensions to the diagonal bracing connection (on gridline 3) in the GRIDA view:

I. Set the snap settings on the Drawings: Snap settings toolbar as shown below.

1 S.: Auto vj

2. To enable the tentative snap, which helps with the selecting of points, check that theXsnap is set on in the Setup menu.

IEKLA STRUCTURES 13.0 BASIC TRAININGGeneral Arrangement Drawings

N

Copight a 2007 Tekla Corporatror 8-17

E Xsnap

Smeri5eec S

Drac and drop

Middle button pen

D

Shift—M

U 3. Click the Create y dimension icon on the Drawings: Dimension toolbar.

4. Snap. first, to the mid point of the connection created between the four diagonal braces.and then to the intersection of GRID 3 and GRID 40. Move the corsor to the left side ofGRID 3 to select the location of the dimension line. End the command with the middlemouse button.

S. Snap again to the center point of the connection and then to the intersection of GRID 3and GRID 44-0. select the dimension line location and click the middle mouse button.

6. Select both dimensions (by holding down the CtrI key). right-click and select Combinedimension lines on the pop-up menu. The separate dimension lines are now combinedto one dimension line. Select the dimension line and move it to the correct location bydragging with the mouse.

Add / remove dimension pointcombine dimeniiion lines

Remove dimension point

Set dimension zero point

You should now have the vertical location of the diagonal brace connection shown in theGRID A view (see the figure below).

8-18 TERLA STRUCTURES 13.0 BASiC TRAININGGeneral Arrangement Orawings

C

Icop0igbt © 2007 reNa Cor1uation

Semi-automaticdimensions

A special dimensioning type is available in Tekla Structures for semi-automatic generalarrangement dimensioning. It contains several dimensioning oplions:

• Which points and parts Tekla Smoctures dimensions• How the dimensions are combined• Whether the reference line or center line of the part is used as a dimension pointThe primary steps are as follows:

Open a general arrangement drawing.

2. Click Setup> GA dimensioning....

3. Set the properties.

4. Click Apply.

5. Select the objects you want to dimension.

6. Create dimensions using the commands in the Create menu: Create> Dimension> PartsX, Parts Y, or Parts XY.

You can automatical]y add dimensions to grids or parts, or both, using the General —

dimensioning properties dialog box.

To open the General — dimensioning properties dialog box, navigate to Generalarrangement drawing... in the Properties menu and click the Dimensioning.., button.

TEKLASTRucTURrS 13.0 BASIC TRAININGGeneral Anangement Drawings

Automaticdimensions

Copyright 0) 200T TakIa Corporaton 8-19

t Ge.e.al dl alien. i,ujil W OIl)F ojwelie.

_______

Loan J ltaida.d J ,lata.d flØO.&ne £1

lr& sraL;nE

H L Layoul 13) View I H Detail view-

Dinem,onr

1 HI D.enn& IH I Dienanniieg.

The grid tab, allows you to turn on rn-id ]ine and/or overall dimensions as well as how theyare placed, i.e. left, right, above, below, and etc.

‘ General dine., oloning ‘lollerlirs

Lve J PCsierdaId LIGod PatIo

Orrenoet, cle&l

S Gad hr.. dir.,oo,r: Oil

0 On..aI d.a,r,rjon: Oil V

Di,rtroin 00000.nr

9 Na,zo.vai Left

lEvelcal Annie

The pans tab allows you to define the maximum leader line length, maximum number ofoutside dimensions and the object groups to be dimensioned. fl

I Load I _pc_,4a,d Ls’ as

Gad Parl’

M,.n,ait hadeeft,. lfldi

5 Ouloda dma,ooa, Or’

0 rode &r,,nse.,, ‘

Sled.de pails eel ‘nIcely ci

5M.aeanro.th.ieloul,ided.ne’,n’s

Ot,Cl &raran,c de.

__________

- Ur,ecJ ftelc*rç i4cazaaS yenta, n..eeni postal I__________Beat Ere tzedlo Celhbineioo,th

_________I__I

I OK J[ cer I[M.av Gd II Ea’,rei I

For a more in depth discussion, see Help: What’s New > What’s New in Steel Detailing>Faster drawing production > General arrangement drawings > AutomaticDimensioning of general arrangement drawings

Create a cloud To add a cloud and a note text to the GRID A view:

I. Click the Snap to any position icon on the Drawings: Snap settings toolbar,

4 4 Auto v

8-20 1’EKtA STRUCTURES 13.0 BASIC TRAINING Copyright 02007 Tekla CorporationGeneral Anangement Drawings

2. Click the Draw cloud icon on the Drawings: Drawing toolbar.

3. Pick points for the cloud position around the diagonal bracing cor.nection on gridline 3.End the selection with the middle mouse button.

Create a text notefor the cloud

I. Select Properties> Text... to open the Text properties dialog box.

2. Select the standard settings from the option menu and click Load.

3. Change the text properties and frame as shown below and click Apply and OK.

___j

it

TEKLA STRUCTURES 13.0 BASIC 1RtININGGeneral Arrangement Drawings

• standaid standard

Appeai&te

Text

ElTe* HOLD

Ecoloi:

EHe4t

i 121 Font:

E4rgl

El Alignmenl:

Fiame

El Type:

Leader bie:

3)32

Aria!

O•cxE

Lelt

23 it

- ‘I.

Arrow

Type:

ElEl( ECdm H

it

5/64

3)128

P!acng

EJ

[OK 1I LFLEM canceij

Copyright © 2007 Tekla Corporation 6-21

4. Click the Create text with leader line icon in the Drawings: Drawing toolbar.

__

5. First, pick an edge ofplace the text.

the cloud as the origin of the leader line and then another point to

r

The GRID A view should now look like the figure sho below:

V l24Af!

aV24X5

6. Select File> Close drawing and click Save in the Question dialog box.

- 0aJ t\c

-

- yJ

ueNO

-

/

8-22 TERLA STRUCTuRES 13.0 BASIC 1R’JNINGGeneral Anangement Drawings

p


‘S TEKLA

Multi-Drawings andMulti-Numbering


29 October 2007


Contents

9 Multi-Drawings and Multi-Numbering .1

9.1 Multi-Drawings and Multi-Numbering in General 2Multi-Drawing properties 4Options for creating multi-drawings 4Multi-numbering setup 5

9.2 Creating Multi-drawings 6Create Multi-Drawings Manually 6Create Multi-Drawings Automatically 11

9.3 Updating and Revisions 13Updating multi-drawings 13Revision control 14

Copyright @2007 Tekta Corporatimi TEKLASTRUCTURES 13.0 BASIC TRAINING 9-uiMulti.Drawings and Multi-Numbering

9-iv TERLA STRUCTURES 13.0 BASIC TINING Copyright@27 TeIdaC&pccahionMultiDrawings and MultiNumbering

Multi-Numbering

In this lesson Multi-Drawings are defined as drawings that contain a number of individual items collectedtogether onto one large sheet. Those items may all have something in common or may becompletely random.

Multi-Drawings emulate the more traditional output of the pencil and paper draftsman oflong ago when it was more practical to draw many items on one sheet. Nowadays, withcomputers being as fast as they are and printers and copier paper being as inexpensive asthey are it is actually quicker and easier to produce details on individual sheets rather thantake the extra step and collect these details onto large and cumbersome multi sheets.

Detailing time can be saved considerably if multi-sheets are no longer required.

Multi-Numbering refers to the system of applying marks to items in such a way that the itemcan be tracked to the multi-sheet it appears upon. Tekla offers countless multi-numberingcapabilities so there is sure to be one system that will suit your requirements

We will learn about the creation and use of muti-drawings and explain the principles ofmulti-numbering. We will also handle the updating of multi-drawings and revision control.

We will learn how to

• Create multi drawings manually, controlling which items go on which sheet

• Create multi drawings automatically by allowing the system to decide placement

• Customize numbering setups to create simple or complex multi-numbering

• Handle revision on multi-drawings

TEKLA STRUCTURES 13.0 BASIC TRAININGMulti-Drawings and Multi-Numbering

1 Ufr1Ti

Multi-Drawings and

Copyright © 2007 Tekla Corporalion 9-1

9.1 Multi-Drawings and Multi-Numbering in GeneralMulti-drawings are used to gather assembly and/or single part drawings onto a single sheet,be]ow are some examples:

• You want all the assemblies on same size drawing sheet. Some assemblies might need alarger (D or 24x36) sheet, but others might require less space (B or 17x1 I). When usingmulti-drawings you can link as many assemblies as will fit on one larger sheet.

• Assembly or single part drawings can also be linked to a multi-drawing with or withouta layout. If they are inked with a layout, each assembly can have its own separate Bill ofMaterial.

• You want all of the single part drawings of plates with the same thicloiess gathered ontoone sheet.

9-2 TEXLA STRUCTURES 13.0 BASIC TRAININGMulti-Drawings and Multi-Numbering

.rJ


• If you need to have the sheet number included as part of the assembly and/or part mark,you can use mu]ti-numbering. The only way to achieve this is to add the assemblyand/or single part drawings to a multi-drawing.

l

TEKLA STRUCTURES 13.0 BASIC TRAININGMulti-Drawings and Multi.Numbming

9-3

L F U Ciwied Mod(sd SLZ, le I.loik No.,.DonOa

O9FI9?2t 0]10O1 a3’42W A ]C]] COLUMN I A’ I EiirLJlt/I9/2a)5 U&1iOX ew42Iy A IC.?] COLUMN119/2B fl{]1LO[ S3/4’zu A IC.?] COLUMNo.i1StOJ COI0 F3Jr?V A IC ‘I COLUMN S.C,4__ICA/IS/ItS tUfl fl/Cfl A CE] COLLIflIC5113/2CCA fl/C?? A CS] OLLOYk I Sd.clr.tL/13,2C]I5 09,15/105 £1/2 C ioCSfl*ZDJS 09,19,205 ri? N 121 102

I or II

los,.

Copysight © 2007 Tokla Corporation

Multi-Drawing properties

Save__J [ Load standard v [vi] standard

lJName 101

Title:

Vews

Layout 1Others

El P Protection I El I Liser-delined attribules

Apply JflJpet JIF/r]I canceiJ

Name: can be used to define the content of the drawing. The name field will be shown on thedrawing list. For multi-numbering the Name: field will correspond as the multi-drawingnumber and depending on the multi-number setup it will be added to assembly and1or partmark e.g. Name: 101 - Assembly mark 10131. To get information on common drawingproperties see:

Help: Drawing> Drawing properties> Common drawing properties

Options for creating multi-drawingsYou can link or copy assembly/single part drawing views with or without layout to the multidrawing. The difference between link and copy is that with copy the connection to originaldrawing is broken, where as with link the connection to update information from the originalis kept.

1. You can create empty mu]ti-drawings and then link or copy assembly or single partdrawings interactively. This option is a little bit laborious but you can optimize the useof paper.

2. You can create multi-drawings automatically from selected assembly or single partdrawings. Just select all the assembly drawings you want to link to multi sheets in thedrawings list, and Tekla Structures will link as many assembblsingle part drawings toone sheet as will fit and then create another multi-drawing and continue the linkingprocedure. This is an easy way of creating gather sheets.

3. It is also possible with one command to create assembly or single part drawings and thenmulti-drawings from these drawings. This option isnt recommended because you cantuse specific settings for different types of drawings.

For more information, see:

Help: Drawing > Getting Started With Drawings > Drawing Reference> Multi-drawing.

9-4 TEKLA STRUCTURES 13.0 BASiC TRAINING copyright @2007 Tekla CorporationMuIti.Dmwings and Multi-Numbering

Multi-numbering setup

Setting up any type of multi-numbering involves making changes tothe batch files. The batch files contain most of the default settings

• in Tekia Structures and users can potentially cause considerableproblems by editing these files. Always make a copy of any batchfile before changing any setting.

Tekla recommends using the Tools — Advanced Options menufunction to change these settings so that the default settings remainconsistent.

Further information is available in the help files, on the extranetand by attending an advanced training course.

In a case where your fabricator wants multi-numbers for assemblies and/or parts thosedrawings need to be linked to multi-drawings. Multi-numbers are assigned according to thefollowing batch file settings.

The following lines in the batch file affect numbering:

rem set MS MODEL PREFIX INFLUENCES MULTI NUMBERING F0R=rem set XSUSEMULTINOThIBERNGFOR=rem set MS USE NUMERIC MULTI NUMBERS FCR=rem set MS USE MODEL PREFIX 11* MULTI NUERS FOR=rem set XS USE ASSEMBLY NUMBER 303=rem set XSSWITCF{MULTINtJMEERSFOR=rem set XS VALID CHARS OR ASSEMBLY MULTI NUMBERSrem set XS VALID CHARS FOR PART MULTI NUO4BERS=rem set XS MIN NUMBER OF ASSEMBLY MULTI CHARACTERS=rem set MS MEN NUMBER OF PART MULTI CHARACTERS-rem set XS ALLOW CR.AWNG TO MANY MULTI DRAWINGS-rem set XSSWITCEPOSJcUMBERSJOR=rem set XS PART MULTI NUMBER FORMAT STRING-rem set XSASSEYMULTTNUMBERPORY,ATSTRING—

Using these variables we can get following types of multi-numbers:

E.g. assemblies;

AlOl, P101, 0101,

LOLA, biB, 10W, -.

IO1BI, 10132, 10183, bid, 01C2,

1B1C1, 23101, 38101, 10101, 21101,

1O1BA, 10183, IO1EC, 101A, 101CR,

ABIO1, BB101, 15101, ACId, 5C101, OCIO1,

E.g. parts;

alOl, blOl, clOl,

lOla, bib, lOlc,

lOlal, 101a2, 101a3, lOlpl, lOlp2,

lelOl, 2e0, 3ab0,, idol, 2,101,

IOlaa, boleb, 101st, iCipa, bO:pb,

aalOl, ablOl, aclOl, palOl, pblO., ccl CI,_.

/ , If you work for many fabricators and you need to define differentnumbering setups for each one you can create multiple batch files.See the help files for further information.

Help: System > Files and Folders> Startup batch file

Copyiight @2007 Tekls Corporalion TEKLA STRUCTUREs 13.0 BASIC TRAINING 9-5MuIti.Drawingc and MisItI.NumbeHng

9.2

A Don’t change the numbering setup after linking assembly or singlepart drawings to multi-drawings. This v.111 cause the loss of alldrawings which have a multi-number assigned.

Creating Multi-drawingsAll the necessary editing should be done in the assembly or single part drawings. The multi-drawing isjust intended for use as a gathering sheet.

We will create multi-drawings using methods I and 2 described under Options for creatingmulti-drawings. We will use assembly and single part drawings created previously.

If you need multi-numbers you need to edit the batch file and restart Tekla Structures. Also ifyou want multi-numbers applied to secondary parts, you need to remember to include thesingle part views in the assembly drawings.

Create Multi-Drawings ManuallyI. Set multi-drawing properties (Properties > Multi-drawing..,).

2. Load Multi-Drawings setting from the top of the dialog.

3. Click OK.

4. Create an empty multi-drawing (Drawing > Multi-drawing > Multi-drawing).

IIir-ain Properlies Setup T3o tnque

j Ust.. Qii-L

ttj V’hzard... Ctil-’W

Sngle-pait drawing

l Assembly drawing

General arrangement drawing...

!: Cknedrawg... Selected dingoCtd—D

______

S4,rtd cnMrr wfth Iavro U

You shou]d be able to see that there is new drawing on the list M, [Jj, Title I.

—

__

9-6 TEKLASTRUCTuRES 13.0 BASIC TRAININGMulti-Drawings and Multi-Numbering

Create emptymulti drawing

rMuki-dm*i FkbâaMng 1I

0 p4.,...h 0 1iE 0 S..ch — o—.u.

j

C..Md W4d .Re On T6 Mu. Ha ø.45 J!J L!r_

O4//2 40u-- e91r15. A ‘I JJHND4’2W1 0O’t.- 1/1U A 2i CLtL% - Sded.d 40104.M

4//Z Sifl,t fl A WC4’2/Z 500& r4/2D A PZ1 LS

-

04/2W. IO I€1’D A ZaIh*4 lUPj6fl04/20/2.. 204422 . Ir,/29&. . A 0.61 01UMN04/26/2.. //0 - I/2l& A IOu COLUMN L444

m

I —

DEl Lfi- ._2!!i!J J(N,we .‘

Cop5right 0 2007 Tekla Corporation

/ — If you know you are going to be creating multi drawings for any

Q cotfiract riaht from the outset, you are advised to use one of the‘US Wizard’ settings to make the original drawings then linkingthese views with the layout onto the multi sheets. This ensures thatall similarly scaled items are maintained at a similar scale on themulti-sheet.

Link assemblydrawings to multi-drawings

1. Open the multi-drawing.

2. Highlight the first 4 beam assembly drawings.

3. Hold the cursor over the highlighted drawings right-click and select Link drawingviews.

Ore

P’-ope’tes...

.secened et,o..tes. -

Copy drawIng views

Ct —D

At—E,t€r

C,:

[ink draadlng views

Copy drawing viens with layoutLink drawing views with !eyout

AFi

In the multi-drawing, you will see the 4 draxngs being linked to the multi-drawing, one ontop of the other. If you are using multi-numbering you can see the assembly marks changingon the drawing list, according to your numbering setup e.g. 10131, 10132 etc. otherwise, thenumbers will remain the same.

TEKLR STRUCTuRES 13.0 BASIC TRAININGMulti.Drawings and MultINumbening

t ooiiiII%I.—

.—.

444, ——

C,ed.d H,&od Re,,,, So. Type M

I_0c!‘°‘_. 3w2 H I’

n4126/LocIsoIu.wJ/u0Iu.

w

m,t

LEJ Q 5—..——, ho co.oc4 — A_.o,

— Flu,

___________

I sb—it-

Hod,I

1/115 - A is-SI 06*4 Lef[!’!J By B.’, PT4I25/2 ,4,nns- A [B.SI 00*404120/2 161/215 A [0.?] 0EPJ4 Lock04/20/2 -. IWiIDTO A ]0 0] 66*1 FiTfl I_JLJ20)2012 W 120W A 3: 00*420)20)2 iro-ir A R.1 BENd F...C4,2$IZ ‘)25B’ A r.1: OLw4 I ,, FriC”26)2 O’lfl’O’. A EIZ 001’4 L................04)23.2 25’fl A B.OZ 01*404/26/2 I 01/21 2 - A [0.04] 00344e4ns/Z ri.r’ 4 2:5o 00kM04)24/2 ‘ri’-’Du A =6I 00A4/ -

04)20)2 01/210 r’ZI 00*’00/24/2 16/210 A 09 ocAW34/IWO 101/710’ A lB/Il BUMA

50 O,ooeoc 4/md. 4

Copyrighl © 2007 Tekla Corratioc 9-7

Ir —r

Place views onmulti-drawing

1. To arrange assemblies on the multi-drawing, right click and select Place views.

ER:

:!t_

2. To arrange the assemblies interactively:

• Select outer blue border around an assembly

• Left pick the border

• Drag the assembly to the desired location

Your multi-drawing may look something like the one shown below

9-8 TEKLA STRUCTUREs 13.0 BAsIC TRAININGMulu-Drawing, and Multi.Numbering

-

copyright 0)2007 TekIa Corpora%n

. 4!r

::!*z±z’tL_1

I—

—— in

Add moreassemblies tomulti-drawing

Remove the extraassemblies fromthe multi-drawing

:ni

It seems that we cant fit all the drawings on one sheet. The Bill of Material (top right handcorner) will be expanded and interfere with the beam view when drawing is re-opened. Weneed to remove some assemblies from the sheet. As long as the drawing has been open allthe time you can unlink the assemblies by using undo. If you have already closed and reopened the drawing you can still delete the assembly from the multi-drawing but there maybe implications if you have used multi-numbering. See below for thrther information on this.

I. Click the undo button until the automatic and interactive arranging has been undone.

TEKLA STRUCTURES 110 BASIC TRAINiNGMulti-Drawings and MultiNumbering

3. Highlight the next four assemblies or. the drawing list and repeat the linking procedure.

4. After linking, re-arrange the assemblies on the sheet.

H

i

•!1J: —

• -

4 !1

Copyright @ 2D07 Tekla Corporaton 9-9

0

Is> G

t

Z -C >

—0

a

z z 6)

C)

I, C)

I,.

_a

ft0

0C

C—

2.‘

c.

Cl,

6fC

fl

zp

s’a:

cnft

C-..

o.

CDCf

l-.

0

!2.

p’S

a00

-I ft(

0C z0

z 00_t,

000 ft

6 0C

.

0 ft

CD 0 V CD 0.

Co

Oft

—.

000

1, CD C.

ft -

5- 6)

40 PD

2. 5•ft

Zr o

ftCD

cn 0 C a a a Cl) PD

.0 C cI. 0 0 CO a 0-

CoZC

a0

-0 0 ft 0 ft C 0-

0 PD-

a PD S. 00 0 -I) g ft C

.,

‘. The assembly view title e.g. I BEAM —Marked lOIN can be

Q changed in the Tools — Advanced Options:

set XS ASSEMBLY DRA WING VIEW TJTLE=

Take a look at the Tekla Structures help file for more information.

Create Multi-Drawings AutomaticallyCreate multi- Until now, we have just accepted the numbers assigned to the assemblies and have notdrawing for the updated them with regard to multi-drawings. Now we will setup some multi-numbering tocolumn drawings affect how the columns which are to appear on multi drawings will be numbered.

I. Go to the Tools Menu and select Advanced Options

2. Select Numbering form the list on the left

3. Complete the values as shown below. Use all capitals and no spaces. When typingMAIN_PART, remember the underscore between the words.

Larn.Ifl

Senznvar.tS NaDSi.*a bci,

>nAINLJMBEROP*RTMULIICJSMSCTERS3,rçO.n-cq .y, k.ErrpEstLrs:&yoa9A—r:uE

X$ZMLT &r.wArsrRt3Diar5 ><S_PTFv5I1 FDN_NUMRERJURMATJTRrNGr,c.i- XS..REBAR PVSI1IOSINUMEER FDRMAT..SIAPNGFit ott

XS.5HOWJPERFORM_NUMSESWi&HESSAUE TRUEH.to}otg XS.STDfART_MUOEL CTekJthtrwiosesSiddN13’o’4OsOimoi W,ii XS..SWITCHJSULTI_NUMRERSJOR ASSEMBUE5toutXSSWITO&.PCS..NUMBERS_FORMu,bn ietotrd XS..UNIQUE.ASSEMBLY_NUMBERS

Wirkat bobXS_UNIQUEJIUMSEASMk..q. E.,itXSLSSEM9’i€SR.C>cLULyDcrI_O9FFEOJSyAOLNStEHUJ;o ASSEIER_ Esuot,fro POt X5J5E5Li’.LIBEtTR ASSEO. ES

__________________________

_JsEa1jbi IREFNOYa4CtC1OPhWWG_bWSXS_JSE_NuCyL;_SLitREPRJS .SSE.tNESxs-aIocnsroa_AosEy ‘Movno,TcNalNrrnr

S.ie put ,bo ro .areo,btt diawat boNd how,, a,. .,no% n.jhwb.,Spo,dar,d aucirassTo to ,d,yob,i, Ed.,1i,,.,a,*dBEG flyd,tuietend ?ooauodWddt

• 1

4. Click OK

5. Re-Open the model. This is necessary for the program to check and apply the newsettings.

6. Open the drawing list

7. Select all the column drawings

8. Right click on the highlighted drawings and link the assemblies to the multi-drawing.

Copyright © 2007 Tekla Corporation TLKLA sTRucTuRes 13.0 BASIC IRRININO 9—11MultiDrawings and Multi-Numbering

9. Notice that the assembly numbers on the columns will change as they are added to themulti-drawings.

10. You should be able to see that Tekla Structures creates a new multi-drawing and thenstarts linking the assembly drawings to it. Once the first sheet is full, it creates a newmulti-drawing and starts the linking procedure again until all of the selected assembliesare linked to multi-drawings

Tekla Structures will try to place as many drawings on a multi-drawing as possible but often, particularly with complex columndrawings this may only be one drawing. For this reason it issometimes better to manually link the drawings, giving you morecontrol over what assemblies are shown on multi-drawings.

Create multi-drawings out ofthe bracingdrawings

Highlight all the Brace drawings in the drawing lisL

1. Right-click at the top of se]ected drawings and select: Create Drawings> Multi-drawing> Selected drawings.

n

9-12 TEKLA stRucTuREs 13,0 BASIC TRAININGMulti-Drawings and Multi.Nunbering

Al

Sesdn ,n

CieMed Moeind Revici Sirs Tppe Maik Wean.

• r—j1E Sea-th s.Or C-s c,aieia4i rotle &awige

I’ ii]riod [ up to dale

CC-I.e

Mt4€nter

“It-to

C&14R

CO I-eli

Open

Propertes, -.

user-detl’ied attibuies.

updaie

updaie “Sn

R,aeaPent &awr,..E&t. -.

Ddere

si al

/CSQ,DWSQ -

34/1)234)25/2.04,25/a.04;ZkQ04/25/2...54/25/2

(rII (iluIzI—[I. ..iI’ 1 ulJk’ir-frI

II I . lI_IJr.lI

III

I_I

II 11111’ I

I u_UI I

[CLIJu_Il -

tOLL’S,rsrft-wCalif

Ce’ +A

1Freeze

Issue

0.35 155 tRotSID.21 155 BCEID HSS SR4CZIPP7 Rai0

—

Geerifl2eneet I____

________

MIJtbóe,ng

8 StANDARD

CC-Ion - Disinter lorsud. 12 soledodreel-u_v

Malci

________

[Ip[ ssp;li1Lick

I oJ( o1Firers

______

LI

_____

04

Lc- I

si,

Copyright © 2007 Tekla CorporatIon

Create multi-drawings out ofthe single partplate drawings

Highlight the Plate drawings in the drawing list.

2. Right-click at the top of the selected drawings and select: Create Drawings > Multi-drawing > Selected drawings.

The multi-number is assigned only once. so ifyou assigned themulti-number during the linking of assembly drawings then thenumber should not be changed again.

rri

9.3 Updating and RevisionsFor the most part updating and revision conirol is similar to that done in other drawings, sofor more information take a look:

Help: Drawing> Getting started with drawings > Defining drawing revisions

But because of the linking procedure and multi-numbers thae are a few issues that need acloser look.

Updating multi-drawingsChanges to an assembly drawing are not automatically updated in the multi-drawing. Anysaved modification to an assembly drawing requires the multi-drawing to be updated. Thisalso means that if something changes in the model. which requires an assembly drawing tobe updated, then it will also require the multi-drawing to be updated.

In the case where an assembly or single part mark changes so that a new drawing is cloned orneeds to be created, the new drawing also needs to be linked to a multi-drawing.

If multi-numbering is used modifications that affect numbering might also require re-linkingof the assembly drawing. For example, if clip angles change so that they get a completelynew number the assembly drawing needs to be deleted from multi-drawing. The assemblydrawing must then be re-linked to the multi-drawing for the new- cHp angles to get multi-number.

TEKLA STRUCTURES 13.0 BASIC TRAININGMulti-Drawings and Multi-Numbering

‘I,

V

copnight © 2007 Tekla Corporation 9-13

Revision control

Close and save the drawing.

You should see that there is flag and a change message in front of the multi-drawing.This means that assembly or single part drawings that have been linked to the multi-drawingshave been changed. You now need to update the multi-drawing.

Highlight the drawing and click Update.

Open the multi-drawing and you should now see the weld mark in the multi-drawing.

Create revision If you are sending multi-drawings to your clients then obviously you will need to add arevision mark to the multi-drawing. To add a revision mark:

3. Highlight the drawing on the list.

4. Click the Revision.., button.

5. Add a re’ision mark, date and text to the dialog.

6. Click Create.

You can see that drawing was marked on the list as having revision A.

9-14 TEKLA STRUCTURES 13.0 BASiC TRAININGMuItI’Drawings and Multi’Numbwing

Modifying an Add a typical weld mark to an assembly drawing:assembly drawing

1O-13/ieøCOL 2½51,2 C/C 1 0 1 a 1 (B/S)

1O1B1

r

Update multidrawing

Copyright @ 2007 Tekla CorraIion

Ii [hI flITU I’ll:

Revision 1 V [Save as] Revrsion 1

v

El Date: 2/15/2304

V teal WeC 52 chsed-Bei 13’Bl

El LEl E

IIeate [ Delete j F / r [ Canc&

Open the drawing. You should see that the revision has also been added to you revisionblock.

Weld size changed - Seam 10181 Sf1512007

REV DESCRIPTION ] DATE

FAB: NAMEFAB:ADORESS

I FAB.CITY/STATE

DESCR’ION BEAM2ROJECT NAME BASIC TRAININGOAWN 0Y nO ‘lv. CR0 No. —

DATEDRAWN 04/26/2007 TRAINO2 10151

Several drawings can share the same revision mark, date, andinformation. To attach the same revision information to severai

________

drawings simultaneously, select multip]e drawings from thedrawing list.

/ You can Choose whether Tekia Structures shows the revision() numbers or the revision marks in the drawing list. By default,

revision numbers are shown. For more information, see thefollowing links:Help: Drawing> Getting started with drawings> Workingwith drawings> Defining drawing revisionsHelp: System> Files and folders> Startup batch file,

Copflbt @2007 Tekla Corporation TEKLA STRUCTURCS 13.0 BASIC TININO 9-15MuIii.Drawinge and MaIti.Nizmbering

n

9-16 1EKLASTRUCTURES 13.0 BASIC TJN[NG Copaight2OO7 TeIdaCaoronMulti-Drawings and Multi-Numbering

eSe 1EKLA

Drawing Management


29 October 2007


Contents

10 Drawing Management .1

10.1 Controlling Drawing Revisions 2Revising General Arrangement Drawings 3Create revision marks in drawings 5Handling Revisions to Assembly Drawings 6Show revision information in a report 8

10.2 The Drawing Classifier 9Modify a drawing using a classifier 10

10.3 Cloning Drawings 1110.4 Adding a logo to a drawing template 2110.5 Creating Basic Templates 2310.6 Adding Templates to Layouts 2810.7 Plotting Drawings 33

Exporting Drawings to Other Programs 35Making PDF Files 36

10.8 Sharing Your Entire Model 36

Copy,ight@ 2007 Tef<la Corporation TEKLA STRUCTURES 13.0 BASIC TRAINING I OiiiDrawing Management

I O-iv TEKLA STRUCTURES 13M BASiC TRAINING Cop.ight@O7 TokiaCoiporaxoDrawing Management

0’

Drawing Management

In this lesson In this chapter we will learn further drawing editing and customization tools. TekiaStructures contains a vast array of facilities that allow the user to effectively handle changesto a contract after the drawings have been issued. There are also a collection of tools thatallow complete customization of how the drawings look. These topics are covered in moredepth dosing advanced training but we can introduce them here and learn some basicfunctionality.

We will introthice

How to control and handle revisions to previously issued gena arrangement drawings

• How to handle revisions to assembly drawings

The drawing classifier

• Cloning, as an affective way to minimize repetitive editing

• How to add a logo to a default template

• How to make a template and add it to a drawing layout

• How to plot drawings

TEKLA STRUCTURES 13,0 BASIC TININCDrawIng Management

I

Copytight © 2007 Tekta Corporation 10-1

10.1 Controlling Drawing Revisionsa

(

Make changes tothe model

/2

Now we will cover the revision handling features of Tekia Structures.

\Vhen the model changes:

• You have to update s revise drawings

• Attach revision information to the drawings.

Tekia Structures displays the revision information alongside the revision number or the markin the drawing list and in the revision table within the drawings. The revision table alsoshows the revision date. You can create a list of revisions in a report.

For more information about drawing revisions and creating reports, see the following links:

Help: Drawing> Getting started with drawings> Working with drawings> Definingdrawing revisions

1. Modif5’ the model by changing the profile of the columns on gridline A-7 and 3-7 fromW16X50 to W16X67.

r

10-2 TEKLA STRUCTURES 13.0 BASIC TRAININGDrawing Management

2. Number the model—Tools> Numbering> Modified


3. Open the drawing list.

L•d U,.. r,.4. A,,, n. ‘c.,,:,r 2v!ca, rr C II: MIC?)I2OJ 7TT

Notice how the columns changed automatically and were updated on the drawing. They arealso shown with a magenta cloud. This doesn’t print out and is only there to show the detailerthat something has changed.

Also note that the beam is highlighted above too. This is because it may have been the sameas the other beams on gld.s 5 and 6 before we changed the column depth causing thesebeams to get slightly shorter.

Revising General Arrangement DrawingsCreate revisionmark

To add a revision mark to a drawing:1. Select the drawing to revise, right-click and select Revision.., to open the Revision

handling dialog box.

TERLA STRUCTURES 13.0 BASIC TRAININGDrawing Management

— Lit’i,_l LI 5•II’ ..c. Ic.4 ——

•r.

mmmmmm

I—’

4. Open the Plan drawing that was created earlier.

AX

(N

19’-8

Copyright® 2007 Tekla Corporation 10-3

2. Enter the revision mark, revision date and description text of the revision in the dialogbox as shown below, and click Create.

! Revision handling

r

--fl

lJ

[ Create [ Delete j [ F / F J Cance4

3. Once the revision is created, a revision number is automatically assigned to the drawing.The revision number is shown in the dialog box.

4. Check that the revision number is shown in the drawing list.

I L F U Created ModiFied Revi&on Size Te Mk Nant1 SOD 2O( 1503.2005 1 11 52’ 82 6 131 Steel Fraye

5. Open the drawing to check that the drawing title and revision table display the revisioninformation correctly.

104 TEKLA 5TRuCTURFS 110 BASIC TRAININGDrawing Managem.nt

0’

. I IL]

Cl, It R

Im La F U C.e,ied Mome Re.a, Ste T3ve16Da2s ‘15 828 6 [ j] iwe

.. 1SJ3?5 811 nlTSQ* S

:- S 332 rS2 828 6 ‘I [iIfi±!J I Up to de 1

°tt... Ctfl.F By pat JOot.

F’zpe4ns

Delete [“I 115 riper,

Drawnq [ZJEIEEI I ott

• LodcFreeze [1 [_&i]Issue

Rey,,l

Undo CtrI+Z-

Revision.--<

— Redo CtrL+V

[ open [yaleni.k; Ckr. Lte I cancel

FcwAppioval V Save as] rMark

Date:

text

-JA

9.30.2006

Column Proliles Atei

‘V -

DIirrrs ProjIe AFFBI&:

REV DESCRIFTIDN DATE

EAB NAMEF AB AD D RE SEFAB-C m-/LS1crE

DESDRIFTIDN STEEL FRAMERDEDT &YE BASIC TRAINING

k:

— CLT DR’McI O9!292006 ‘RAIt5CO2 El

Copyrigisl © 2007 ToMe Corporation

Several drawings can share the same revision mark, date, andinformation. To attach the same revision information to severaldrawings simultaneously, select multiple drawings from thedrawing list.

You can choose whether Tekla Structures shows the revisionnumbers or the revision marks in the drawing list. By default.revision numbers are shown. For more information, see thefollowing links:Help: Drawing> Getting started with drawings> ‘Workingwith Drawings >Deflning drawing revisionsHelp: System> Files and folders > Startup batch file.

Modify revisioninformation

To modi’ the revision information of an existing revision mark:Right click on the drawing in the drawing list and select Revision. The revision dialog willopen and allow you to modi’ or delete any revision marks

When you delete a revision, Tekla Structures automatically adjuststhe remaining revision numbers for that drawing.

Create revision marks in drawingsWe will create revision marks in the drawings to help locate the changes made to the model.

Define revisionmark appearance

For more information about creating revision marks in drawings, see Help: Drawing>Editing drawings> Editing drawings reference> Create>Revision mark.To create a revision mark in the drawing:

6. Select Properties> Revision mark.., from the menu to open the Revision markproperties dialog box.

7. Select the revision number I in the drop-down box next to the Mark field to obtain thecorresponding revision information.

l Revision mark

Placfrtg

TEKI.A STRUCTURES 13.0 BASIC TRlNIN0Drawing Management

10-5

A‘I’

V

sa,dard

Revision Appearance

. [Save as] standard

Mark:

Date:

E Text:

El-

El [Pace..]

[P/F]

CopyTight © 2007 TekEa Corporation

8. On the Appearance tab, select the Arrow type as shown below, change the Frame colorof the revision mark to red and click OK.

Arrow

IEJ Type: —.0.

9. Create revision mark in GA drawing

‘0

10. Select Create> Revision ma>Arrow on right from the menu and pick a point toplace the mark. For example, pick close to the column and its part mark on gridline 7

11. Double-click on the revision mark to obtain its properties. Check that the contents of therevision mark is correct, and its appearance corresponds to the properties set in stepé.

Co

D01

K”

Handling Revisions to Assembly Drawings

Revision mark MipIr

[j slendard v [ Save as] standard-

.-eRevision Appearance

Text

Color:

E Height 13/128 —zzE1E Font: Anal

[_S&ect.

Angle: 0.0000

Frame

Type:

5/64

13/128

-=1

‘I

Leader line: ,IZD v•

OK j[ Apply Modily _JIw/rJrnc&__I

e

‘IL

/

You will notice that once the colunws changed in the model and the numbering wasperformed that a selection of drawings started to show various flags.

Copynghl © 2007 Tekla Corporaton10-6 TLKLASTRUCTURES 130 BASIC TRAININGDrawing Management

Revision Size130’3/4’20”0 3/42i3”l3”6’1/2&‘3/4’20”&‘3/4’20’13 0’l ‘2

3r231?W 1/2lrr/2la-ri,?13 ‘€“1 /71310’13’6”1/213’81/213”$”1/213010, ‘C”l /2

in the model

lope Mack Na,,,

A [8.10231 BEAMA )3C2] COLUMNA (300) COLUMNA (PCI ‘NOAsSA C1024( COLUMNA 1C1023l COWMNA rLS) 3ENO

91037’ OEAVIA (31 3A P2001 ROTTERA 3.11 I.13ASSA API] ‘NDASSA ID 2001) HSS BRAEEA ID 1999) BRACEA ID 1008) kISS BRACEA ID 1007] kISS BRACEA [0.1009] HSS BRACEA [0.1095) BRACEA RflOR’ 0P)A

and cross-references that

TiUp to dale Changes C’eaed MoI,edUuanlIO3i dec,eased 97/11/2007 07/11/2007Quariltp dec,eased 07/11/2007 07/11/2007QuandIp creased 07/11/2007 07/11/2007Pa,ts modOjed 07/11/2007 00/00/0000Rails modified 07/11/2907 07/11/2007Parts modified 07/11/2007 07/11/2007Pals Ired 07/11/200’ 37/11,2002Pale rcSed 07/01/202 00/X07Liked drae.tho chareed 07/11/2007 07/11 i2007

27,11)2007 En,00)27111/2007 e3/%/ImJ07/11/2007 00/00/000007/11/2007 00/00/000007/li /2007 00/00/000007/11/2007 00/00/000007)11/2007 00/00/000007)11/2007 00/00/000007)11/2007 00/fl)00W07/ 1/20fl rrnrr

The proarn automatically detects what has changedto the drawing list.

Add a revisionmark to thedrawings

Click the Changes column in order to sort the drawing list and bring all the changed itemstogether as shown above.

Select each one of the changed drawings and add a revision to the drawing.

Wa owe —

i.bcl&a,..o.d

Lie to dee, Eha,00,fl .1 07. iY’O’lIB

“I,, ‘I 0117 ‘l 997 E3/e20N jc. ft !!15 97. .

fl .0cc_il rn . . ru,A . 03 7/I .!.i1 30’A teaA vi- . Liii I lii?fl 0 I (111 4

II

j0 s..tt. lee, the b* — aa*C,

boded MOOd Reawo, Size I.e. HaS Naee 1,• tzz EziPenpoebos,.. iutota,Owe-dosed alevoIm.. Luau

11flW01301 IIl/l5l15J07/1/2107 EOCO2C lrL /107/1/303? 03/00/0020 la’V1/2E7fl1/300? t10 9070/3C?6’i3 03/tBb07fl’JV ttOD ‘0*1207/11/2037 m/00I rn,?07/11/2007 m/ll/0303 301)207/11/2007 03/00/fl 107101’07/11/301? twIll/Mat ire’in

Lea)

LZJZ= EE1EJ

Petal,—S,eapsoo

pled

LaodamSden 4

CwateO’ainmgo

1,1k

Entea,

EDLJ 10 Di.,mw lotand 0

saccp,*s

Add the revision information

C-Lotote Cti-ez0—Lu

For Approval [save asj Revision 1

E]Mark 1

Date: 3/10/05

text Columns atA7 and B? altered

L_

CEeate [ Modify [Delete 11W / F I ( Cancij

Note that al’ will appear in the revision column in the drawing list.

Now update the revised drawings.

Copyright © 2007 Tekla Corporator TEKI.AS1RUCTuRES 13.0 BASIC TRAINING 10-7Drawing Managonleni

Show revisioninformation inreport

The report drawingjssue_rev shows the revision dates and revision information ofdrawings. For more information about reports see Lesson 9 Numbering and Reports.To create a report containing the revision information:Click on the Report icon on the Standard toolbar to open the Report dialog box.

Select the drawing_issue_rev from the report list and click the Create from all button.

10-8 IEKLA STRUCTURES 13.0 BASIC TRE,]NINGDrawing Management

,e — REmus

Al

I

I-

— —

— Dh— — A. — —

:.o. ROaR.

07)11/220?07/il /220707/11/100707/11/100707/11)200707111)110757/11)210?SIll ‘12107SRI]’ /2051

10’%1)21 1/21351/2I 71 C/1 tEl/I1251/2

‘tin-

./3 A S/C..,A Hi]A ILE1]A 0.2001]A 10.1001]A 10.1000]A 01007]A UlawlA l01IA ,t 210010

1.

_

Ho4Le ByB

LosS

_IE

F ‘nor

II — r&nrii 009.amuo..b.ad.SsslecNd

“NO ASS..NO AS S...

HIS BRACEBRACEHIS BRACEHSS BRACEHIS BRACEBRACE

• ParEs modified• Pails modified• ParIs modified

• Drawing updated

• DIOWIIIt07daled• Otawiig tda]ed

Now the system will remake the drawings so that they will match what is now in the model.

lisa Lock Peeze Uptodose 0-anges cieac iHo&md Revosicr Sdm lype Ma07)11)2207 00)/0000 1 13°B1/2 A IP I07/11/2207 Cl/il ‘2007 1 03/420 A 10107/11/2207 17/11 ‘2007 1 03/420 A 1C197/11/2207 07)11/2001 1 1301/2 A 0.107/11/2007 00)0010020 1 11’Ol /2 4 10.107/11/2007 07/11)2007 1 1TSl/2 4 [0.107/11/2907 07/11)2007 1 35221 A 13107)11/2007 07)11/2207 1 3523 9 13107)1 1)2907 07)11/2087 1 0 3/420 A [3001)11)2007 07)11)2007 1 53)4295 A 13007)1112207 00)0810000 136’1)2 A ER.:0/11112007 00/08)0800 1361)2 A EM.07)11)2207 00/0810000 1161)2 A ILP07/11/2207 (03/00/0000 S3’Sl /2 4 (037/11/2007 08/W, 131(0 A t:07,11/2087 S%h/%/c 3u5!•/7 A 007,11)2%? SN1/lt)I3 3(0i’2 A 0.07/11/2%? (WIt/mi) ‘30’i/2 A E.n7/11/7t1fl7 Rn/nr.’ermn 1 tb A 3)

Always add the revision before updating the drawing to make sure that youcatch every drawing that is altered. The modified flag will disappear after youopen and save the drawing.

)

VShow revision information in a report


Click on the Show burton to open the report.Check that the revisions are shown correctly in the report drawing issue rev.xsr (TekiaStructures creates the report in the model folder).See the picture below as an example of the drawing issue ev report. Revisions made to theG [3 drawing are marked with a red rectangle.

10.2 The Drawing ClassifierThere are always situations where you might like to customize how one item looks on yourdrawings without affecting everything else. A typical example of this would be where joistsare shown on roof plans. Joists are usually out with the supply of the detailing or ffibrcation

TEKLA STRUCTURES 13.0 BPSIC TdNrNGDrawing Management

[lReport

standard

Report Optths

Report templates:

cast_unit_cgcest unit lot listcast unit_part listcast unit_strand_listcomponent_veid_listconnection list

%tJ fe_j standard

flies in eports— Titlel:

drawing issue rev

--i

V.

T itle2

:z:zzzzTitle3:

drawing lest rev

drawing listdrawing_revisiot historcdi a g_dwg_l is t

ci c_bareje_pert_selection4

Rewt Tile —

Name: drawingJssiae_rev.xsr

Sbowj Print..

j

Create from selected

J [ Browse...

Lcancel I

Report

DAOiLNG rvIsroN HISTOaY 50r ctrr?Acr Nc:13A3N002 Page: 1rIrLE: FHASl: Dete: ‘J3fl9.’2Oa

Org NAME rv No. AM? HIStORY AM’?. DAlY DESCAIprxoN

Ii] 9.30. 2DO rziu,rns _°rcfilea Altered

1 1 9,3O.2OO Columns Profil esAltered

Copyright @2007 Tekla Corporation 10-9

company so dont need to be hilly detailed on the plans. They are normally sho’ii with aphantom line.

To do this in Tekla. users have a number of options but the most obvious would be tohighlit each joist on the drawing and change it Part representation to a phantom tine — Thisis very time consuming and will be overwritten if the drawing has to be remade. It alsomeans that this work wou]d have to be repeated again on the next contract.

A better way is to group those items and then apply a rule (a classification) to how youwould like these to be handled, then to tell the program exactly how you would like to handlethese items. This means that even if the drawing is recreated, the classification will beremembered and the drawing will modi& automatically. You can also take these rules tosubsequent contracts or store them in your company wide Firm Folder so that the rule onlyhas to be created once.

Modify a drawing using a classifier

r

Open the drawing I. Find the plan at 24-0 level general arrangement drawing that was created earlier.

2. Notice that the IT Slabs are called out and numbered on the drawing. We will make aclassifier that will hide this extraneous information.

0

10-10 TEKLA STRUCTURES 130 BASiC TRAININGDrawing Management

Copy.igttC1 Told. Caa*,

cf?J TT24t97 .i6-4 -2 -48 -O -8 -o

.cP2 TT24t97 “6-4 -2-48 -o -8 -O

Group the items

3. Making and running a classifier follow a fairly simple 4 step process.

• Group the items you want to handle differently (In this case the TT slabs)

• Define the settings that you want to differ from the other items on the sheet• Create the classifier

• Refresh the drawing

4. Make a select filter to group the TT Slabs by double clicking anywhere in the drawing tobring up the General Arrangement Drawing Properties dialog box.

TEILA STRUCTURES 130 BASIC TRNa*G 10-11Dmwfng Management

1007

5.

Lici_t.,. I

Click the Filter button.

10-12 TEKLA STRUCTURES 13.0 BASLC TR4ININGDrawing Management

tSave Load J Pl&

‘It General arrangement drawing properties 1k1

Name:

2 Title:

El

I saej Ran

PLAN @ ELEV.

You can select the scale at the drawing beFore creation.

Click on the View... button and load the desired scale.

Views

CE

Dimensions

flEl

El \ie.

Marks

2 I Deta view..

_____________I

2 [Dinierdon..

Part mark...

SurFace treatment mark...

Objects

2 I Boll mark...

2 Connection mark...

2 1 Neighbor part mark...

2 [ReinForcement marks...]

Part...

Stalace bemert I

Others

Reference oecFs... J

Er Bolt...

2! Wetd..

EL Grit.

2 [ Neighbor parl..

2 I Relorcerrnl.

EL________2 [_UserdeFined attributes...

sir Filet.. 2 I Nehrpartfier..

[ OK ]I Apply jj Mody ]I Get [w/rj[ CanceLEl

Copyiighl 2007 Tekla Corporarpor

LsaveJ adJ TTSL4B vI[ J T7SI

2 Objedo (nthei tha, coaponent objectol

Comection objects

Nurràens Pats Components Reintcfrig bars User attsibutes

Filter by Not Filter string

Part

ElName El

_______________________

ElCIass I —— I

Pro(ile C TT

flMaterial I

:DFinish C I________Secondary I Main parts C Secondary

L OK 1L AppIyJ L Modi1y]t sej [Win Lcancei j6. Go to the Parts tab and enter iT in the Profile field. Then save the filter as TISLAB.

Do not click Modify.

/ — Adding the asterisk to the term acts like a wildcard allowing everything that() has a profile name the begins with iT to be grouped.

Define the 7. Now go to the Part Mark button on the General Arrangement Properties dialog box.classification

Copyright © 2007 Tekla Corporation TEKLA STRUCTURES 13.0 BASIC TRAINING 10—13Drawing Management

1W General - filter propertie5

C Layott.

Dimensions

n Eli Dknension..

Marks

EI[’&rna&.. IEl [iriace treatment mark... J El

Objects

L Part

Surf ace treatment,

ReFerence objects..

8. We want to remove the assembly position, it’s frame and also the section name of theslabs again without affecting the steel members. We want them to remain as they are.

10-14 TEKLA STRUCTURES 13.0 BASIC TBAININGDrawing Management

rSave Load j PI&

RGeneral arrangement drawing properties

El Name:

Title:

El

‘V Save as 9an

PLAN @ ELEV.

YOU can select the scale ci the drawing beFore creation.

Click on the View.., button and lo& the desired scale.

Views

‘zzzzzz:

Eli Vw.. El [ Det& view,

El [ Dksenscn

Bolt mark...

[Connection mark,. -]

El

El

El

El I Neighbor part mark...

El I ReinForcement marks.

Others

El[ BolL

Weld.

j El[ Grld..

El I Neighbor part..

El L Reinlorcemer,, J

El I Pr&ectkn...

El [Usedelined atlributes.

1 Eli Fer.. j El I Netr p& !iker.J

OK ][ Appl4,JI Modify jJ Get ][w/rj[ Cance

Copy I2OO7T&daCpora*n

(ilter_Plan_.TT S LAB

Cor

Font

Color:

Height. 3/32

Fort M

OK ] Apply J ModWy J[ Get J[W/rI [ Cancel

9. Once the Elements in Mark column is empty we will create the classifier. Again Do notclick Modi&. Enter f liter P].an TTSLAB in the Save As field.

‘H [vasij Iilter_Plan_TTSLAB

• Using the word filter makes the program recognize that this is a classifier setting.

• ‘Plan’ refers to the type of drang we want this classifier to apply to. This is takenfrom the name of the settings used to create this drawing. Alternatively, it could beElevation, Anchor_Plan, Detail or anything that you have defined as settings in theGeneral Arrangement Properties dialog box.

• ‘TTSLAB’ refers to the items that we grouped together under the Filter button. It isthe name of the filter we created.

10. Click OK and close each dialog box except the General Arrange Properties box

TEKL.A StRucTuRES 13.0 BASIC TRAINING 1 0-1 5Drawing Management

General- part mark properties

1iE @J .9C_standard •#• [i;-€ asJ

Coraeit Gen&

Main parr V

AvailaNe elementsenbly poiIlon

Part positionProlieMateria’NameClassFinish

vmbly position

>>

Frame around elenentsElenents In mark

[<Add frame]

_____________________________

Type: I 123 li<< rrorr.e,>

SizeLengthCamberFittings INS/FSIFace drrecfronSage ol otks0an&,g kCere;o-cerer dIaTeet

Remove

Symbol

Userdotined attribute

4

Copyright @2007 Tekla Corporation

1&,_M[roJ_UL ‘3

STE ELFAAMEtI_Frame

Dinns fC_standa,d

[ Protection...

-Hi-

-_

ale -

11. Reload the Plan s(The settings you want the classifier to apply to) settings and now clickModify.

12. The drawing should now update, hiding the TISLAB marks but leaving all the steelmembers as they are.


Save _lI[ Load

Wt General arrangement drawing properties

.rJi_Saveas Ran

El

PLAN@ ELE

You can sele’

Click on the’

.30 -View•Elevalion.Plan•StairnchoiFlannchorPlan_ru-D etailsinoborPlan_withouLD CElevationlann..nn ,.tkn,,F nr

Ri Name:

jJ Title:

Views

CEDimensions

Maiks

r I Ri De;ai view..

;iia.Ri Part mark,., J RI

L1 [Surface treatment mark... RIObjects

EL Part RI4 2 [ Sizlace t:ealrnert.. I RI

2 2Others

Bolt mark...

[Connection mark...]

Bolt...

[ We.

GI.

2 I Neighbor part mark...

2 jPeinforcement marks.

Neighbor part.

Reference objects...

ElEl Reréorcemenl.

Fet.. j Ri I Ne,bor part fdter.j

I_User-defined allributes...

OK j[ Apply][ Modify _J Gel ][i7/r)[, Cancel

F’

Copyrighi © 2007 TeJ<Ja Corporation

10.3 Cloning DrawingsAnother way to minimize the amount of cleanup required on drawings is to use cloning.Cloning is exactly as its name suggests where a master drawing is set up and similardrawings are cloned from it. This is particularly usethi when you have repetitivedimsionthg required on a number of similar items.

I. Delete all the HSS Brace Drawings in Phase I (IO series) except one

2. Open one of the HSS Brace Drawings similar to the one sho below.

L:E EE-EEZ-iE E

E E

ONE -VERTtCAc HSS ?ACE -01007

3. Add some dimensions and a note to one end.

Cop.ight @2007 Telda Corporabn TEKLA sTRUcTuRES 13.0 BASIC TRAINiNG 10-17Drawing Management

0 1. 00 11 C

ON

LI,

-i

zn

oo

D2

Oo

a—

.a

a0

p1

az

a=

a_ow

-J00

<a

LI)

a(D

LI) o

0_a,

gI

S0.

aC

C

a

°a

a)•

QC

)a-

-

RE

1g

II

{iI

.4

,1

CD 0 ‘a Ct a a cn a a CD a

11/4

lk

-U - C 0 a

0

8. Now highlight the items in the model that you want to have clone drawings made from.

TEKLA STRUCTURES 13.0 BASIC TRAINING 10-19Drawing Management

t Drawing cloning

Select draving to clone [6ings...

Objects and actions cbing

Object: Action:

Dimensions Clone M

Obect:

Texts

Symbols

DtPer gI&iC objectsDiawrç v.elds

MOdekIg welds

Action:

Clone

Clone “

UoneClone

Clone V

Clone

Clone

Create

V

V

V

Links

Text liles

DWOIDXF

Hyperlaiks

Level marks

Reyision maiks

Oth rnks

[Clone selected

Clone V

Clone V.

Clone V

LCancel I


11. And if you open one of these. the editing made already will be showm


I’

9. Then click Clone Selected.

Drawings..]Select dravëig to cbne

Objects and actions in cloning

Object: Action: Object: Action:

Dimensions Clone V Texts Clone v.

Symbols Clone

Drawing welds Clone v Other graphic objects Cb,e V

Mcdeng welds Cbne v

Links

Te4%s Clone yLevel rnaiks Clone v

DWS/DXF Clone vRevision marks Clone v

Hyperlinks Clone ‘v!Other marks Create v

[6ine selected [ Cancel J

r

F’

10. Notice that the drawing list now shows the new cloned drawings.

t2C Jointaie Owoes

OiawfttoecDia,rc.pdate

Cienied0711/220707/111200727)11/2077DIn 1/203’CJ11)20D’Or. 1 /20D707111/202701111/202701,11/207107)11/200707/11/200707/11/2007

Mo$iedCvl1/707111/200?CL’C7r/103’

/20C73,/V i2OD07/11/2CC?07111/202107/11)202707/11)202707/11)200107/1 17

—

—

Rrnion See

89/420”rJ/r2c

I 0J/4’2003/4.2ff

34.2003/4100’3/42083/420

1 0’3/4’Z71 B3/4’201 3513’

lj/pe Maic Nntt

A 2C2] DL_.’IXA 20] COLUMNA 1X1 COLLMI%

A 1X2 :0Ljj4A 1X3 COLLI4,A 51 COLLII/kA 1121 COLUMNA SCOI COLUMNA [0011 COLUMNA [C.10231 COLUMNA [C.10241 COLUMNS El

07/11/2007

______

JflT

_____________ ________

I!.,., 14,2ro7 I,.. I: II.i [:1;:; II

07/12/2037I:.’ ..

01/11/2077 02/07/020007/11/2007 02/07)020007/11/2007 07/11/2007

l3’S”I/2 A 0.1007] H55 SHALE

1 3”6”1/2 A lo.2onl HSS ORAtE1 Y’8”I/2 A IR.20011 RAFTER32r 6 12] 51

p3

Copyn0ht@2007 Tekla Corporation

10.4 Adding a logo to a drawing templateMost users will probably want to customize their standard drawing templates to show theircompany information and logo automatically. This is covered in detail during the advancedtraining course and there is farther help on the subject available to users on the extranet. butthis chapter outlines a simple method of quickly and easily adding information to thestandard drawing templates.In this example we will add the Tekla logo to the drawing but users can add any dxf file oftheir choice.

/ — Drawing borders cbnsist ofa set of rules called Layouts that aremade up ofa coflection of Templates which call information fromthe model and the program.Templates can be textual (for reports) orgraphical (for drawings).For example, the Bill of Materials on a drawing is a template. TheTitle Block is another templaLe. The drawing border is created byadding and locating each of these templates in a Layout

Help> Introduction to Templates > Graphical Templates

Open the templateto be modified

Now that the logo has been prepared. all that remains is to add that to the styles or layouts tohe used.To do this we will open the template being used as for General Arrangement Drawings andadd the logo to the Style 1 areaGo to File — Open and find the TypeGM_TitleBlocks.tpl file

TypeAyLA_c&loff.tpTypeA_OnHold.l

‘. TypeA_OnHoldtnft.tplTypeA_Phases, lTypeA_Revisns,l

TneA_Y±5io&s.TypeAF.

Th’peAMndr&_t_BOM.i.TypeAM_HandraiJ_TLyevrsionsTypeCu..RebarScheduleuS.WlTypeG_Anchor8oltTable,tpln

There are several different styles available to use and these can be set up in ProjectProperties within the model. We will deal with Style I which is at the top of the list.

TEKLA STRuCTuRES 13.0 BAsIC TRAINING 10-21Drawing Management

Lnok,: ..jtempIae

Load File

V

LMy RecentDocurerds

Desktop

. Status_Drawing.ftoom.rpt

J Status Shop.rpt

[) status_site.rpt

[ Sbuctures.tplj sts_d_kgt.rpt

Stt1e1Loso.arfacngjst.rpt

iJTekJaLogo,mlj]ransmittal.rptType_BoMsjl

TypeA_caliOff ,

TyjeA_CaiDML.tplr’A_Grkt,1jTypeA_F’tA_8OM.l

My Documents

My Computer

TypeGIfle6lodcs

File Dame:

I IJtflI Old LI.M

TypeGM_TitleBlocks.tpl

Files of jpe: Template Files Ltpl; .rpt

L2K1Cancel

Copyrighi © 2007 Tekln Corporation

D) Vm

S.(0

z 0 00 0 0 0) -4 0 0)

. Inr

E2. V

a Hi (n z

aQ

cii

“1

.2.

0)

t 0

t-.4

S.

oe.8

if,

.,‘-

<

0) 0

0 z (0 CD CD z C ‘1 CD 0 a 0’ a a 0,.

ii,

a 0 0 C (1)

(0 0 ci 0) a

-‘C

l)0

0,

3<

0’

0) 0

0 I.J

€00

)

l.a C

,o

— C 00

C)

-4 z z 0) C,

0 S C-) E

0) —4

0 B- a a a 0)1

0) in in

‘ There are many more functions available to help users create and

Q edit drawing borders and drawings. The basic training coursecovers only how to create and basically edit drawings. Theadvanced training course covers topics such as creating drawingwizards, the drawing classifier and how to create and edit drawingtemplates and layouts in detail.

10.5 Creating Basic TemplatesThere are a number of templates already supplied with Tekia but you can also create anytemplate to show any information you like. In this example we are going to create a verysimple template to show a for approval’ or ‘for construction’ stamp on the drawing.

/ — Using a template for this type of process makes the stamp appear on everydrawing automatically, saving time by avoiding having to open every singledrawing and insert a block or add some text many times over.

1. Start by opening the template editor Tools> Templates

TEKLA sTRuCTuREs 13.0 BASIC TRAINING 10-23Drawing Management

Copyright © 2007 Tekla corporation

Er W,v Iret W. Op H*

LL____

___

Seve OMS

Sect As...

Save

Temçtste

Recent Flies

Eat ad-a

Ipli

/- I’ 0 I

Ps,v,eee Pane

Picpersy - - yates

Rea4

2. Then go to File > New in order to create a new template.

3. Select Graphical Template

Tefrate types

-j

Textual te,ndae

r UK ] [ Cancei

S

“I

1%

Graphical Templates are templates that apply to drawings. Textual Templatesare for reports and material exporting thnctions for MIS or CNC programs.

4. The next stop is to define a row where we will add our content information.

5. Go to the Insert Menu and choose Component> Row

10-24 TEKLA STRUCTUREs 13.0 BASIc TRAININGDrawing Management

copynt fl17 Td Cupamta

FE tt Vw l’ir. OpWe *

J Coreponent Header

Sorr and dise

TewnAa

6. You will be asked for the content type. The content type determines the type of valuesthat you will be able to bring in from the model. For instance an Assembly content typeallows attributes that are pertinent to assemblies to be shown. A cast unit content typeallows certain concrete cast unit attributes to be shom

7. Choose Drawing.

Select Content Type

IF you weni to insert object speciFic attributes,you need to select a content type For the row.

Cor*er type

S. This allows us to show the date the drawing was last plotted underneath the stamp.9. Now go to the insert menu and choose Text

/ UneSc#tmg end dran— 2 PoMine

I. et. Teata

crde

* Fitrn

Ale.

IZ Valire Add

r. Gra,tctJ Field

10. Type FOR APPROVAL in the text field and then locate it in the middle of thecomponent row.

TEKLA STRUCTURES 13.0 BASIC TRINING 10-25orawing Management

-i ‘3rr.DrI•.r’Page Header r —

_______________________________

‘.:,;Fecie

i

V

SSEMBLYBOLTST_UNITCOMMENTCONNECTIONJII

‘IDLEMESH

______

NUT : Cancel

Ft Edit w r C,turs t*

. —‘ EAtun;pIdLol

.,n1oe.renae.rrn..nrvne.anaan.eiaenet

Inter, a terd 1 contonaMtrl I

Copyright 2007 Tekle Corporation

L :z...*: t

You can change the font, the font size or the color of the text at this stage ifyou wish.

11. Next we will add the plot date beneath the stamp. Insert another text field using exactlythe same process titled Plot Date

::::::IFQR:ApPRQVAL’:::::::jP.LOTOATE::

___________

::

12. You can aiso add a line by using the Insert> Line command or a box around the stampby using the Insert> Rectangle tool

13. Now we will insert a value field that will automatica]ly update with the new plot dateevery time the drawing is plotted.

14. Go to Insert> Value Field and click the point just above the left edge of the underlineshown below.

FOR APPROVALPLOTDATE:±::*.:::

p

15. A list of available attributes that can be taken automatically from the model will nowappear.


copyright@ 2007 Tekla Carporafion

fl

AS S EtA B LYHISTORYPROJECTREVISIONUSERDEFINEDNUMBER

16. Choose PLOT_DATE from the list.

FOR APPROVALPLOT DATh:: &LIJ

17. You can also change the text size and color for value fields too.

18. Finally save the template in the usinnp/templates folder.

TEKIJ STRUCTuRES 13.0 BASIC TRAINING 10-27Drawing Management

DATE - DateDATE_CREATE Creatim dateDATE ISSUE Issue dateDATE_MODIFY Modification dateDATE_PLOT . [late dra’,-ing printed

User attribute- Attribute [DRAWINGI

D CONTENTTYPE Content typeD CURRENT_USER

D

D

Hi*0EDHi

0Hi

Hi-0hO

0-00

V

0

DR_D EFAU LI_H OLE_S IZEDR_DEFAULT_WELD_SIZEDR_PART_POS - Drawing Part positbnHEIGHT HeightID . IdentificatIon numberNAME - NameNAME_EASE Base namePAGE - PagePLO TFILE Prt Ie name ot drawingROW IN PAGE Row i pageSCALE1 - Scale 1SCALE2 - Scale 2SCALE3 . Scale 3SCALE4 - Scale 4SCALE5 - ScaleSSIZE - SizeTIME - TimeTITLE - T:tleTITLE1 - Title 1TITLE2 - Title 2TITLE3 - Tit’e 3TYPE - TypeWELD_DEFAULT - Weld de!ault sizeWIDTH - Width

Copydght © 2007 Tekla Corporakor’

20. Your template is now available to be added to a drawing.

For more information about Templates see: Help > Template Editor > Introduction toTemplates

10.6 Adding Templates to Layouts

Now that we have defined the template we need to tell the progran what drawings we wantthe template to appear on and where on those drawings we would like it to show. We do thisby defining layouts.

Layouts are what the program uses to make the physical attributes of the drawings, How itlooks, what physical size the sheet is and what template are shown on the sheet. A drawing ismade up of layout information and templates.

To define layouts we go to the Properties> Layout maw. The available list of layouts willappear. There are several layouts included as standard and these are generally sufficient formost normal usage scenarios but users can add their oxri if they wish.


Tplfli I ,.qI plah. i IIemIanI .ij— —.

‘qe Lit t: I,tect Wndo-. r,t he — X

Iea r.N. %Ø9 Tt+S. [541

.-- n_t.o - - — --.---——.—. - -

___________________

—4

I. Save o,-.rSi,ek

- iN.S.tlr ‘r•

Tenwiate •

Recent Filet

Ed

FOR APPROVALI.PLOTDATE:

19. Give the template a name and click OK

Save FiteAs

.nddrortssettr,s.jTplEd 2.2 tamplates

My Recent • BAsE_scHEDuLE,IDocuments f Cornerlick_BottornRight. tpl

L3CornerTi&_TopLeftlpl

9cu_BoMztpI- .

- cu_80r1. tpt

Desktop CLi_BOMX.

CU_Logo.l

• CUMatfrt

-$• cIJpr.:

__...J jCU_Rebar_Bends2.

My Dzcunerils CU_Rebar_Ben&lcu_Reira,2,tpI

r

r

“ 0 t

Zcu_s_treittaia,

‘drawing_e.pa*l

j -ENr3_coIumn_sthedu{e2.l

JJ -ENG_conc_pilaster_schedule

i -EPJG_pad_thono_stheduIe. l-ENG_sfrip_ftoting_schedule.tpl

L Engr_24x36,tplEngr_3Ox4iI

Er_Revab,s.tg_SubnittaIi.1

lE,vsJbmittaI2.$l:±‘TVttaI3.

En_5tm

EnarSe. &ngr_$t

Engr_SC

JJ

PC_Er_i

PC_Er_i

PCrJ

.PCEr;PC_Er:

PC_Er_:

,e%iscn

Style1I

My Computer

e nam&

Files of type: Graphical Template Ales (.tpl)

IFv L Canc


We are going to add the stamp template to our GA Drgs in this exercise so highlight theGADr5son the list.

Select the Table Layout button. This opens the available drawings that can be used forGeneral Arrangements.

We can actually use any type of drawing layout for any category of drawing.By organizing these into sections though, we can allow the system someflexibility in how it creates the drawings. For example we can permit theprogram to use II xl 7 layouts or 24x36 layouts when creating assemblydrawings. This helps the program achieve better results automatically.

TEKLA STRUCTURES 13.0 BASt TRArNING 10-29Drawing Management

Layouts

sezth1yrgsAss yCalloffAssya 11 OfV

Current layout

Ii Tabls layout... jjFired sizes...

Calculated sizes...ather5heetRanraiL_TLMLJssy_)rgXultimrgs

050 asP0_Erect i cnSin;lsrtDrgSngl eta 110ff -tSA_Drs

r Add J Delete

OK IL ApplyJ Cancel

CopyrghI 0 2007 Tekta Corporalion

As you can see we can have Anchor Bolt Layouts specificcan have a 24x36 sheet set up for all other GA thawing types.

for those types of drawings or we

t

TypeM PhasesTeM_Styie4ridI yp eM St yie4 Phas acridIypel_DaliD±fIype_InAssyListTypewritlealccks+30M

drawing_title_gE

I4

[ OK J App’

10-30 TEKLA5TRUGTURES 130 BASIC TRAiNINGDrawing Management

H

Cancel

ii Table layouts

MlchcrSoit124x36

___________

Tab Iayaft: Current table layout

___________

Margins

Widtft 0’

HeIght: 0’

Spaces

Horizonlal 0

Vertical: 0

IL iiAdd j Uate j Delete

[ OK Apply J [ Cancel

24k36

To define what templates appear on the 24x36 drawing type, highlight it then click Tables.

Available tables: Chosen tables:

•1

nStylelLogoIyp-ecx_?evisionsI yp a ax_Title S icc

a,

V

Current tableReference

HDrawing frame v

HVecici between corners, 0”

y. &

Update

Table

EC ElScale: 1.0000

Tra,spaent H

CopyrighI @2007 TekIa Coirerallon

TypeMfliaseaTypeM_Style4Szidl’peMStfle4haseridTyeWCa11OffTypewlnAssynist

ypeW lit leE 1ccdrawing_title_gae;i i nfl

1MW4

CDrarFrarr

CVector between corners

Scale:

flOK App J Lc!ncdlNow we must tell the program where we want the template to be located. This is done byreferencing a point somewhere on the drawing and referencing a point on the template wehave made.

TEKLA STRUCTURES 130 BASIC TRAINING 10-31Drawing Management

Then find stamp on the list and click the arrow pointing right to move it across to thecolumn on the ripht i-nd to make it visible on the drawipy.

Available lables: Chosen tables:

Styleltcgc

I yp eN_evisic asI yp eC_Ii tie! locks

[ Update JCuteeni tableReference Table

El C

C C C

ec 0’

yr_

1 .00

Transparent fl

Copightt27 Teaa Ceoraton

We define the reference points by first of all finding the bottom center of the drawing frame.Then we find the bottom center of the stamp template making the template appear centeredon the bottom of the drawing. Clicking both corner boxes as shown above acts to centerthese. I-lad just one box in the corner been selected then the template would appear at thatcorner of the drawing instead.

The 3’ value in the ‘y’ box adjusts the template up 3” vertically on the drawing from itsbottom center anchor point.

Checking the Transparent box allows the drawing items to overwrite the template orencroach upon the template without being hidden behind it

Finally click Update, the OK at each of the dialog boxes until you are back in the model.

Then re-open one of your GA drawings. The plot date value will fill in as soon as the systemdetects you have plotted the drawing

Avalthle taLks:

Tables [1C}sen tables:

IyeX_hasesTypeXstylearidIjpeM_Style4Phasec-zidType?Da11DffTypeulnAasyListTypeW_1itie31ck+!CXtawing_titie_gaZeViSiQn

— StyleltcgcIypeGMlevisitnsTypeGX Title3lccks

r

V

Current tableReference

Update

Table

Drawing frame

LIDH

Vectoi between corners

stamp

U

Scale:IL ID

jY: I1.0000

Tanspaien

OK UPl9 Cancel

10-32 TEKLA S1ROCT1JRES lit BASIC TRAININGDrawing Management

Cupy,igM S 2807 Telda Corporation

E!H E -

F—

1,-i

[I +-u.rH

10.7 Plotting DrawingsTekia Structures plots drawings both to selected print devices and to flies. Single drawingscan be plotted from the Drawing Editor. Single or multiple drawings, which have beenselected in the drawing list can be plotted from the Model Editor.

PlottingTo plot a single drawing from the Drawing Editor:I. Open the drawing in the Drawing Editor.

2. Select File> Print current.., to open the Print drawings dialog box, or click the Printdrawings icon on the Drawings: Standard toolbar.3. Select the print device (plotter) to be used and click Print.

TEKLA STRUCTURES 13.0 BASIC IRAINING 10-33Drawing Management

For more information about Layouts see Help> Drawing> Drawing Layout

Plot a singledrawing

OO?flht 2007 Tekia Cortrflfl

r

For more information about available plot options, see Help: Dra4.ing> Printing>Printing Drawings> Plot options.

Plot multiple To plot multiple drawings from the Model Editor:drawings -

4. Open the draw1ng list.

5. Select at least two drawings in the drawing list

6. Click on the Print drawings icon on the Standard toolbar.

7. Select the print device to be used, and click Print

/ — If you select several print devices, Tekia Structures sends eachdrawing to the device with the smallest paper size, on which thedrawing will fit.

For more information about printing to print device, see Help: Drawing> Printing>Printing drawings.

Exporting Drawing as Other FormatsYou can convert Tekla drawings to many commonly used industry format drawing types likeDXF, DWG, PLT or even PDF. Before you can do this you must install the printer or printdriver in Windows then add the relevant printer to your Printers catalog in Tekla Structures.

For more information on adding printers see: Help> Drawing> Printing> The PlotterCatalog

Plot a drawing as Plotting drawings as a file allows you to send drawings electronically for remote printing. Toa file plot the drawing to a file:

1. Open the drawing list in the Model Editor.

2. Select the drawing or drawings in the list.

3. Select File> Print Drawings

r10-34 TERLA STRUCTURES 13.0 BASt TRAINING cop,ight@2O07TekIa Corporiioo

Drawing Mnagenent

: Print drdwings

a,wrj.t4v 1 Lx17

Pir cwiad ece &5Y4flg

P:iae, -,ss-c Q Prrij in ie

Re

Sesienjet24x35esii.t 32x42

1aser et4v_3—i!2,U1 ØAjotynewerintet

Q Prig an rw4fl sheets

Nuwbe, ol coes

Oi.enlalion Auto

Print àpe Entire dravsng V

Md / EdiLFrawe,.

Piint J rierseiup.1 Lcce j

4. Select the type of output you would like and click the Browse button to speci& thelocation the plot files are to go on your computer.

5. The Include revision mark to Filename allows users to differentiate between a fileprinted before revisions and the same file re-printed after a revision was made. It simpiyappends the revision mark to the name of the file it creates and saves on the computer.

Exporting Drawings to Other ProgramsYou can also send drawings to other users in DXF or DWG format so they can be openedand edited by clients or colleagues who don’t have Tekla Structures.

I. Go to FiIe>Export>Drawings to open the Export drawings dialog box.2. Select DWG as the File Type. Type .\drawings in the Name field, This will define the

.ABasicModelCombineddrawings folder as the destination folder of the plot files.

Punter instances

Ik’r.

)XF

designjet_24x3designjec_30x421asejet4v_11xI7

PririttoIIIe-..-..

fle location. .\duawings Firowee..

fl Include revision mark to tie name

Scaling

3. Click Print to plot the drawing to DWG.

Print drawings

Print &awings selected in the drawkg list.

Printer instances: Print to tile

File location: C:\TeklaStructuresM ([Rrcwse j

_______

Include revisucti mark to lie nan

- Scalnodesignet_24xS

-

designjet3ox42 Autolaserjet4v 11x171nejet4vS—1/2a1L OScale 1.00

E Prt on mukiple sheets

Number of copies: V.

Orientation: Landscape ‘

Pr a’ea: Entke drawir v

[Add I Edt..] [_Frames...

Prtiter Setup..] [ Cancel

Print duawings selected in the drawing list.

Copyright © 2007 Telda Corporation tEKLA SIRUCTURES 12.0 BASIC TRAINING 10-35Drawing Management

:‘PrioI Ii rwiogs

Print dra.irrngs selecled in rho diawng nt.

Pirde; rsnLes: 2 Prir Io 1k

fl. F,e Iocatcei I 2awsts\S;eeFrare ‘q [Browse Iie3ignjt24aS C fri&ide ;eo1 nr to Me nane

designjet3Oxt1 Statinglaseriet8vllxr’

4. Check that the drawings were successfully plotted to the.ABasicModelcombined\drawings folder. This folder should contain the saved *.dwgdrawings.

/ If you do not enter a file name for the destination plot file, or youhave chosen several drawings, Tekla Structures uses the drawingname(s) as file name(s). If you do not enter a folder name, TekiaStructures creates the file(s) in the current model folder.

You can also print a drawing to DWG using the Drawing Editor.Open the selected drawing and follow the above steps, starting atstep 3.

Tekla Structures does not distinguish between upper and lower caseletters. For example, a drawing named A. I overwrites a drawingnamed a.l.

For more information about plotting to file, see:

Help: Drawing> Printing> Printing drawings> Printing to DWG/DXF

Help: Drawing> Printing> Printing drawings to file

For more information about defining drawing plot file names and plot directories, see:

Help: Drawing> Printing> Printing drawings to file > Switches for naming plotfiles

Making PDF FilesPDF Files are the open format employed by Adobe and there is a free viewer available fordownload on the internet called Adobe Acrobat Reader. There are also a number of free orcheap PDF file maker programs that can be used in conjunction with Tekla Structures toenable sharing of your drawings with clients who may not have a license of Tekla Structures.

Once you have chosen and installed a PDF making program you can make and share PDFFiles. Many of these program behave like an imaginary printer attached to your computerand instead of creating physical paper as the output they make PDF files that can be sentelectronically via email or written to storage media or even printed out locally or remotely.

10.8 Sharing Your Entire Model.It is also possible to share all sorts of information graphically with everyone involved in yourcontract regardless of whether they have Tekla Structures or not. Users can create arepresentation of the model in a format that can be viewed in Microsoft Intemet Explorerwhich is already installed on every machine that is running any form of Microsoft Windows.To export a Web Viewer Model:1. Go to File> Publish as a Web Page

I10-36 TEKIA STRUCTURES 13.0 BASIC TRAINING Copynghte 2007 Tekla Corpsraton

Drawing Management

() XML CD Sohd

Tekia Structures model

Tekla Web Viewer

.\PubhcWeb\ModeI.xrt

browser

J New Ctri-NOpen... Ctr4C)

W Save Ctn—SSave as..

Ti Print drawings... Sht*PPr1repocts...

Report...

CNC

Pubkh as Web

Import

Ewort

Catalog

Reference models,..

2. Select Publish from the dialog box that appears.

l Publish as Web page

Publish what?

() Entie model

iDSelected parts

Publish as

Type:

Page title:

Template:

File name: 1

L Cancel

3. Internet Explorer should now open on your computer. You may see a warning about anActiveX control that has to be allowed to run.

TEKLA STRUCTURES 13.0 BASIC TR4]NJNG 10-37Drawing Management

Copi,pht @2007 Tekla Corporakon

- . 1— 2

10-38 TEKLASTRUCTURES 13.0 BASIC TRAININGDrawing Management

C

rl.ejw4 .. 411 ‘.1W low-lIol lI.4)In(er

r— ‘7 . P

93 C o. Ted.a e’.w&&I £ TtLo S4at Y&la W tThtho’1. S FC W.. 4’sbew I’ H, Tttk 0 cu..

* •Tdda W - T St9ctsn ..- 0 Plot — •.- 7,0, —

.snt&rattcfreAtfltheafw I

1i* -I

4. Click on the bar and Choose Allow Blocked Content

5. After a few moments the model will appear.

Allo., ‘ockur1 content...

Copyright® 2007 Tale Cwporatir

6. Now the model can be rotated, zoomed, moved or flown through in the same manner asif you would if you were running the fuI installation of Tekia Structures.

acRS1RcTLREsI3.o3As1c:ft.’:ING 10-39Drawing Management

‘ Icick Web Vcwc It•kl.s 54, urlisres sotlLi:eas.cMa3elCoq1b,ned- Wndos’,s Instruct Lxplo.t’

S Ctressthscturegtd& hi 3O,Trthwçfl dCsrtEied54bkWthrdx “ A

9$ 5tSda Wa swwes - Ydda Stuclises niedel: esadlod.

U Telde rehJa Excenni rnHe Ir,heml & TnUe :bnbtx :Vethoy,e HSSC 0- AnticS Exyrns, P Mv TidebIn 0 Chest

TEKLA’ Structures The Model that Works

- ‘Pe’ reels-

seed Il ImhS na s hot Is C linbopid

SmfJQJ N*$1zE

Pa 5 II

Done

Leidse 5.5% • rn. 1004

d My Cn’iuittn •e ‘00%

Cc,rd’I 2007 T& Cpori

/ — This isa terrific way to quickly and easily share information about your model.Progress can be tracked visually; Requests for information can be handledeasily by highlighting affected items in the model in a different color prior toexporting as a web page. All sorts of information can be shared among thoseinvolved via this easy to use system.

I1040 TEXLASTRucJuRs 110 BASIC TRAINING CopyTight 02007 Telda corporation

Drawing Management

_*e TEKLA

Stairs and Handrails

Tekia Structures Basic Training

October 26, 2006


Contents

BSI Stairs and Handrails 3BS1.1 Create a Stair 4

Finishing the bottom of the stringers 10Assigning Gage Material attribute to treads 14

BS1,2 Create Stair Handrails 16Create Stanchions (Posts) at stairs 16Create Handrails 18Modify Return Bend Lengths 19

BS1,3Create Handrails Along Landing 25Create Stanchions 25Create Handrails 30Create Corner Elbows 31Prepare the Assemblies 37

BS1.4 Create Drawings 42Stair Drawing 42Handrail Drawing 45Change the Handrail BOM type 47

8SO Copynght@2co5TeklaCcrporattn TEKL4STRUCTRES BASIC TRAINNGStairs and Handratis

1

‘a(\.

jj TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAJNING Copynght@2005 Tekja Corporation BSO1Stairs and Handrails

!


In this lesson we will introduce you to some basic miscellaneous modeling tasks that youneed to know when detailing projects with miscellaneous assemblies. We will start with asmall structure (already modeled in TS) and add a stair and handrails to this model. Many ofthe basic modeling functions that you learned in previous lessons will be used in this lesson.After the model is completed we will create the necessary drawings for shop fabrication ofthese assemblies.


• Model in a stair and handrails using several miscellaneous system components

• Utilize various components to connect the stair and handrail

• Utilize various modeling tools to complete the stair and handrail assemblies

• Create a shop drawing of the stair

• Create a shop drawing of a handrail assembly

TEKLA STRUCTUnES BASC TRANINGStairs and Handrails

BSOi Copyright © 2005 Telda Corraton 3

Create a StairIn order to add a stair to our model we first must add two points; one at the bottom nosingpoint and one at the top nosing point. Smdy the contract drawing to determine the locations ofthese nosing points.

Click on the open named view list icon.

This opens the Views dialog box shown below, Move the PLAN AT EL. +12-7’ 112 view intothe Visible views side. Click OK.

Select and nve vtws between he do to c* vntWyTo select uwAc4e vews. F down ciii key vd* :elcctrç

Select the intersection at A5 as a reference — notice the Origin values change as shown below.

4 TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING

(a

C

Named wewn. vistle .ws

BSI.1

Create the workpoints

I.

!LrJRTIDII ON ORID

E!.EV?flOH SIT GRID

5VIIIOH SN GRIDELEVATION SN S-RIOELEVAI ION ON 5010

TIEVAIIOFI SIT GRIDELEt7IION Ott 02.10ELEVATION ON S-RIDELEVATION ON GRIDELEVATICI CII GRIDELEVATION ON GRID

PNASE PLAN AT fl

1

S

4

0

F.

3d

4

:4

to

We will now add the point that will mark the center of the top tread nosing by learning a newtool.

Click the Create point array icon. This allows you to locate a point at a reference directionand distance from any other point.

“a

Stairs and HandrailsCopyright® 2005 Tekla Corporation BSO1

n’IgVP1in yMa•Jvun•avsavi

flahcaJCoordinet -

X 5”

‘1’ 4’Q”

Z 21/2

‘‘°:“

• alz-7”112

• L OK j[ createj[ Reset ][ Cancejj

In the Coordinates section of the Point array window. type the values shown. Then hit theCreate button, which adds the red point seen below. DON’T close the dialog box or interruptthe command.

Next we will add a point for the bottom nosing. Go to the 3d view (right-click and select Nextwindow) and zoom in around El. Select the intersection at A6 as the Origin.

5BSO1 Copyflght @2005 Tekla Corporation TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAININGStairs and Handrails

rIn the Coordinates section of the Point array window, type the values shown. Then hit theCreate button, which adds the red point seen above. Click OK and then right-click Interrupt.

Select the Create view with two points icon.

nj

In the PLAN AT EL +12-7’112 view, select the top nosing point first followed by aperpendicular snap at Grid D as shown here. Right-click Interrupt.

C’L

This will create a-view along the plane which will become the center of the stairs.

Double-click in the newly created view to open up the View properties window.

otandard v [aj istandard

View

______________________

ENaen& PHASE 1 STAIR ELEVATION

EiAngIe ID P]ane vIE Rdelon aroundz 30 000Ô

Protection [@ Orthogonal E Rolarron acoundX [20 0000

Representation

fl View LIrpe Rendered

VmwdeØh Up &. -

EDo*n

E 1I Lifter... I

LQ1E 4c Ii Mo&y if Gel IP/rI[ cancat

Change the Angle, Lip, & Down fields and type the view name as shown above and hit theModify button. Click OK. Li

(.6 TEKLA STRUCTURES BAStC TRAINING

Stairs and NandrailsCopyright © 2005 Tekla Corporation 8501

Click the Find a component icon.

RI+

RI Equar

t7!!

Click OK to make these changes active and close the dialog window.

Click the lower point that we created at the bottom nosing point first and then the upper pointthat we created at the top nosing point. This will create a new stairs in our model. Right-clickInterrupt. Also close the Component catalog window.

Check the stair tread and rise values. Using the create X measure and Create Y measure tools,add the dimensions shown below to the elevation view.

Input the stair

Enter 74 and hit the Search button.

• ‘.!aP4I U-S I ZpS’4i

Double-click on the Z pan (574) icon to open up its dialog window.

On the Picture tab, enter the values shown in the fields below.

Picture Stair setup Z pan Brackek

f Perpenciiciiaiv RI 1..

V

RIo’ 1

/j3!3!!

1

Check stairdimensions

TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAININGStair, and Handrail,

BSD1 Copyright @2005 Tekla Corraon 7

n

U

Create X Measure

Create Y Measure

If everything has been donecorrectly, the values should comeout to exactly 7” and 11”

5.

Looking at the top of the stairs, you will notice that some changes are required to the toptread.

Double-click on any part of the stairs to open up the Z Pan (S74) window.

On the Z pan tab enter the values in the fields shown below and hit Modify. Also check thatthe bottom tread rise value is 6½”

C

C

0B TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING

Stairs and HandrailsCopyright @ 2005 TekIa Corporation BSOI

S in it

The result should look like the image shown below

lio flS

We also need to go to the Stair setup tab and select the option to make this stairs a completeassembly. Also enter STAIR in the Name field. Hit the Modify button to change the stairs inour model.

Pictue Star seto Zpan B,aC*C4

I bStingerpoUe C1<2O.1

St.irioei olalicti

P&ionkwlane

alice’

Dose Ito slop

C,ese bottom lsp

Locale asserol4’

Sl’ngeo detenc, fl

Pot_No Malen&

C c i—

H2tiiddte

ci

0e1ak

paime0 IsTAIR

TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAININGStairs and Handrails

S:Z s—

21HZ

pC,

BSO1 Copyright l) 2005 TokIa Corporation 9

We also need to change the weld from a field weld to a workshop weld. To do this, click thebutton which up the dialog box shown here. Change the Wshop!site option from site

(flag) to workshop (no flag) for weld #3.

Due to the complex nature of stairs, not all stairs can be created 100% with thesystem components. Use the system Stair components to get as much as you canand then model in the rest.

Finishing the bottom of the stringersWe will now create the bases for the stringers using regular system components. Firstlythough we must change the selection switch from Select Components to Select Objects inComponents. Otherwise, the system component we add for the base plate will not knowwhick member to add the connection to.

Now for the bottom of the stair stringers, zoom in at the bottom of the ride side stringer. Addtwo construction lines using the Create construction line command.

The first one can be added at the foundation line and then moved up 1.2”. Using the 1.J snapwill make it easier to add this construction line along the foundation grid line.

Tekia Structures Z Pan (574)

No S!:e 1çe A,4e rc”o.a Fn,l, Leh Prl, Edaa/I Wst,ooflfr RFI

1 sr1 ••ao .O U! —

EZ c.: V V

—

__

3 - L 01(00 •.— —- .-— .—--.—.-——.-—-.

—- VV 00000 C - -

Sllch Wied

No V;;

El Noel Bc cpt

ho.. j; -

N

4 b. 0-U0 r rsv

“.r”J:’ .H.°[____

1I‘i

Hit the Modify button to change the stairs in our model. Click OK on this dialog box only.

‘Select Objects in ComponentW

10 TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAININGStairs and Kandrails

tCopyright @ 2005 TekIa Cerration BSOI

The second one needs to be created at the centerline of the stringer. Use the Create divided

line points command ‘ to first add a point somewhere between a point along the top of thestringer and a perpendicular point at the bottom of the stringer as shown below.

The point this creates can be used along with the mid-point at the bottom of the stringer tocreate the second construction line.

p

The intersection of these construction lines is required to use the system component 1043.

Double-click Stairs detail (1043) from the Component catalog.

4The Stair detail (1043) component dialog opens.

TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING 1Stairs and Handralls

BSO1 Copyright @ 2D05 Tekla Corration

r

Select the Base_Condition_Left settings from the drop-down list and hit Load. Enter thevalue shown in the fields shown above and click Apply.

Pick the stringer and then the snap point as shown. This cuts the stringer as shown and adds abase angle. Right-click Interrupt

12 TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING


ft

La

Tc.kl. St t,tchjeps Stag It.co Detail ItNif

LJ LiOtnCt.

— — —

Ptn Pat; Bat

—

-

Copyrighi 2005 TekIa Corpotafion BSO1

Do the same to the left side stringer, but use the Base_Condition_Right settings.

1W lekla Structures Stdir Va%e Detail (1043) V

TErQA SIRuC]LRES BASIC 1RI1[NC 13Stairs and Handraits

Sa 1 E4_Jj Base_tondRionp,ght

ignore aIhert3ipes-

Pica,, P&, Bogs G&,e,M

EH) Baos_Condit,on_R,ght

[Welds..1 [_________

VS Biack& ie

zEE1— —ft —1

I_QKJ(j [_ !oy I Get j [E/ r

BSO1 Copyright @2005 Ted, Corporaton

Select the stringer and right-click Inquire> Assembly to see if all intend pieces are shopattached to the stairs.

IL ..

- oterwpo

--

--‘%

_________________________________

lnqjte

Copy

Oe!ete

St as reô maw, pa’ c-F assertly

Cone- cfgy

E,2c1 lsEs

F-ide F-we

This reveals that the bottom tread needs to be added to the stair assembly.

Use the create weld command to add the bottom tread to the entire assembly

After using the Create weld command, the bottom tread becomes part of the stair assembly.

ICreate weld

Select the left stringer first as the part to weld to, then the tread.

Then select the right stringer as the part to weld to then the tread once again.

Assigning Gage Material aftribute to treadsThe contract drawing calls for the treads to be made of 12 Gage material. The Gage for thetread needs to be identified in the parts User-defined attributes.

14 TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRdNINSStairs and Handralls

1

Copynight @ 2005 Tekla Corporation RSD1

Right-click and select User-defined attributes. This opens the User-defined attributeswindow.

First hit the (LCJ button to remove all the checks in front of each field.

Then on the Parameters tab, select SHTI2GA from the Gage Material option list and hitModify. DON’T close this dialog box.

A This does not physically change the thickness of the treads. It merely adds anattribute that can be used in reports and drawings in place of an imperialthickness value.

TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING 15Stairs and -landrails

lL);,Jal,ihop_ ]

Select the bottom tread in the 3d view.

k Tekia Structures Beam (I)Clwiçe ide,; IFU en, hod SISm

Pa,arnetero End code; Woe-flow I;;ue cmtol U Rn,

Shoder,

Ce,,ter

P,elo*ia,y rna,k

E,ad’n Menibe,

Ui.. ls I

U,., hell 2

Jet he’d 3

the’ held 4

Merebe, cob

hoed d,aoeng men v,e-a

DCCCC No

CCCC.CQ F,ore

jcaoe Maleojal EIfZ :J

___ ___ ____ ___

/r, EIIE1

BSO1 Copyrigtfl @ 20D5 Tekia Corrabon

BSI.2

In the 3d view, use the Ctrl+P on the keyboard to change the view to a 2d plan view. In thisview, select all the treads and then hit Modify in the UDA dialog box.

‘... Change the view display so that the main parts are rendered (CtrI+4) and thesecondary parts are shaded (Shift+2). This will make it easier to pick the treadswithout accidentally selecting other objects that you do not want to modi&.

Create Stair HandrailsTo create the required handrail system shown on the contract drawing, we will need to useseveral system components, a custom component, cutting tools, and model objectmanipulation techniques.

• Handrail system components S76, 577, 89, 77

• Custom component Handrail Splice

• Cutting tools Line cut & Polygon cut

• Modeling manipulation techniques moving, copying, splitting, & stretching

Create Stanchions (Posts) at stairsOpen up the Component catalog and search for component $76.

HSr,I’7p

Double-click on the Stanchions (S76) icon to open up the dialog box.

0

“a

‘a$ TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING

Stairs and HandrailsCopyright 2005 Takla Corporation BSO1

We need to change the fields shown abvve to affect the number of stanchions, and work pointto first post distance. Hit Apply. DON’T close the dialog box, but you may need to move it tothe side.

Click the midpoint at the bottom of the right stringer.

Then the midpoint at the top end of the right stringer

TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAiNING 17Stairs and Handrails

Save ] [ Load .landa,d

PICILJIC Raft, Pa,an,etei,

Jt Tekiji Struclijies Std,,chions (576)

daacd

T

XC: HL LiJL_Z7t

I I Maxi,num vi L_4_H

::i*

flK 1 [ pply J [Lád1y r fiat j i,’ri [ çnc&

BS3 Copyright €1 2005 Takia Corporation

Create Handrails

Close the Stanchion (S76) dialog

n

Next open up the Component catalog and search for component S77.

18 TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TINJNGStairs and Handralls

C

Then pick the stringer. Then middle mouse button click. The stanchions will appear up thestringer as shown in the image below. Right-click Interrupt. box.

Copydght C 2005 Tekia Coqxration BS01

Rã,s Sm

Click on the Railings (377) icon.

We will use the default settings for now and will modi& the ends later

5.

Modify Return Bend Lengths

6:

Measure the distance to the work point,(Grid Line 6) This is where our handrail will changefrom being horizontal to sloping.

TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRArNINS I SStairs and Handrails

ESO1 Copyright © 2005 Tekla CorporaUon

C,Now go to the Railings dialog and input the values as shown. The railing will stand out 2-0’from the last stanchion. The bends will occur at grid line 6 which is 10 5/16” away from thelast stanchion. Therefore we have to input 2-0” minus 10 5/16’ as the value in the dialoge box(1311/16)

1W Fekla SI rod ores Railings (Si!)

20 TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINIftGStairs and Handrails

standrnd

P,ctLJrv Parts Pa,amete,s

%0

ELds_J

Si-cl-a, ,sdecint

Bends

save as standa,d

M,dde Rats Slancljons

:zzzzzp

0 Debut

I HeP.. I

2

V

OW2 W

Ii

IC’

C

1020 I 2 0”

lao”

an”

___ ___A

Rano postlion

Pt&d ,otation

0 Left 1

I cJ Li Moy I F g/rj

The result will look like the image shown below.

,r.c...,v

,1

UCopyright 2005 TelcIa Corporation BSOI

Input the value as shown

o stances IEQK J F áPPYJ [ cancel

Click OK

Input the points as shown, rightmost point first.

Create workpoints

Now we will modi’ the bottom of the handrail manually to make it conform to the contractdrawing.

Working in the elevation view.

Double-click the Create Parallel Points tool

TEKLA s’RucruREs BAsic TRAINING 21Stairs and Handrails

B501 Copyright © 2005 Tekta Corporaüon

r

Make sure you have this icon pressed down.

Adjust rails Next select the bottom elbow piece and then while holding down the Ctrl key on thekeyboard, select the small horizontal piece next to it. Then right-click and chose the Move>Translate option.

CL

Two points will be added 20 below the points clicked.

Now right click and select Interrupt

22 TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRRJNING

Stairs and HandrailsCDpyriqhl @ 2005 Tekla Corporation BS01

Pick the point at the elbow then the point above it that we just added. Make sure the valuesagree with the graphic shown above.

Click the Move button and these pieces will move up as shown below. Right-click Interrupt.DONT close the Move > Translate window.

Next select the vertical rail which reveals its yellow start point. Select this start point and hitMove. Click OK.

The bottom return now looks like this. Delete the two small remaining pieces to the left of thebottom stanchion.

—.-...-.,,.,,-

iptransiaw

BSOI Copyrtght © 2005 Tekla Corporation TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TBAINING 23Stairs and Handr&Is

r

Next select the small horizontal rail which reveals its yellow start point. Select this start pointand right-click, Move> Translate. Pick the yellow start point and then perpendicular snap atthe stanchion.

Clear j [W / r I [cancel I

Our bottom return now looks like this. Inquire> Assembly to check if all pieces are attachedas required.

24 TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TININGStairs and Handrails

¶

(3

Hit Move and then click OK. Right-cLick Interrupt

Copyright® 2005 Tekla Corcration BSOI

BSI.3

Create Stanchions

Create Handrails Along LandingNow we will begin adding the horizontal railing along the beam 7-0 North of grid I. We willadd this set of posts by working in the PLAN AT EL. 12-7’! view

Double-click the Stanchion (S76) component from the Component catalog to open it.

TEKLA STRUDTURES BASIC WNM3 25Stairs and Handrails

Stl Oe,jrgit@25eaCo’prat,

26 TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAININGStairs and Kandrails

.? Tekla Structures Stanchions (576) n(

[bet P

3-8%’

‘a [oj

Save Load] sla,djd [ Saveas J st&daca

PcIu;e Pails Paiamelei

I__/43.0111

LL C

____

fZiitLJE[5 0” H

I ‘aMaeimum vi I—H

Ellun” Et6’HI

[ oKj[ pp.] [NocyJ J (aceIC

The values we entered in earlier should still be present since we applied them before weclosed the dialog box. These stanchions will be changed slightly to conform with thedrawings. The stanchions are to be bolted to the web of the beam. and the finished floor levelis 2’/” above the top flange of the beam so we must add to the overall height of the stanchions

Make the changes shown above.

Click the Parameters tab and select the Elbow w/plt for the connection at the bottom of theposts.

CCopyright © 2005 Tekla Corporation 0501

Click OK.

Now use the Endpoint snap to make sure you dick the ends of the beam as shown below.

Once the endpoints have been clicked, select the supporting beam then click the middlemouse button. This adds the stanchions as shown above. Notice it added stanchions based onthe spacing we indicating in the dialog box.

Add stanchionsaround corner.

Now add the stanchions around the corner of the landing, Continue adding the Stanchions(S76) component by clicking the points shown below then selecting the supporting beam

TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TR4INING 27Stairs and Handrails

r Save j [ Load ] [standard

Tekia Structures Stanchions (516)

Pwje Fats 2&&fl&5

Slnhiai pIO&JcI nane

Save aJ standard

Corneclion seting type

Stanchion conn&ction type

ERL

Connection number

r

Connection properties

2 Dslaut

El Elbow w/Plt.rrrrr

CEl standard El [auto

______I

[ pp’y i MDdf I r1r1 [W/Tfl I ancdJ

BSCI Copyright © 2005 Tekla Corporarion

1

Notice that the setting we used automatically adjusted the spacing of the posts to make surethat the 5 posts we requested in the system component are present. Open the SystemComponent to adjust this.

Make sure the Select Components switch is pressed down and double click the stanchions.Change the number of stanchions as shown below and click Modify

28 TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAIJINGStairs and Handrails

r

r

C,

Click the middle mouse button.

Copyrighl @ 2005 Tekla corporation BSO

Check that the posts have modified.

TEICR SRtJCTURES MSIC TR4InG 29St&rs and Handrails

E!_1 L LoJ standara

Pttuie Pact Parameteic

‘t Tekia Structures Stanchions (576)

rsave as ] standard

____I

[ .]

1

P I Maxmum vj

as’

o’.

L]LiPJ FMo] [ j p/r3

SSD Cz,h@2OO5 Te,a Gcrator

Create HandrailsDouble-click the Railing (577) component from the Component catalog to open it.

r

Now select each of the stanchions around the landing in turn from left to right. Then click themiddle mouse button to tend the command.

Copydght © 2005 Takla Corporaion 8501

C

I _I Ldr1 standard

W Tekia Structures Railings (S//)

_____________ -

Picture Parlt Parameters Bends

‘EJ as I standard

El[Wdds_I

Slancirion selectnn

Mde flails Stanchions

EJ Delassir V

El°’

ElU.

El

.- IEl r _fA

Rnç posiat

Pmoade msl&n

2 Lear V

0

El Jz

_____

I ©n* 1 I M°v I I One I [Ffl çancei

Select standard and load the settings.

Click OK

3Q TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC tRAu[fttNOStairs and Kandrails

The values we entered in earlier should still be present since we applied them before we

Create Corner ElbowsNext we wi]l add an elbow at the far right corner

Double-click the Railing beam to plane (89) component from the Component catalog toopen it.

TEKLA STRUCTL’RES BASIC TINRG 31

r:ç.

—

I‘1

,7

Repeat the command for the handrails at the return.

closed the dialog box.

BSOI Copyright tO 2005 Tekia Corporaton

Stairs and Handraits

Pahng beam to pla

tie (88]

On the Parameters tab change the Method of construction to Extend and click OK.

Telda Structures Railing beam to plane (89)

(.

DEl EEl :e’onda.

C°Q’C Other pots

Pcls.e Pats Porotreposs Gooses

Ufldoa’,IrsIth,

Lee Ir I

L.hh2

0

0rerend-

HIOr

or —1

Select the vertical rail and then the horizontal rail. The far right corner of the handrail systemshould look the image below.

Create elbows at900 bend inhandrail

Now complete the 900 corners.

On the parameters tab of the Railing beam to plane (89) component change the Up Directionto +y U32 TEKLR STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING

Stairs and HandrailsCopyght © 2005 Tekia corporaton BS01

EJ [ LJ stanead v

____

ntanda,d He jg.,C;e he’ ‘pe,

______

Pictuic Paits Paiametei 6enei

Updiiection-

I .‘

0CDt

Locked IEIN0Clan

Coiiiection code F - -

Aute4acis iula ioup l None vAweda,ii4eg, E Ncq’e

IL I p/rj

Now click the uppermost short rail followed by the uppermost long rail

You must have the ‘select objects in components selection switch applied to

! ensure the program knows exactly which rails you are attempting to connect.

Select Objects In Components’

The result should look like the image shown below

BSO1 Copyright@ 2005 Tekla Corporaton TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRRINING 33Stairs and Handrails

Tekla Structures Railing beam to pldne (89)

On the Parameters tab change the Method of construction to Create and click OK and repeatthe process for the lower 3 rails. This ensure that the posts remain continuous through theconnections rather than the rails.

34 TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC T4INIWGStairs and Flandrails

(0

aL

[ Load ] standard

modit connection type H

I (kIl Structures RiIing plane to plan (90)

Picture[Pasts Parameters General

vI [ias ] standard

[Welds...

Method of constpuctton

Leg length 1

leg length 2

Fabscalor name

fleip..

El àeale HIEl’

____

a j [MoyJ [ ] lw/F] [ca’cei)

CopyrLght@ 2005 Jeida Corporation BSCI

Create returnbends at top ofstair

FinaLly we will add the bends at the top of the stair where they meet the horizontal rails.Double-click the Railing beam to plane (89) component from the Component catalog toopen it.

A ading beam to beam (891

For the top rail, on the Parameters tab change the Method of construction to Extend.

le4cla Sti ‘rIures Railing beam to beam (38)

LSaveJ r Load J atandaid

modify connection type

P.chze Pss P .ens Geneia

La as J andatd

lJ [weids 1

Method at constiuctian

TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAINING

t

/

BSGI Copyngb @2005 TekIa Corporadon

Stairs and Handrails35

ISeJ[Lo1rr’p cycLài e

P&ae Pats Parncas 6enc,

Method ci consliLietlon

v[Save]

lI_Creale

Now that the modeling of the stair and handrail has been completed the model should nowlook like this.

36 TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TINING

For the remaining rails, on the Parameters tab change the Method of construction to Create.

lyr Teklo Sb uctures Railing boo’’’ to bean, (88)

¶

- L*J

CL

Stairs and HandrailsCopydght © 2005 Tekla Corporatjon BSOI

Prepare the AssembliesSelect the Select Assemblies selection switch

Move your mouse over the handrai] and notice that the entire handrailing highlights.

TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAiNING 37

We can now start to create the stair and handrail output.

BSOl CDpyrighl @ 2DDS Tekla Corporalion


e

It

This means that if we were to produce an assembly drawing of this item, absolutelyeverything would be shown on the drawing and the result would be difficult to read.

To avoid this we will separate this assembly into 3 smaller assemblies by removing the partsthat join the assemblies at the locations where we want to split the assemblies. These partswill become ‘ship loose items’ once they are removed.

We will split the assembly at the retums at the top of the stair and the 9Q0 bend on grid line 6

(S

38 TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC 1rNING

Stairs and HandrallsCopyright ce 25 Tekia Corporation BSO1

Highlight the top rail return as shown below then right click on the mouse.

Select Remove from assembly from the list

BS3 I Cgpflh: V 2005 Tea Cocpomn 7EKA STRUCTURES BASIC TRANNG 39

Select the Select Objects in Assemblies selection switch

44

444

- —I

Stairs and -fandrails

Hide

I.

I.

Show assembly

Fit by parts

Create vie.’Drawing

Zoom

,tdate i,ndowNext wnidoo’.’

Add to assemDiy

1/.

Click Yes to confirm the removal.

Repeat the process for the lower three parts.

Now switch the Select Assemblies selection switch back on and mouse over the stair handrail.Notice that it now only highlights the sloping handrail.

40 TFKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAININGStairs and Handrails

0,

C

I COPS

Move

Interrupt

Propertes,.User-defined atfributes...

Inquire

Dee

Set as new main part of assembly

Center o’ gravito

E:act linesHide lines

Delete confirmation

\ Assembly struclure includes weldings or boltsDelete weldings and bolts?

Lxø IL No

CopynhI © 2005 TeIcla Corporation BSO1

Now do the same for the 4 elbows at the 990 bend. Dont forget to switch your Select objectsin assemblies back on.

j

TEKLA SIRIJCTURES BASIC TRINNG 41Stairs and Handrails

Once this has been completed we can run the drawings.

5531 Copyht @ 2005 tekla Cocorator

BSI.4 Create Drawings

Stair Drawing

ii Pmjecl...

Phaea number.

Sirgieperl drwwpg.

-we arwwFng

Genera] ermnoe’mer d’swng

!) Mut].drawirg.

,) Laycis.

Select the Stairs_with_BOM settings from the drop-down list and hit Load.

Then click OK.

Select the one of the stringers in the model and then select Assembly drawing from theDrawing menu.

42 TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TRAININGStairs and Handrails

Next we will create an Assembly drawing of the Stairs, From the Properties menu. select theAssembly drawings which open up the dialog box shown below.

“jeer...

Sleeper’., ciC&erece pans •

Sj4ace eme.

Bei

Gnarnfer

-

* Assembly drawing properties

Save (j_ -- I Stail’Mth BUM Sraprc_w’th._BO

ONn.

21. J.IUciese Saclion Y]ese or devalion o4 beck ,tnng. fl png nsa the

mont view peopertes and changing the Ealienia &i’ In zero

0

P

‘9U

2 [ LaiorL

2 Gnno. 22 I —- 102 [ Pa’maL J2 1 Picaeclinii 12O Srasace Iiewrej 22 [ Dd&tha

v.. Jo [ s—Oensxnin J [secmacyenfrA I

[ Bel J2Newp.I IBesrr.lr 2 LNeto4p&k.]

Canecoeimak [ w ]Snilace I’aSTTreal ma.’__j 0 1 Seal

Ucer-defned akèr4,:

_______ _____

cancal

Copytght© 2G05 Tekia Corporalpor 5501

“CU ‘P a C

,2

0

S

w 0 0 C)

0 0 © 0 0 Cr

0) C-)

0 0) 0•

-4 m c 0,

C C)

C

cn 0

,

an

a0

)

am

C— —

t to

0 DI

oE

’Oo

roe C

a-C

a

a o aC

r

01-t

C <

1 <0

0.

ao

a-I

01 o

OC

t

94; a

00 a 0 C0 a 0 0 0 0 n 0

10) 01 00 (0

@0 H

In a I W f0I 0)

=00

CD0 C

,

I0

x

S5<

155

55

I 6R 55

-r

ITS Is fill

[Iii

!t:j

LJa-

-

a-

<:<

20-

)a

-

Ct

o0

-

- -4z

,01

01a

=Cd

’Cs

)-4

—on

—.

—.

a-‘

8ri

0t

a-C 0 -

001

Ct

p00 0 “0

0a 01 C

aC

tCd

’-4

01

pa

0;-

0-

0C

n 0 01

0) on 0 a a C p 0-

0- a a 0 0 C —

C U -. p E 01 00

x 0

ii

Cl,

Go to the Attributes 2 tab and change the Minimum Cut Part Length as shown.

if View properties

Sae Load I fliaveas j 1yti,bM

-

Attrues 1 Attrivtes 2 Label

Aeptesentation oF deformed objects

Urilolded No

EUebrm No V

Shortening

Cut pails: Yes Cut skew parts: No V

Minimum cut part length: ISpace between cul pails: L1)128

Other

No

1] Datum point for elevations: Specified v’

Dattxn level:

Click Modify ft/

— This setting shortens items on the drawing when it detects there are no events’(bolts, holes, plates etc.) along the item for each section of the specifieddimension. The result is that the smaller the dimension specified is, the morethe part will be shortened.

By speci1’ing a large dimension here we have reduced the programs capacity to shorten theitem. Thus the stair looks better on the drawing.

Once the drawing redraws, the views may be outside the border.- Right click your mouse in blank space and select Place Views in

Propertes.., order to correct this.

Place views

Part marks

Update marks

Update veids

Nce:lJnhide

tiCS

Loom

UpdateF4ext ‘,.‘indow

(1

44 TEK STRUCTURES BASIC TINING pynghI @25 TekEa rporaIior BSOIStairs and Handralis

Handrail Drawing

Finish cleaning up the stair drawing by adding, deleting, and moving any and all necessarydimensions required for your shop.

Once finished, close and save the stair drawing.

Repeat the steps to create a drawing for one of the handrails. However, this time use thesetting Handrail_withfioM from the drop-down list.

Assembly drawing properties

____

rsvzIE Dimensen.

.- J 21 [ Dimensiodni I 2) Eo, ntoI..

2)r- fl 12)It

The default settings for handrails is to list Total Length in the drawings BOM.

Save Ii ioaJ HandteiL with BUM ]j F Save as I HdLvuth.

ElNsre RANDRML

21 T& CoMes h&ta i’ing e#h mend &j re d -ee& thrnrn.

Add sections and dir,ensione en required- -

- — -- -

Men Part’s Rotation in Model r,eeds robe FRONt —-—

-

The handrail drawing should look like this.

BSO1 qyi @ 25 Tekia Corpo,attn TEK,A STRuCTURES BASIC TINiNG 45Stairs and Handrails

If this is desired then all part marks need to be removed from the drawings.

Double-click in the drawings background. Then click the Part mark button.

In the Main part section, remove the <<Part position>> element.

C)

0

In the Secondary part section, remove the <<Part position>> element.

46 TEKLA STRUCTURES BASIC TF{AININC BSOI

VC

BILL OF MATERLALCT Ceszqr-—. ‘:LpKs

HPJI I

PIPHI-lr2SCHdtI Q-&3il’-

ROD L4 93—0 1. DI

Assenbiy - port mark propertit.

Øc—

_____________

—

“‘““ Tj.

F

- HØi 3132

F,- iA

:e-- -

V

EZrz-EE ZZr

c AssmbIy - part nark properties

Caacn

2

________

A.’.—ii”- is ‘— —

t: tJ::—- F, A..

-

anC—.,—— a —

4 3

LEZiLfJ

Stairs and HandrailsCopyright 2005 Tekla CorraIion

Finish cleaning up the handrail drawing by adding, deleting, and moving any and allnecessary dimensions required for your shop.

Once finished, close and save the handrail drawing.

Change the Handrail BOM typeFrom the Properties menu, select the Project option.button to open up the dialog box shown here.

Then hit the User-defined attributes

‘_

.

tTAfl

On the More Drawing Switches tab, change the option

______ ____

Click OK.3!LL C MATERIAL

MARK 0Th’ DE:C,F1JN ENGW REMARKS

‘IR’ 1 RAil

:4 ‘-r-,m46 -

.itP’ ‘;H-!, ::‘1.*

jn/ -- PIPE.1:’.’il;H4fl

5* I PI}’il—i :il,CEMO

—:S PfPPI 1;SOO

TEKLA STRUCTURES BASC TR NIG 47Stairs and Handrails

PsoktL Ii)

BILL OP MATERIAL

LJ L±J USL

shown above to No and click Modify.

Now when you re-open the handrail drawingthe BOM list each individual part as shownhere.

S& Copyriçht @ 2005 Tda Corran

tekla handbook lt

Documents

tekla software

use of software

manual tekla

specific software

party software products

relevant software product

trademark of tekla corporation

tekla corporation copyright